T R E R I C E P R O D U C T C A T A L O G

Pressure Gauges Pages 2-79

Process Gauges 6-9
Industrial Gauges 10-13
Commercial & Contractor Gauges 14-21
Utility Gauges 22-27
Specialty Gauges 28-38
Pressure Gauge Options & Accessories 40-58
Diaphragm Seals 60-79

Temperature Instrumentation Pages 80-162

Industrial Thermometers 82-99
Dial Thermometers 100-117
Bimetal Thermometers 118-134
Electric Temperature Sensors 136-149
Thermowells 150-162

Regulators & Control Valves Pages 164-267

Temperature Regulators 168-191
Pressure Regulators 192-202
Controllers 203-212
Controller Accessories 214-221
Control Valves 222-260
Technical Information 261-267

1
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Table of Contents
PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure Gauges Design & Operation 4
PRESSURE GAUGES

Process Gauges
Solid front, blow-out
back safety gauges well 450 Series 6
suited for most process Solid Front • Field Liquid Fillable • Turret Case
requirements.

750 Series 8
Solid Front • Field Liquid Fillable • Stainless Steel Case

Industrial Gauges
Accurate and durable
gauges for a broad spectrum 500X Series 10
of industrial needs.
Dial Sizes thru 12” • Cast Aluminum Case

700 Series 12
Field Liquid Fillable • Stainless Steel Case

Commercial & Contractor Gauges

Compact and dependable
gauges used by construction
and HVAC industries.
600CB Cast Aluminum Case 14

610CB Glass Filled Nylon Case 16

620B Stainless Steel Case 18

690 Series Multiple Stainless Steel Case Styles 20

Utility Gauges
Economically priced
gauges suited for a D80 Series Dry or Liquid Filled • Stainless Steel Case 22
variety of general
applications.
800B Dry • Black Finished Steel Case 24

800LFB Liquid Filled • Plastic Case 26

2
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Table of Contents
PRESSURE GAUGES
Specialty Gauges
Products designed to meet the
needs of specialized industrial 760B 28

PRESSURE GAUGES
markets; including low-pressure Low Pressure Gauge • Black Finished Steel Case
gas, sanitary and remote reading
applications.
766SS 30
Low Pressure Gauge • Stainless Steel Case

700TA 32
Sanitary Gauge with Integrated Diaphragm Seal

700Plus 34
Industrial Transmitter Gauge

Special Application Ranges 36-38

Pressure Gauge Options & Accessories

Enhancements to customize and optimize pressure Optional Case Styles 40-50
gauge performance, along with the necessary
accessories to complete any installation. Optional Features 51-54
Accessories 55-58

Diaphragm Seals Design & Operation 60-63

Protective devices that isolate a pressure sensing
instrument from the process fluid being monitored. Threaded-NPT 64
Especially useful when measuring corrosive or
viscous pressure mediums. Flange-Mounted 66
In-line Threaded 68
Saddle-Welded 70
Drop-in Welded 72
Mini & Compact 74
Sanitary 76
Options & Accessories 78-79

3
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Pressure Gauges
DESIGN & OPERATION
Description
PRESSURE GAUGES

CASE
A pressure gauge is a mechanical
BLOW-OUT
DIAL
BACK
instrument designed to measure the
internal pressure and/or vacuum of a
DIAPHRAGM vessel or system. Trerice Pressure Gauges
are offered in a variety of styles, sizes, and
POINTER wetted part materials to meet the demands
BOURDON of standard and special applications.
TUBE

RING
Principles of Operation
WINDOW
Most Trerice Pressure Gauges are constructed
MOVEMENT with a bourdon tube sensing element. When
the sensing element is subjected to pressure,
it flexes and the resulting motion is transmitted
SOLID CASE
SOCKET FRONT as a measurement through a mechanical
movement to the dial face pointer.
SEAL

Selecting a Pressure Gauge

Case
Cases are available in a wide variety of materials and All Trerice Pressure Gauges should
configurations. The combination of material and configuration be carefully selected to meet the
is generally determined by the demands of the application, demands of the particular application.
The information contained in this
as well as the preferences of the gauge specifier. The more catalog is only offered as a guide to
demanding the environment, the more rugged the case construction assist in making the proper selection.
____________________________________________
(i.e., polypropylene or stainless steel for industrial applications
vs. aluminum or steel for construction or commercial applications). Improper application may cause failure
of the gauge, resulting in possible
Gauge mounting or retrofitting needs may affect case selection personal injury or property damage.
(i.e., a gauge to be panel mounted will require either a front flange For correct use and application of all
or u-clamp style case). For safety considerations, a “solid-front” case pressure gauges, please refer to
Pressure Gauge Standard ASME
style may be required. Each application will have a unique B40.100. This document may be
set of requirements which will help guide the specifier in selecting obtained from the American Society
the appropriate case style. of Mechanical Engineers (ASME),
Three Park Avenue, New York, NY
10016-5990.
Wetted Parts and Pressure Medium
Under normal operating conditions, only the tube and socket assembly (Wetted Parts) of a pressure gauge
will come into contact with the fluid being measured (Pressure Medium). The selection of the assembly will be
determined by the composition of the medium. Air, gas, steam, water and other noncorrosive media are usually
satisfied by a bronze or brass bourdon tube and brass socket assembly. Stainless steel or Monel wetted parts are
used when the medium contains corrosive elements or when high operating pressures or temperatures will be
encountered. A diaphragm seal is recommended for highly corrosive media or that which may solidify or deposit
solids within the tube and socket assembly of the gauge. (See the Diaphragm Seal section of this catalog.)

4
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Connection and Mounting
The socket connection provides an entrance port for the process medium as well as a means to mount

PRESSURE GAUGES
the gauge to a pipeline or vessel. Male connections can be provided with NPT, BSPT, or other thread styles,
in sizes from 1/8" through 1/2". A high-pressure, 9/16" LHT connection is also available. The mounting location
indicates where the connection protrudes from the case. Trerice Pressure Gauges are available with three
standard mounting locations: lower male (LM), lower back male (LBM), and center back male (CBM).
Other connection locations may be available on some models.

Window and Ring

The window provides a means for viewing the measurement, as well as protection of the dial face and
pointer of the instrument, and is normally held in place by a ring, which is screwed or snapped to the case
of the gauge. Plastic, clear glass and laminated glass are common window materials. Ring styles include
threaded, bayonet, friction, crimped and hinged, depending upon the case type.

Pointer
There are essentially three types of pointers available on Trerice Pressure Gauges: a micro-adjustable
pointer (providing high quality and accuracy); a friction-type pointer (providing adjustability and durability);
and a plain, non-adjustable pointer (providing economic reliability).

Accuracy
The accuracy of a pressure gauge is expressed as a percentage (plus or minus) of the maximum scale
range. Please refer to Pressure Gauge Standard ASME B40.100.

Measurement Range and Dial

The maximum operating pressure of the application should not exceed 75% of the During system start-up or
measurement range selected. Therefore, the specified range should be twice the shut-down, system pres-
sures can greatly exceed
normal operating point of the gauge to avoid damage to the gauge internal. A wide intended conditions.
variety of measurement ranges is available, from 30" Hg vacuum through 20,000 Pressure gauges should be
psi pressure. Ranges are indelibly presented in black figures and markings upon protected by appropriate
isolation devices such as,
a white dial face. but not limited to, needle
valves, gauge cocks, etc.
Environmental Conditions
Pressure gauge selection will be influenced by the environmental conditions Pressure gauges provide an
excellent and reliable means
under which the gauge is expected to perform. Condensation or waterproofing of measuring and indicating
concerns can be addressed through the use of hermetically sealed or process conditions, however
weatherproofed gauges. Case construction should be considered when selecting they are passive devices.
They are not substitutes for
a gauge to be used in conditions of extreme or sustained heat or cold, or where active safety devices. For
the atmospheric environment may contain corrosive elements. start-up or test situations on
closed loop systems, a safety
relief device must be used.
Liquid Filling
Liquid filling (glycerin, silicone or other fills) can prolong the life of a pressure
gauge by minimizing wear on the gauge internal resulting from vibration or
oscillation. Liquid filling also acts as a permanent lubricant to the moving parts
of the instrument.

5
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 450 Series
Solid Front • Field Liquid Fillable • Turret Case
Specifications
Models Wetted Parts
450B (dry) Bronze tube,
450LFB (liquid-filled) brass socket
PROCESS GAUGES

450SS (dry) 316 stainless steel*

450LFSS (liquid-filled) tube and socket

450M (dry) Monel tube and socket

450LFM (liquid-filled) (meets NACE MR 01.75)

DIal Size 41/2"

Fill Glycerine. Other fills available.

See Options & Accessories

Movement Stainless steel

Connection Lower male or lower back male,
1/4 or 1/2 NPT

Case Fiberglass reinforced polypropylene,

41/2" Dial Size
turret, solid front with blow-out back
±0.5% Accuracy
Ring Threaded fiberglass reinforced
450B shown Solid Front/Blow-Out Back polypropylene
Field Liquid Fillable
Window Acrylic

Pointer Micro adjustable, black finished

The Trerice 450 Series Process Gauge • Optional features available: Dial Face Aluminum, white background with
is designed for the petrochemical and Please consult the Options black graduations and markings
& Accessories Section for
industrial process industries. This solid details. Additional Features
front, blow-out back gauge is noted for Overload and underload stops
its fiberglass reinforced polypropylene • For correct use and
turret case and screwed ring; its sturdy application of all pressure Accuracy ±0.5% Full Scale,
gauges, please refer to: ASME B40.100 Grade 2A
interior design; and its field liquid-fill
Pressure Gauge Standard
capability (no kit required). The 450 Maximum Temperature
ASME B40.100.
Series can withstand the most rugged 450B, 450SS, 450M:
250°F (121°C)
industrial applications, while maintaining
450LFB, 450LFSS, 450LFM:
precise accuracy. Wetted parts are 150°F (65°C)
bronze tube/brass socket, stainless
steel, or Monel. Approximate Shipping Weight
450B, 450SS, 450M:
2.2 lbs [1.00 kg]
450LFB, 450LFSS, 450LFM:
3.1 lbs [1.41 kg]

* Ranges over 10,000 PSI have Ni-Span-C tube.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 450LFB 45 02 L D 110

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
450B 45 41/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower A psi See Standard
450LFB 04 1/2 NPT B Back B kPa Ranges
450SS C kg/cm2
450LFSS D psi/kPa
450M E psi & kg/cm2
450LFM

6
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 450 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Solid Front • Field Liquid Fillable • Turret Case

PROCESS GAUGES
Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) kPa Ranges (B) kg/cm2 Ranges (C)
Range Specific Range Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.2 010 -100 to 0 kPa 10 1 010 76 cm Hg to 0 10 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 5/5 0.5/0.2 020 -100 to 100 kPa 20 2 020 76 cm Hg to 1 kg/cm2 20/0.2 1/.02
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/0.5 030 -100 to 200 kPa 50 2 030 76 cm Hg to 2 kg/cm2 20/0.5 2/.02
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 1/1 040 -100 to 400 kPa 50 5 040 76 cm Hg to 4 kg/cm2 25/0.5 5/.05
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/10 2/1 050 -100 to 600 kPa 100 5 050 76 cm Hg to 7 kg/cm2 76/1 5/0.1
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2 060 -100 to 1000 kPa 100 10 060 76 cm Hg to 10 kg/cm2 76/1 15/0.1
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/2 070 -100 to 2000 kPa 200 20 070 76 cm Hg to 21 kg/cm2 76/2 19/0.2
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.1 080 0 to 100 kPa 10 1 080 0 to 1 kg/cm2 0.1 0.01
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.2 090 0 to 200 kPa 20 2 090 0 to 2 kg/cm2 0.2 0.02
100 0 to 60 psi 10 0.5 100 0 to 400 kPa 50 5 100 0 to 4.2 kg/cm2 0.5 0.05
110 0 to 100 psi 10 1 110 0 to 700 kPa 100 5 110 0 to 7 kg/cm2 1 0.05
120 0 to 160 psi 20 1 120 0 to 1200 kPa 200 10 120 0 to 11 kg/cm2 1 0.1
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 130 0 to 1500 kPa 300 10 130 0 to 14 kg/cm2 2 0.1
140 0 to 300 psi 50 2 140 0 to 2000 kPa 200 20 140 0 to 21 kg/cm2 3 0.2
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 150 0 to 3000 kPa 300 20 150 0 to 28 kg/cm2 4 0.2
160 0 to 600 psi 50 5 160 0 to 4000 kPa 500 50 160 0 to 42 kg/cm2 6 0.5
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 10 180 0 to 7000 kPa 1000 50 180 0 to 70 kg/cm2 10 0.5
Ranges over 1000 psi are not available on 450B and 450LFB.
190 0 to 1500 psi 300 10 190 0 to 10,000 kPa 1000 100 190 0 to 100 kg/cm2 10 1
200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20 200 0 to 14,000 kPa 2000 100 200 0 to 140 kg/cm2 20 1
210 0 to 3000 psi 300 20 210 0 to 20,000 kPa 2000 200 210 0 to 210 kg/cm2 30 2
220 0 to 5000 psi 500 50 220 0 to 35,000 kPa 5000 250 220 0 to 350 kg/cm2 50 2
230 0 to 10,000 psi 1000 100 230 0 to 60,000 kPa 10,000 500 230 0 to 700 kg/cm2 100 10
Ranges over 10,000 psi are only available on 450SS and 450LFSS, and have Ni-Span-C tubes.
240 0 to 15,000 psi 2000 100 240 0 to 100,000 kPa 20,000 1000 240 0 to 1000 kg/cm2 100 10
250 0 to 20,000 psi 2000 200 250 0 to 140,000 kPa 20,000 1000 250 0 to 1400 kg/cm2 200 20
For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) or E (psi & kg/cm 2) followed by the equivalent A (psi) Range Code. Other pressure
ranges are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia, Refrigerant and Receiver. Consult Special Application Ranges section or factory for availability.

7
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 750 Series
Solid Front • Field Liquid Fillable • Stainless Steel Case
Specifications
Models Wetted Parts
750SS (dry) 316 stainless steel tube
750LFSS (liquid-filled) and socket
PROCESS GAUGES

750M (dry) Monel tube and socket

750LFM (liquid-filled) (meets NACE MR 01.75)

Dial Size 4"

Fill Glycerine. Other fills available.

See Options & Accessories.

Movement Stainless steel

Connection Lower male,
1/4 or 1/2 NPT

Case 304 stainless steel, satin finished,

4" Dial Size stem-mounted flangeless,
solid front with blow-out back
±1.0% Accuracy
Ring Bayonet type, 304 stainless steel
Stainless Steel Case
Solid Front/Blow-Out Back Window Laminated safety glass
750SS shown
Field Liquid Fillable Pointer Plain, black finished

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

black graduations and markings
The Trerice 750 Series Process • Optional features available:
Please consult the Options
Accuracy ±1.0% Full Scale,
Gauge is designed for the varying ASME B40.100 Grade 1A
& Accessories Section for
needs of the world’s process industries. details.
This solid front/blow-out back gauge Maximum Temperature
750SS, 750M:
features a stainless steel case and • For correct use and 250°F (121°C)
ring. Its sturdy interior design and application of all pressure
750LFSS, 750LFM:
gauges, please refer to: 150°F (65°C)
field liquid-fill capability (no kit
Pressure Gauge Standard
required) provide the durability, ASME B40.100. Approximate Shipping Weight
accuracy and safety required for 750SS, 750M:
industrial process applications. 1.3 lbs [0.59 kg]
Wetted parts are stainless steel 750LFSS, 750LFM:
or Monel. 1.8 lbs [0.82 kg]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 750SS 40 04 L D 120

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
750SS 40 4" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower A psi See Standard
750LFSS 04 1/2 NPT D psi/kPa Ranges
750M
750LFM

8
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 750 Series
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters Solid Front • Field Liquid Fillable • Stainless Steel Case

PROCESS GAUGES
Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A)
Range Specific Range Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/5 0.5/0.5
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/1
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 2/1
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/20 2/2
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/5
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.2
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.5
100 0 to 60 psi 10 1
110 0 to 100 psi 10 2
120 0 to 160 psi 20 2
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2
140 0 to 300 psi 50 5
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5
160 0 to 600 psi 100 10
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 20
190 0 to 1500 psi 300 20
200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20
210 0 to 3000 psi 500 50
220 0 to 5000 psi 1000 100
230 0 to 10,000 psi 2000 200
Ranges over 10,000 psi are ONLY available
on 750SS or 750LFSS.
240 0 to 15,000 psi 2000 200
250 0 to 20,000 psi 2000 200
For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D
(psi/kPa) followed by the corresponding A (psi) Range Code. Other
pressure ranges are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia,
Refrigerant and Receiver. Consult Special Application Ranges
section or factory for availability.

9
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 500X Series
Dial Sizes thru 12” • Cast Aluminum Case
Specifications
Models Wetted Parts
INDUSTRIAL GAUGES

500XB Bronze tube, brass socket

500XSS 316 stainless steel tube and socket *

Dial Sizes 41/2", 6", 81/2", 12"

Movement Stainless steel

Connection Lower male or lower back male,
1/4 or 1/2 NPT

Case Cast aluminum, black finished,

surface mounted back flanged

Ring 41/2", 6", 81/2" Dial Size: Friction

type, 304 stainless steel

12" Dial Size: Friction type,

steel, black finished

Window Clear glass

41/2", 6”, 81/2", 12” Dial Sizes Pointer 41/2", 6", 81/2" Dial Size: Micro
500XB shown ±0.5% Accuracy adjustable, black finished,

Cast Aluminum Case 12" Dial Size: Plain, black finished

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

black graduations and markings
The Trerice 500X Series Industrial • Optional features and case
Gauge is designed to withstand the style variations available: Accuracy ±0.5% Full Scale,
Please consult the Options ASME B40.100 Grade 2A
most demanding applications of a
& Accessories Section for
variety of industries. This pressure details. Maximum Temperature
gauge has a back flanged, cast 250°F (121°C)
aluminum case and stainless steel • For correct use and
Approximate Shipping Weight
ring. Wetted parts are either bronze application of all pressure
41/2" Dial Size:
gauges, please refer to:
tube with brass socket or stainless 2.0 lbs [0.91 kg]
Pressure Gauge Standard
steel tube and socket. 6" Dial Size:
ASME B40.100.
2.8 lbs [1.27 kg]
81/2" Dial Size:
5.8 lbs [2.63 kg]
12" Dial Size:
14.6 lbs [6.62 kg]

* Ni-Span C tube and 316 stainless steel

socket furnished above 10,000 psi.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 500XB 45 02 L A 110

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
500XB 45 41/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower A psi See Standard
500XSS 60 6" 04 1/2 NPT B Back B kPa Ranges
85 81/2" C kg/cm2
12 12" D psi/kPa
E psi & kg/cm2

10
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 500X Series
Dial Sizes thru 12” • Cast Aluminum Case
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

INDUSTRIAL GAUGES
Dial Size A B C D E F G H J K
41/2" 5.88 2.39 4.79 0.22 3.83 0.94 1.63 1.41 2.06 5.38
[149.7] [60.7] [121.7] [5.6] [97.2] [23.8] [41.3] [35.7] [52.4] [136.5]
6" 7.62 3.14 6.29 0.28 4.70 0.93 1.63 1.41 2.09 7.00
[193.6] [79.8] [159.8] [7.1] [119.5] [23.8] [41.3] [35.7] [53] [177.8]
81/2" 10.25 4.38 8.80 0.28 5.81 0.97 1.63 1.41 2.24 9.63
[260.4] [111.1] [223.4] [7.1] [147.5] [24.6] [41.3] [35.7] [56.8] [244.5]
12" 14.25 N/A 12.66 0.28 7.90 1.02 1.63 1.19 2.53 13.50
[362] [321.5] [7.1] [200.7] [25.9] [41.3] [30.2] [64.3] [343]

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) kPa Ranges (B) kg/cm2 Ranges (C)
Range Specific Range Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.2 010 –100 to 0 kPa 10 1 010 76 cm Hg to 0 10 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 5/5 0.5/0.2 020 –100 to 100 kPa 20 2 020 76 cm Hg to 1 kg/cm2 20/0.2 1/.02
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/0.5 030 –100 to 200 kPa 50 2 030 76 cm Hg to 2 kg/cm2 20/0.5 2/.02
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 1/1 040 –100 to 400 kPa 50 5 040 76 cm Hg to 4 kg/cm2 25/0.5 5/.05
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/10 2/1 050 –100 to 700 kPa 100 5 050 76 cm Hg to 7 kg/cm2 76/1 5/0.1
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2 060 –100 to 1000 kPa 100 10 060 76 cm Hg to 10 kg/cm2 76/1 15/0.1
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/2 070 –100 to 2000 kPa 200 20 070 76 cm Hg to 21 kg/cm2 76/2 19/0.2
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.1 080 0 to 100 kPa 10 1 080 0 to 1 kg/cm2 0.1 0.01
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.2 090 0 to 200 kPa 20 2 090 0 to 2 kg/cm2 0.2 0.02
100 0 to 60 psi 10 0.5 100 0 to 400 kPa 50 5 100 0 to 4.2 kg/cm2 0.5 0.5
110 0 to 100 psi 10 1 110 0 to 700 kPa 100 5 110 0 to 7 kg/cm2 1 0.5
120 0 to 160 psi 20 1 120 0 to 1200 kPa 200 10 120 0 to 11 kg/cm2 1 0.1
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 130 0 to 1500 kPa 300 10 130 0 to 14 kg/cm2 2 0.1
140 0 to 300 psi 50 2 140 0 to 2000 kPa 200 20 140 0 to 21 kg/cm2 3 0.2
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 150 0 to 3000 kPa 300 20 150 0 to 28 kg/cm2 4 0.2
160 0 to 600 psi 50 5 160 0 to 4000 kPa 500 50 160 0 to 42 kg/cm2 6 0.5
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 10 180 0 to 7000 kPa 1000 50 180 0 to 70 kg/cm2 10 0.5
Ranges over 1000 psi are not available on 500XB.
190 0 to 1500 psi 300 10 190 0 to 10,000 kPa 1000 100 190 0 to 100 kg/cm2 10 1
200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20 200 0 to 14,000 kPa 2000 100 200 0 to 140 kg/cm2 20 1
210 0 to 3000 psi 300 20 210 0 to 20,000 kPa 2000 200 210 0 to 210 kg/cm2 30 2
220 0 to 5000 psi 500 50 220 0 to 35,000 kPa 5000 250 220 0 to 350 kg/cm2 50 2
230 0 to 10,000 psi 1000 100 230 0 to 60,000 kPa 10,000 500 230 0 to 700 kg/cm2 100 10
240 0 to 15,000 psi 2000 100 240 0 to 100,000 kPa 20,000 1000 240 0 to 1000 kg/cm2 100 10
250 0 to 20,000 psi 2000 200 250 0 to 140,000 kPa 20,000 1000 250 0 to 1400 kg/cm2 200 20
For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) or E (psi & kg/cm 2) followed by the equivalent A (psi) Range Code. Other pressure
ranges are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia, Refrigerant and Receiver. Consult Special Application Ranges section or factory for availability.

11
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 600CB
Cast Aluminum Case
Specifications
COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

Model
600CB

Dial Sizes 31/2", 41/2"

Wetted Parts
31/2" Dial Size:
Bronze tube, brass socket
41/2" Dial Size:
Brass tube & socket

Movement Brass

Connection Lower male, 1/4 NPT

Case Cast aluminum, black finished,

stem-mounted flangeless

Ring 31/2" Dial Size: Friction type,

31/2" & 41/2” Dial Sizes steel, black finished
±1.0% Accuracy 41/2" Dial Size: Friction type,
304 stainless steel
Cast Aluminum Case
600CB shown

Adjustable Pointer Window Clear glass

Pointer Adjustable, black finished

The 600CB Trerice Contractor

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with
• Optional features and case
Gauge is among the most frequently
black graduations and markings
style variations available:
specified HVACR gauges within the
Please consult the Options Accuracy ±1.0% Full Scale,

construction industry. This gauge

& Accessories Section for ASME B40.100 Grade 1A

offers high reliability at a moderate

details.
Maximum Temperature
price. The 600CB is furnished with a • For correct use and 250°F (121°C)

cast aluminum case and an adjustable application of all pressure

pointer.
gauges, please refer to: Approximate Shipping Weight
31/2" Dial Size:
Pressure Gauge Standard
0.7 lbs [0.32 kg]
ASME B40.100.
41/2" Dial Size:
1.1 lbs [0.50 kg]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 600CB 35 02 L A 090

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
600CB 35 31/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower A psi See Standard
45 41/2" B kPa Ranges
C kg/cm2
D psi/kPa
E psi & kg/cm2

14
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 700 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Field Liquid Fillable • Stainless Steel Case

INDUSTRIAL GAUGES
Dial Size Material C E F G H J
4" Brass 3.98 [101] 3.39 [86] 0.94 [24] 1.04 [27] 1.44 [37] 2.24 [57]
SS 3.98 [101] 3.39 [86] 0.94 [24] 1.36 [35] 1.38 [35] 2.24 [57]
6" Brass 6.34 [161] 4.57 [116] 0.69 [18] 1.04 [27] 1.44 [37] 1.97 [50]
SS 6.34 [161] 4.57 [116] 0.69 [18] 1.36 [35] 1.38 [35] 1.97 [50]

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A)
2 1/2"
All Sizes
Range Specific Range Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions
1.42 [36] 010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.5
BRASS = .98 [25]
S/S = 1.08 [28] 020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/5 0.5/0.5
.53 [13]
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/1
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 2/1
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/20 2/2
Ø2.52 [64] 060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/5
.55 [14]
2.22 [56] 080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.2
A.F.
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.5
100 0 to 60 psi 10 1
.43 [11] 110 0 to 100 psi 10 1
120 0 to 160 psi 20 2
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2
4" & 6" 140 0 to 300 psi 50 5
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5
160 0 to 600 psi 100 10
Ranges over 600 psi are not available in
J
700B or 700LFB in 4" or 6" Dial Sizes.
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 20
190 0 to 1500 psi 300 20
200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20
C
G
210 0 to 3000 psi 500 50
220 0 to 5000 psi 1000 100
E 230 0 to 10,000 psi 2000 200
.87 [22]
A.F. Ranges over 10,000 psi are ONLY available in
700SS or 700LFSS in 4" or 6" Dial Sizes.
H
240 0 to 15,000 psi 2000 200
F
250 0 to 20,000 psi 2000 200
For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa)
followed by the corresponding A (psi) Range Code. Other pressure ranges
are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia, Refrigerant and Receiver.
Consult Special Application Ranges section or factory for availability.

13
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 600CB
Cast Aluminum Case
Specifications
COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

Model
600CB

Dial Sizes 31/2", 41/2"

Wetted Parts
31/2" Dial Size:
Bronze tube, brass socket
41/2" Dial Size:
Brass tube & socket

Movement Brass

Connection Lower male, 1/4 NPT

Case Cast aluminum, black finished,

stem-mounted flangeless

Ring 31/2" Dial Size: Friction type,

31/2" & 41/2” Dial Sizes steel, black finished
±1.0% Accuracy 41/2" Dial Size: Friction type,
304 stainless steel
Cast Aluminum Case
600CB shown
Adjustable Pointer Window Clear glass

Pointer Adjustable, black finished

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

The 600CB Trerice Contractor • Optional features and case black graduations and markings
Gauge is among the most frequently style variations available:
Please consult the Options Accuracy ±1.0% Full Scale,
specified HVACR gauges within the ASME B40.100 Grade 1A
& Accessories Section for
construction industry. This gauge details.
offers high reliability at a moderate Maximum Temperature
250°F (121°C)
price. The 600CB is furnished with a • For correct use and
cast aluminum case and an adjustable application of all pressure
gauges, please refer to: Approximate Shipping Weight
pointer. 31/2" Dial Size:
Pressure Gauge Standard
0.7 lbs [0.32 kg]
ASME B40.100.
41/2" Dial Size:
1.1 lbs [0.50 kg]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 600CB 35 02 L A 090

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
600CB 35 31/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower A psi See Standard
45 41/2" B kPa Ranges
C kg/cm2
D psi/kPa
E psi & kg/cm2

14
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 600CB
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Cast Aluminum Case

COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

J

0.56 [14.3] SQUARE

1/4 NPT F

Dial Size B C F J
31/2" 3.06 [77.8] 3.88 [98.6] 0.44 [11.2] 1.22 [31]
41/2" 3.54 [89.9] 4.96 [126] 0.47 [11.9] 1.28 [32.5]

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) kPa Ranges (B) kg/cm2 Ranges (C)
Range Specific Range Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.2 010 –100 to 0 kPa 10 1 010 76 cm Hg to 0 10 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 5/5 0.5/0.2 020 –100 to 100 kPa 20 2 020 76 cm Hg to 1 kg/cm2 20/0.2 1/.02
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/0.5 030 –100 to 200 kPa 50 2 030 76 cm Hg to 2 kg/cm2 20/0.5 2/.02
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 1/1 040 –100 to 400 kPa 50 5 040 76 cm Hg to 4 kg/cm2 25/0.5 5/.05
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/10 2/1 050 –100 to 700 kPa 100 5 050 76 cm Hg to 7 kg/cm2 76/1 5/0.1
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2 060 –100 to 1000 kPa 100 10 060 76 cm Hg to 10 kg/cm2 76/1 15/0.1
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/2 070 –100 to 2000 kPa 200 20 070 76 cm Hg to 21 kg/cm2 76/2 19/0.2
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.1 080 0 to 100 kPa 10 1 080 0 to 1 kg/cm2 0.1 0.01
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.2 090 0 to 200 kPa 20 2 090 0 to 2 kg/cm2 0.2 0.02
100 0 to 60 psi 10 0.5 100 0 to 400 kPa 50 5 100 0 to 4.2 kg/cm2 0.5 0.5
110 0 to 100 psi 10 1 110 0 to 700 kPa 100 5 110 0 to 7 kg/cm2 1 0.5
120 0 to 160 psi 20 1 120 0 to 1200 kPa 200 10 120 0 to 11 kg/cm2 1 0.1
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 130 0 to 1500 kPa 300 10 130 0 to 14 kg/cm2 2 0.1
140 0 to 300 psi 50 2 140 0 to 2000 kPa 200 20 140 0 to 21 kg/cm2 3 0.2
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 150 0 to 3000 kPa 300 20 150 0 to 28 kg/cm2 4 0.2
160 0 to 600 psi 50 5 160 0 to 4000 kPa 500 50 160 0 to 42 kg/cm2 6 0.5
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 10 180 0 to 7000 kPa 1000 50 180 0 to 70 kg/cm2 10 0.5
For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) or E (psi & kg/cm2) followed by the equivalent A (psi) Range Code.
Other pressure ranges are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia, Refrigerant and Receiver. Consult Special Application Ranges
section or factory for availability.

15
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 610CB
Glass Filled Nylon Case
Specifications
COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

Model
610CB

Dial Size 41/2"

Wetted Parts
Bronze tube, brass socket

Movement Brass

Connection Lower male, 1/4 NPT

Case Glass filled nylon, surface mounted

back flanged

Ring Friction type,

304 stainless steel

41/2” Dial Size Window Clear glass

±1.0% Accuracy
Pointer Adjustable, black finished
Back Flanged, Glass Filled
Nylon Case Dial Face Aluminum, white background with
610CB shown black graduations and markings
Adjustable Pointer
Accuracy ±1.0% Full Scale,
ASME B40.100 Grade 1A

The 610CB Trerice Contractor Gauge • Optional features available: Maximum Temperature
is designed to service the pressure Please consult the Options 250°F (121°C)
& Accessories Section for
measurement requirements of the
details. Approximate Shipping Weight
construction and transportation 0.9 lbs [0.41 kg]
industries. The 610CB is furnished with • For correct use and
a corrosion resistant plastic case and application of all pressure
gauges, please refer to:
an adjustable pointer. Wetted parts are
a bronze tube with brass socket. Pressure Gauge Standard
ASME B40.100.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 610CB 45 02 L A 110

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
610CB 45 41/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower A psi See Standard
B kPa Ranges
C kg/cm2
D psi/kPa
E psi & kg/cm2

16
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 610CB
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Glass Filled Nylon Case

COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

0.54 [13.7]

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) kPa Ranges (B) kg/cm2 Ranges (C)
Range Specific Range Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.2 010 –100 to 0 kPa 10 1 010 76 cm Hg to 0 10 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 5/5 0.5/0.2 020 –100 to 100 kPa 20 2 020 76 cm Hg to 1 kg/cm2 20/0.2 1/.02
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/0.5 030 –100 to 200 kPa 50 2 030 76 cm Hg to 2 kg/cm2 20/0.5 2/.02
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 1/1 040 –100 to 400 kPa 50 5 040 76 cm Hg to 4 kg/cm2 25/0.5 5/.05
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/10 2/1 050 –100 to 700 kPa 100 5 050 76 cm Hg to 7 kg/cm2 76/1 5/0.1
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2 060 –100 to 1000 kPa 100 10 060 76 cm Hg to 10 kg/cm2 76/1 15/0.1
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/2 070 –100 to 2000 kPa 200 20 070 76 cm Hg to 21 kg/cm2 76/2 19/0.2
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.1 080 0 to 100 kPa 10 1 080 0 to 1 kg/cm2 0.1 0.01
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.2 090 0 to 200 kPa 20 2 090 0 to 2 kg/cm2 0.2 0.02
100 0 to 60 psi 10 0.5 100 0 to 400 kPa 50 5 100 0 to 4.2 kg/cm2 0.5 0.5
110 0 to 100 psi 10 1 110 0 to 700 kPa 100 5 110 0 to 7 kg/cm2 1 0.5
120 0 to 160 psi 20 1 120 0 to 1200 kPa 200 10 120 0 to 11 kg/cm2 1 0.1
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 130 0 to 1500 kPa 300 10 130 0 to 14 kg/cm2 2 0.1
140 0 to 300 psi 50 2 140 0 to 2000 kPa 200 20 140 0 to 21 kg/cm2 3 0.2
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 150 0 to 3000 kPa 300 20 150 0 to 28 kg/cm2 4 0.2
160 0 to 600 psi 50 5 160 0 to 4000 kPa 500 50 160 0 to 42 kg/cm2 6 0.5
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 10 180 0 to 7000 kPa 1000 50 180 0 to 70 kg/cm2 10 0.5
For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) or E (psi & kg/cm2) followed by the equivalent A (psi) Range Code.
Other pressure ranges are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia, Refrigerant and Receiver. Consult Special Application Ranges
section or factory for availability.

17
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 690 Series
Multiple Stainless Steel Case Styles
Specifications
COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

Models Case Styles

690B Flangeless,
stem mounted with
bottom outlet

691B Flangeless,
stem mounted with
back outlet

692B Surface Mounted,

back flanged with
bottom outlet

693B Flush Mounted,

front flanged with
back outlet

694B Flush Mounted,

u-clamp with
back outlet
31/2” Dial Size
696B Surface Mounted,
±1.0% Accuracy back flanged with
Polished Stainless Steel Case back outlet
690B shown

Multiple Case Styles

Dial Size 31/2"

Wetted Parts
Trerice 690 Series Commercial
Bronze tube, brass socket
• Optional features available:
Gauges are offered in a polished Please consult the Options
stainless steel case to provide the
Movement Brass
& Accessories Section for

durability and styling required in

details. Connection 690B, 692B:
OEM and other applications. This
Lower male, 1/4 NPT

gauge is available in a variety of

• For correct use and
691B, 693B, 694B, 696B:
application of all pressure
case styles. Wetted parts are a
Center back male, 1/4 NPT
gauges, please refer to:
bronze tube with brass socket. Pressure Gauge Standard Window Acrylic, snap-in
ASME B40.100.
Pointer Adjustable, black finish

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

black graduations and markings

Accuracy ±1.0% Full Scale,

ASME B40.100 Grade 1A

Maximum Temperature
150°F (65°C)

HOW TO ORDER
Approximate Shipping Weight
Sample Order Number: 690B 35 02 L D 110
690B, 691B, 692B, 696B:
0.6 lbs [0.27 kg]
Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code
693B:
Size Location Measure
0.8 lbs [0.36 kg]
690B 35 31/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower * D psi/kPa See Standard
694B:
691B B Back ** A psi Ranges
0.9 lbs [0.41 kg]
692B B kPa
693B
694B
696B
* For Models 690B & 692B only
** For Models 691B, 693B, 694B & 696B only

20
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 620B
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Stainless Steel Case

COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) psi/kPa Ranges (D)
psi kPa
Range Specific Range Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.2 010 30" Hg to 0 / –100 to 0 kPa 5 0.2 10 1
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 5/5 0.5/0.2 020 30" Hg to 15 psi / –100 to 100 kPa 5/5 0.5/0.2 20 2
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/0.5 030 30" Hg to 30 psi / –100 to 200 kPa 10/5 1/0.5 50 5
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 1/1 040 30" Hg to 60 psi / –100 to 400 kPa 10/10 1/1 50 5
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/10 2/1 050 30" Hg to 100 psi / –100 to 700 kPa 30/10 2/1 100 5
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2 060 30" Hg to 150 psi / –100 to 1000 kPa 30/20 5/2 100 10
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/2 070 30" Hg to 300 psi / –100 to 2000 kPa 30/50 5/2 200 20
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.1 080 0 to 15 psi / 0 to 100 kPa 3 0.1 10 1
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.2 090 0 to 30 psi / 0 to 200 kPa 5 0.2 20 2
100 0 to 60 psi 10 0.5 100 0 to 60 psi / 0 to 400 kPa 10 0.5 50 5
110 0 to 100 psi 10 1 110 0 to 100 psi / 0 to 700 kPa 10 1 100 5
120 0 to 160 psi 20 1 120 0 to 160 psi / 0 to 1100 kPa 20 1 200 10
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 130 0 to 200 psi / 0 to 1400 kPa 20 2 300 10
140 0 to 300 psi 50 2 140 0 to 300 psi / 0 to 2000 kPa 50 2 200 20
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 150 0 to 400 psi / 0 to 2800 kPa 50 5 300 50
160 0 to 600 psi 50 5 160 0 to 600 psi / 0 to 4000 kPa 50 5 500 50

19
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 690 Series
Multiple Stainless Steel Case Styles
Specifications
COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

Models Case Styles

690B Flangeless,
stem mounted with
bottom outlet

691B Flangeless,
stem mounted with
back outlet

692B Surface Mounted,

back flanged with
bottom outlet

693B Flush Mounted,

front flanged with
bottom outlet

694B Flush Mounted,

u-clamp with
back outlet
31/2” Dial Size
696B Surface Mounted,
±1.0% Accuracy back flanged with
Polished Stainless Steel Case back outlet
690B shown
Multiple Case Styles
Dial Size 31/2"

Wetted Parts
Bronze tube, brass socket
Trerice 690 Series Commercial • Optional features available:
Gauges are offered in a polished Please consult the Options
Movement Brass
& Accessories Section for
stainless steel case to provide the
details. Connection 690B, 692B:
durability and styling required in
Lower male, 1/4 NPT
OEM and other applications. This • For correct use and
691B, 693B, 694B, 696B:
gauge is available in a variety of application of all pressure
Center back male, 1/4 NPT
case styles. Wetted parts are a gauges, please refer to:
bronze tube with brass socket. Pressure Gauge Standard Window Acrylic, snap-in
ASME B40.100.
Pointer Adjustable, black finish

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

black graduations and markings

Accuracy ±1.0% Full Scale,

ASME B40.100 Grade 1A

Maximum Temperature
150°F (65°C)

Approximate Shipping Weight

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 690B 35 02 L D 110
690B, 691B, 692B, 696B:
0.6 lbs [0.27 kg]
Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code
693B:
Size Location Measure
0.8 lbs [0.36 kg]
690B 35 31/2" 02 1/ 4 NPT L Lower * D psi/kPa See Standard
694B:
691B B Back ** A psi Ranges
0.9 lbs [0.41 kg]
692B B kPa
693B
694B
696B
* For Models 690B & 692B only
** For Models 691B, 693B, 694B & 696B only

20
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 690 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Multiple Stainless Steel Case Styles

COMMERCIAL• CONTRACTOR GAUGES

Drilling Dimensions for
690B / 691B 693B 692B / 693B / 696B 694B 692B / 696B
Model A C E F H J K L M N P
690B N/A 3.67 [93.2] 3.06 [77.8] 0.32 [8.2] N/A 1.33 [33.8] N/A N/A 3.51 [89.2] N/A 0.17 [4.3]
691B N/A 3.67 [93.2] N/A N/A 1.01 [25.8] 1.33 [33.8] N/A N/A 3.51 [89.2] N/A 0.17 [4.3]
692B 4.91 [124.7] 3.67 [93.2] 3.06 [77.8] 0.43 [11] 0.90 [23.0] 1.44 [36.6] 4.50 [114.3] 0.25 [6.4] N/A N/A N/A
693B 4.84 [122.9] N/A N/A N/A 1.01 [25.8] 1.33 [33.8] 4.44 [112.8] 0.25 [6.4] 3.51 [89.2] 3.62 [92] 0.17 [4.3]
694B 4.31 [109.5] N/A N/A N/A 1.01 [25.8] 1.33 [33.8] N/A N/A 3.51 [89.2] 3.62 [92] 0.17 [4.3]
696B 4.91 [124.7] 3.67 [93.2] N/A N/A 0.90 [23] 1.44 [36.6] 4.50 [114.3] 0.25 [6.4] N/A N/A N/A

Standard Ranges
psi/kPa Ranges (D) psi (A) kPa (B)
Range Specific Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 / –100 to 0 kPa 5 0.2 10 1
020 30" Hg to 15 psi / –100 to 100 kPa 5/5 0.5/0.2 20 2
030 30" Hg to 30 psi / –100 to 200 kPa 10/5 1/0.5 50 2
040 30" Hg to 60 psi / –100 to 400 kPa 10/10 1/1 50 5
050 30" Hg to 100 psi / –100 to 700 kPa 30/10 2/1 100 5
060 30" Hg to 150 psi / –100 to 1000 kPa 30/20 5/2 100 10
070 30" Hg to 300 psi / –100 to 2000 kPa 30/50 5/2 100 20
080 0 to 15 psi / 0 to 100 kPa 3 0.1 10 1
090 0 to 30 psi / 0 to 200 kPa 5 0.2 20 2
100 0 to 60 psi / 0 to 400 kPa 10 0.5 50 5
110 0 to 100 psi / 0 to 700 kPa 10 1 100 5
120 0 to 160 psi / 0 to 1100 kPa 20 1 100 10
130 0 to 200 psi / 0 to 1400 kPa 20 2 200 10
140 0 to 300 psi / 0 to 2000 kPa 50 2 200 20
150 0 to 400 psi / 0 to 2800 kPa 50 5 400 20
160 0 to 600 psi / 0 to 4000 kPa 50 5 500 50
180 0 to 1000 psi / 0 to 7000 kPa 100 10 1000 50
Other pressure ranges are also available including: Altitude, Refrigerant and Receiver. Consult Special Application Ranges section or
factory for availability.

21
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 D80 Series
Dry or Liquid Filled • Stainless Steel Case
Specifications
Models Wetted Parts
D82B (dry) Bronze tube,
D82LFB (liquid filled) brass socket
UTILITY GAUGES

D83SS (dry) 316 Stainless steel

D83LFSS (liquid filled) tube & socket

Dial Sizes 11/2", 2", 21/2", 4"

Fill Glycerine, other fills available

See Optional Features Section

Movement D82: Brass

D83: 316 Stainless steel

Connection Lower male or center back male,

Lower back male on 4” D83

Case 304 stainless steel,

11/2", 2", 21/2", 4" Dial Sizes stem-mounted flangeless
±1.6% Accuracy Ring Crimped 304 stainless steel
Stainless Steel Case
D82LFB shown Window Acrylic
Glycerine Fill Standard
Pointer Plain, black finished

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

• Optional features and case black graduations and markings
The Trerice D80 Series Utility
style variations available: Additional Features
Gauge is designed for rugged
Please consult the Options Restrictor screw standard on
performance requirements at an & Accessories Section for D83LFSS and D83SS
economical cost. This liquid filled details.
gauge is furnished with a stainless Accuracy ±1.6% Full Scale
steel case and crimped ring. • For correct use and
application of all pressure Maximum Temperature
Wetted parts are either bronze 150°F (65°C)
gauges, please refer to:
tube with brass socket or
Pressure Gauge Standard Approximate Shipping Weight
stainless steel. ASME B40.100. 11/2" Dial Size:
0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
2" Dial Size:
0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
21/2" Dial Size:
0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
4" Dial Size:
1.0 lbs [0.45 kg]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: D82LFB 25 02 L A 110

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
D82LFB 15 11/2 01 1/8 NPT* L Lower A psi See Standard
D83LFSS 20 2" 02 1/4 NPT** B Back D psi/kPa Ranges
D82B 25 21/2"
D83SS 40 4"

* 1/8 NPT connection size not available with 4" dial size.
** 1/4 NPT connection size not available with 11/2" dial size.

22
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 D80 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Dry or Liquid Filled • Stainless Steel Case

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) D82 D83

UTILITY GAUGES
Range Specific Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code (psi) Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.5 5 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/5 1/0.5 10/5 1/0.5
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/10 2/1 10/5 2/1
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 2/2 10/10 2/1
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/20 2/2 30/20 5/2
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/30 10/5 30/30 10/5
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 10/5 30/50 10/5
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.2 3 0.2
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.5 5 0.5
100 0 to 60 psi 10 1 10 1
110 0 to 100 psi 20 2 10 2
120 0 to 160 psi 20 2 20 2
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 20 2
140 0 to 300 psi 50 5 50 5
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 50 5
160 0 to 600 psi 100 10 100 10
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 25 100 20
190 0 to 1500 psi 300 20 300 25
200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20 200 25
210 0 to 3000 psi 500 50 500 50

1.18 [30]
220 0 to 5000 psi 1000 100 1000 100

230 0 to 10000 psi N/A N/A N/A N/A

Lower back 240 0 to 15000 psi N/A N/A N/A N/A
male only on
4” D83 For dual scale ranges specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) followed by
the corresponding A (psi) Range Code

Dial Size C E F J M
11/2" D82 1.85 [47] 1.50 [38] 0.32 [8] 1.06 [27] 1.61 [41]
11/2" D83 1.85 [47] 1.50 [38] 0.32 [8] 1.06 [27] 1.61 [41]
2" D82 2.28 [58] 1.89 [48] 0.39 [10] 1.14 [29] 2.05 [52]
2" D83 2.28 [58] 2.05 [52] 0.35 [9] 1.18 [30] 2.05 [52]
21/2" D82 2.68 [68] 2.24 [57] 0.39 [10] 1.18 [30] 2.44 [62]
21/2" D83 2.68 [68] 2.32 [59] 0.51 [13] 1.38 [35] 2.44 [62]
4" D82 4.29 [109] 3.07 [78] 0.47 [12] 1.42 [36] 3.90 [99]
4" D83 4.29 [109] 3.94 [100] 0.75 [19] 1.93 [49] 3.94 [100]

23
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 800B
Dry • Black Finished Steel Case
Specifications
Model
800B

Dial Sizes 11/2", 2", 21/2", 4"

UTILITY GAUGES

Wetted Parts
Bronze tube, brass socket

Movement Brass
Connection 11/2" Dial Size: Lower male or
center back male, 1/8 NPT

2", 21/2" Dial Size: Lower male or

center back male, 1/8 or 1/4 NPT

4" Dial Size: Lower male or

center back male, 1/4 NPT

Case Drawn steel, black finished,

stem-mounted flangeless

11/2", 2", 21/2", 4" Dial Sizes Window Acrylic

800B shown ±1.6% Accuracy Pointer Plain, black finished

Drawn Steel Case Dial Face Aluminum, white background with
black graduations and markings

• Optional features and case Accuracy ±1.6% Full Scale

The Trerice 800B Utility Gauge
style variations available: Maximum Temperature
is designed for general pressure Please consult the Options
indication requirements. This gauge 180°F (82°C)
& Accessories Section for
provides reliable service at an details. Approximate Shipping Weight
economical cost. Wetted parts are 11/2” Dial Size:
• For correct use and 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]
bronze tube and brass socket.
application of all pressure
2” Dial Size:
gauges, please refer to: 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
Pressure Gauge Standard
21/2” Dial Size:
ASME B40.100. 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
4” Dial Size:
0.6 lbs [0.27 kg]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 800B 15 01 B D 110

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
800B 15 11/2"* 01 1/8 NPT L Lower A psi See Standard
20 2" 02 1/4 NPT B Back D psi/kPa Ranges
25 21/2"
40 4"
* 11/2" dial size available only with 1/8 NPT connection.

24
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 800B
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Dry • Black Finished Steel Case

UTILITY GAUGES
Dial Size C E F H J R
11/2" Lower 1.57 [40] 1.54 [39] 0.35 [9] 0.71 [18] 1.02 [26] 0.43 [11]
11/2" Back 1.57 [40] 1.54 [39] 0.35 [9] 0.71 [18] 1.14 [29] 0.43 [11]
2" 1.97 [50] 1.93 [49] 0.39 [10] 0.83 [21] 1.14 [29] 0.55 [14]
21/2" 2.48 [63] 2.20 [56] 0.39 [10] 0.83 [21] 1.14 [29] 0.55 [14]
4" 3.94 [100] 2.87 [73] 0.39 [10] N/A 1.14 [29] 0.55 [14]

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) psi/kPa Ranges (D)
psi kPa
Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.5 010 30" Hg to 0 / –100 to 0 kPa 5 0.5 10 2
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/5 1/0.5 020 30" Hg to 15 psi / –100 to 100 kPa 10/3 2/0.5 10 5
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 2/1 030 30" Hg to 30 psi / –100 to 200 kPa 10/5 2/1 50 10
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 5/2 040 30" Hg to 60 psi / –100 to 400 kPa 10/10 5/2 5 20
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/20 5/2 050 30" Hg to 100 psi / –100 to 700 kPa 30/20 5/2 5 20
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/30 5/5 060 30" Hg to 150 psi / –100 to 1000 kPa 30/30 5/5 5 50
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/30 10/10 070 30" Hg to 300 psi / –100 to 2000 kPa 30/50 5/10 10 50
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.5 080 0 to 15 psi / 0 to 100 kPa 3 0.5 10 2
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.5 090 0 to 30 psi / 0 to 200 kPa 5 0.5 20 2
100 0 to 60 psi 10 1 100 0 to 60 psi / 0 to 400 kPa 10 1 50 5
110 0 to 100 psi 10 2 110 0 to 100 psi / 0 to 700 kPa 10 2 100 20
120 0 to 160 psi 20 2 120 0 to 160 psi / 0 to 1100 kPa 20 2 100 20
130 0 to 200 psi 20 2 130 0 to 200 psi / 0 to 1400 kPa 20 2 200 20
140 0 to 300 psi 50 5 140 0 to 300 psi / 0 to 2000 kPa 50 5 200 20
150 0 to 400 psi 50 5 150 0 to 400 psi / 0 to 2800 kPa 50 10 400 40
160 0 to 600 psi 100 10 160 0 to 600 psi / 0 to 4000 kPa 100 20 1000 100
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 20 180 0 to 1000 psi / 0 to 7000 kPa 100 20 1000 200
190 0 to 1500 psi 300 20 190 0 to 1500 psi / 0 to 10,000 kPa 300 20 2000 200
200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20 200 0 to 2000 psi / 0 to 14,000 kPa 200 50 2000 500
210 0 to 3000 psi 500 50 210 0 to 3000 psi / 0 to 20,000 kPa 500 100 5000 500
220 0 to 5000 psi 1000 100 220 0 to 5000 psi / 0 to 35,000 kPa 1000 100 5000 1000

25
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 800LFB
Liquid Filled • Plastic Case
Specifications
Model
800LFB (liquid filled)

Dial Sizes
UTILITY GAUGES

2”, 21/2", 31/2"

Wetted Parts
Bronze tube, brass socket

Fill Glycerine, other fills available

See Optional Features Section

Movement Brass
Connection Lower male or center back male
1/8 or 1/4 NPT

Case 2", 21/2" Dial Size: ABS plastic,

stem-mounted flangeless

31/2" Dial Size: Nylon,

2", 21/2", 31/2" Dial Sizes stem-mounted flangeless
±1.6% Accuracy (2”, 21/2") Ring Crimped aluminum, black finished
800LFB shown ±1.0% Accuracy (31/2") Window Styrene-acrylonitrile
Liquid Filled
Pointer Plain, black finish

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

The Trerice 800LFB Utility Gauge • Optional features and case black graduations and markings
is designed to meet the needs of style variations available:
Accuracy 2", 21/2" Dial Size:
Please consult the Options
general industrial applications. The ±1.6% Full Scale
& Accessories Section for
gauge features a rugged, plastic, details. 31/2" Dial Size:
liquid filled case to withstand minor ±1.0% Full Scale, ASME B40.100
vibration and pulsation conditions. • For correct use and Grade 1A
Wetted parts are bronze tube with application of all pressure
gauges, please refer to: Maximum Temperature
brass socket. 150°F (65°C)
Pressure Gauge Standard
ASME B40.100. Approximate Shipping Weight
2" Dial Size:
0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
21/2" Dial Size:
0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
31/2" Dial Size:
1.0 lbs [0.45 kg]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 800LFB 25 02 L A 110

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
800LFB 20 2" 01 1/8 NPT* L Lower A psi See Standard
25 21/2" 02 1/4 NPT B Back D psi/kPa Ranges
35 31/2"

* 1/8 NPT connection size not available with 31/2" dial size.

26
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 800LFB
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters. Liquid Filled • Plastic Case

UTILITY GAUGES
Dial Size C E F H J
2" 2.09 [53.1] 1.91 [48.5] 0.48 [12.2] 0.98 [24.9] 1.24 [31.2]
21/2" 2.67 [67.8] 2.19 [55.5] 0.39 [10.0] 0.99 [25.1] 1.26 [32.5]
31/2" 4.23 [107] 2.87 [73.0] 0.48 [12.2] 1.06 [27] 1.41 [36.0]

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A)
2 & 2 1/2" Dial Size 3 1/2" Dial Size
Range Specific Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 1 5 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/3 2/0.5 10/5 0.5/0.5
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 2/1 10/5 1/1
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 5/2 10/10 2/1
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/10 5/2 30/20 2/2
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/30 5/5 30/20 5/2
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/30 5/10 30/50 5/5
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.5 3 0.2
090 0 to 30 psi 5 1 5 0.5
100 0 to 60 psi 10 2 10 1
110 0 to 100 psi 10 2 10 2
120 0 to 160 psi 20 2 20 2
130 0 to 200 psi 20 4 20 2
140 0 to 300 psi 50 10 50 5
150 0 to 400 psi 50 10 50 5
160 0 to 600 psi 100 20 100 10
180 0 to 1000 psi 100 20 100 20
190 0 to 1500 psi 300 50 300 20
200 0 to 2000 psi 200 40 200 20
210 0 to 3000 psi 500 100 500 50
220 0 to 5000 psi 500 100 1000 100
For dual scale ranges specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa)
followed by the corresponding A (psi) Range Code

27
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 760B
Low Pressure Gauge • Black Finished Steel Case
Specifications
Model
760B
S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S

Dial Sizes 21/2", 4"

Wetted Parts
316L stainless steel diaphragm
capsule, brass socket

Movement Brass

Connection 21/2" Dial Size: Lower male or

center back male, 1/4 NPT

4" Dial Size: Lower male or

center back male, 1/4 or 1/2 NPT

Case Drawn steel, black finished,

stem-mounted flangeless

Window Polycarbonate, snap-in

21/2", 4" Dial Sizes
±1.6% Accuracy Pointer Plain, black finished
760B shown
Drawn Steel Case
Dial Face Aluminum, white background with
black graduations and markings

The Trerice 760B Low Pressure • Optional features and case Accuracy ±1.6% Full Scale
Gauge is designed to accurately style variations available:
Please consult the Options Maximum Temperature
measure extreme low pressure & Accessories Section for 140°F (65°C)
conditions. This pressure gauge details.
employs a diaphragm capsule Approximate Shipping Weight
sensing element to measure the low • For correct use and 21/2” Dial Size:
application of all pressure 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
pressure. Case material is drawn
gauges, please refer to:
steel with brass wetted parts. 4” Dial Size:
Pressure Gauge Standard 0.89 lbs [0.36 kg]
ASME B40.100.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 760B 25 02 L T 660

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
760B 25 21/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower T Pressure See Standard
40 4" 04 1/2 NPT* B Back W Vacuum Ranges

* 1/2 NPT connection size available only with 4” dial size.

28
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 760B
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Low Pressure Gauge • Black Finished Steel Case

J H

S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S
C

E
1/4 NPT = .55 [14] A.F.
1/2 NPT = .87 [22] A.F.

Dial Size C E F H J
21/2" 2.44 [62] 2.20 [56] 0.37 [9.5] 0.98 [25] 1.34 [34]
4" 3.90 [99] 3.23 [82] 0.61 [16] 0.98 [25] 1.22 [44]
4" (1/2 NPT) 3.90 [99] 3.43 [87] 0.61 [16] 1.38 [35] 1.22 [44]

Standard Ranges* Standard Ranges*

Pressure (T) Vacuum (W)
Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions
645 0/10 in. H2O 1 0.1 580 15/0 in. H2O 5 0.2
650 0/15 in. H2O 5 0.2 600 30/0 in. H2O 5 0.5
660 0/30 in. H2O 5 0.5 610 60/0 in. H2O 10 1
670 0/60 in. H2O 10 1 620 100/0 in. H2O 10 1
680 0/100 in. H2O 10 1 635 200/0 in. H2O 20 2
690 0/160 in. H2O 20 2 595 15/0 oz./in.2 5 0.2
700 0/200 in. H2O 20 2 605 30/0 oz./in.2 5 0.5
720 0/300 in. H2O 50 5 620 60/0 oz./in.2 10 1
652 0/10 oz./in.2 1 0.1 633 100/0 oz./in.2 10 1
655 0/15 oz./in.2 5 0.2 * Compound ranges are also available. Please consult factory.
662 0/20 oz./in.2 & 0/34 in. H2O 5 1
667 0/30 oz./in.2 5 0.5
675 0/60 oz./in.2 10 1
695 0/100 oz./in.2 10 1
725 0/160 oz./in.2 20 2
750 0/250 oz./in.2 50 5
675 0/3 psi 0.5 0.05
685 0/5 psi 1 0.1
715 0/10 psi 1 0.1

29
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 766SS
Low Pressure Gauge • Stainless Steel Case
Specifications
Model
766SS
S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S

Dial Sizes 21/2", 4", 6"

Wetted Parts
316L stainless steel diaphragm
capsule, 316 stainless steel socket

Movement 316 Stainless Steel

Connection Lower male or center back male,

1/4 or 1/2 NPT

Case 304 stainless steel, satin finished,

stem-mounted flangeless

Ring Bayonet type, 304 stainless steel

Window Clear glass

21/2", 4", 6" Dial Sizes
Pointer Plain, black finished
±1.6% Accuracy (21/2", 4")
Dial Face Aluminum, white background with
766SS shown ±2.0% Accuracy (6") black graduations and markings
Stainless Steel Case
Accuracy 21/2" Dial Size: ±1.6% Full Scale
4" Dial Size: ±1.6% Full Scale

The Trerice 766SS Series Low • Optional features and case 6" Dial Size: ±2.0% Full Scale
style variations available:
Pressure Gauge is designed to
Please consult the Options Maximum Temperature
accurately measure extreme low & Accessories Section for 212°F (100°C)
pressure conditions. This pressure details.
gauge employs a diaphragm capsule Approximate Shipping Weight
sensing element to measure the low • For correct use and 21/2” Dial Size:
application of all pressure 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
pressure. Case material and
gauges, please refer to: 4" Dial Size:
wetted parts are stainless steel. 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
Pressure Gauge Standard
ASME B40.100. 6" Dial Size:
1.9 lbs [0.86 kg]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 766SS 40 02 L W 600

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range Code

Size Location Measure
766SS 25 21/2" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower T Pressure See Standard
40 4" 04 1/2 NPT* B Back W Vacuum Ranges
60 6"
* Not available with 21/2” dial size.

30
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 766SS
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Low Pressure Gauge • Stainless Steel Case

S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S
Dial Size C E F H J
21/2" 2.48 [63] 2.09 [53] 0.43 [11] 1.06 [27] 1.46 [37]
4" 3.98 [101] 3.43 [87] 0.63 [16] 1.38 [35] 1.93 [49]
6" 6.34 [161] 4.76 [121] 0.69 [18] 1.38 [35] 1.97 [50]

Standard Ranges* Standard Ranges*

Pressure (T) Vacuum (W)
Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions
645 0/10 in. H2O 1 0.1 580 15/0 in. H2O 5 0.2
650 0/15 in. H2O 5 0.2 600 30/0 in. H2O 5 0.5
660 0/30 in. H2O 5 0.5 610 60/0 in. H2O 10 1
670 0/60 in. H2O 10 1 620 100/0 in. H2O 10 1
680 0/100 in. H2O 10 1 635 200/0 in. H2O 20 2
690 0/160 in. H2O 20 2 595 15/0 oz./in.2 5 0.2
700 0/200 in. H2O 20 2 605 30/0 oz./in.2 5 0.5
720 0/300 in. H2O 50 5 620 60/0 oz./in.2 10 1
652 0/10 oz./in.2 1 0.1 633 100/0 oz./in.2 10 1
655 0/15 oz./in.2 5 0.2 * Compound ranges are also available. Please consult factory.
662 0/20 oz./in.2 & 0/34 in.H2O 5 1
667 0/30 oz./in.2 5 0.5
675 0/60 oz./in.2 10 1
695 0/100 oz./in.2 10 1
725 0/160 oz./in.2 20 2
750 0/250 oz./in.2 50 5
675 0/3 psi 0.5 0.05
685 0/5 psi 1 0.1
715 0/10 psi 1 0.1

31
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 700TA Series
Sanitary Gauge with Integrated Diaphragm Seal
Specifications
Models
700TA (dry)
S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S

700TALF (liquid filled)

Dial Sizes 21/2", 4"

Wetted Parts
316 stainless steel diaphragm

Fill Glycerine, other fills available.

See Options & Accessories.

Movement Stainless steel

Connection 21/2" Dial Size: Lower or center

back Tri-clamp, 11/2" or 2"
4" Dial Size: Lower or lower
back, Tri-clamp, 11/2" or 2"
21/2", 4" Dial Sizes
Case 304 stainless steel,
Stainless Steel Case stem mounted flangeless
Liquid Fillable Ring Crimped 304 stainless steel,
700TA shown 11/2", 2" Tri-clamp Type highly polished
Connections
Window Safety glass
Pointer Plain black finished

The Trerice 700TA Series Sanitary • Optional features and case Dial Face Aluminum, white background with
Gauge is 3A approved and especially style variations available: black graduations and markings
Please consult the Options
suited for use in the dairy and food Accuracy ±1.6% Full Scale
& Accessories Section for
processing industries. This field liquid details.
fillable (no kit required) gauge has a Maximum Temperature
stainless steel case, ring, and process • Please refer to 3A Standard 250°F (121°C)
37-01, 3A Standard for
housing. All wetted parts are stainless Liquid Pressure and Level Approximate Shipping Weight
steel. Sensing Devices 700TA 21/2" Dial Size, 11/2" Tri-clamp,
1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
• For correct use and 700TA 21/2" Dial Size, 2" Tri-clamp,
application of all pressure 1.9 lbs [0.86 kg]
gauges, please refer to: 700TALF 21/2" Dial Size, 11/2" Tri-clamp,
Pressure Gauge Standard 1.9 lbs [0.86 kg]
ASME B40.100. 700TALF 21/2" Dial Size, 2" Tri-clamp,
2.6 lbs [1.18 kg]
700TA 4" Dial Size, 11/2" Tri-clamp,
2.6 lbs [1.18 kg]
700TA 4" Dial Size, 2" Tri-clamp,
3.3 lbs [1.50 kg]
700TALF 4" Dial Size, 11/2" Tri-clamp,
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 700TA 40 15T L A 130
3.3 lbs [1.50 kg]
700TALF 4" Dial Size, 2" Tri-clamp,
Model Dial Size Connection Connection Units of Range 4.0 lbs [1.81 kg]
Size Location Measure Code
700TA 25 21/2" 15T 11/2" Tri-Clamp L Lower A psi See
700TALF 40 4" 20T 2” Tri-Clamp B Back D psi/kPa Standard
Ranges

32
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 700TA Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters. Sanitary Gauge with Integrated Diaphragm Seal

J H

S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S
C

E
2.5” = .56 [14.2] A.F.
4” = .88 [22] A.F.

T F

Clamps, gaskets and ferrules

are not supplied by Trerice.

Dial Tri-Clamp
Size Size C E F H J T
21/2" 11/2" 2.68 [68] 2.64 [67] 0.37 [9.5] 1.52 [38.5] 1.20 [30.5] 1.98 [50.5]
[63] 2" 2.68 [68] 2.64 [67] 0.37 [9.5] 1.52 [38.5] 1.20 [30.5] 2.51 [64.0]
4" 11/2" 4.18 [106.2] 3.35 [85] 0.46 [11.8] 1.52 [38.5] 1.32 [33.5] 1.98 [50.5]
[100] 2" 4.18 [106.2] 3.35 [85] 0.46 [11.8] 1.52 [38.5] 1.32 [33.5] 2.51 [64.0]

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) psi Ranges (A)
Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure
Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.5 100 0 to 60 psi 10
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/5 10/0.5 110 0 to 100 psi 20
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/10 2/1 120 0 to 160 psi 20
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 30/20 2/2 130 0 to 200 psi 50
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/20 5/2 140 0 to 300 psi 50
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 10/2 150 0 to 400 psi 100
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/30 5/10 160 0 to 600 psi 100
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.2 180 0 to 1000 psi 200
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.5

For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) followed by the corresponding A (psi)
Range Code. Other pressure ranges are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia, Refrigerant and Receiver.
Consult Special Application Ranges section or factory for availability.

33
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 700Plus Series
Industrial Transmitter Gauge
Specifications
Models
703SS (dry)
S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S

703LFSS (liquid filled)

Dial Size 4"

Wetted Parts
Transmitter: Ceramic
Gauge: 316L stainless steel
tube & socket

Fill Mineral Oil

Movement Stainless Steel

Process Connection
4" Dial Size Lower male or lower back male,
1/4 or 1/2 NPT
±1.0% Accuracy
Stainless Steel Case
Case 304 Stainless steel,
stem mounted flangeless
Liquid Fillable
703SS shown Ring Bayonet type, 304 stainless steel

Window Clear glass

Pointer Micro adjustable knife edge,

black finished

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

The Trerice 700Plus Series • Optional features and case black graduations and markings
Transmitter Gauge is designed to style variations available:
Electrical Connection
Please consult the Options
provide both local and remote & Accessories Section for Wiring cable
pressure readings through the details. Supply Voltage
integration of an independent 12 to 28 Vdc @ 6mA
pressure transmitter to the pressure • For correct use and
(15 to 28 Vdc with 0 to 10 Vdc
application of all pressure
gauge. This gauge has a stainless Output Signal)
gauges, please refer to:
steel case and ring, and is field Output Signal
Pressure Gauge Standard
liquid fillable (no kit required). ASME B40.100. 4 to 20 mA
Wetted parts include a stainless (load resistance maximum Ω) =
steel tube and socket with a V supply –12
0.02
ceramic transmitter.
Accuracy Transmitter: ±0.3% Full Scale Max.

Gauge: ±1.0% Full Scale,

ASME B40.100 Grade 1A

Maximum Temperature
212°F (100°C)

Approximate Shipping Weight

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 703SS 40 02 L 2 A 110 2.0 lbs [0.91 kg]

Model Dial Size Connection Connection Output Units of Range

Size Location Signal Measure Code
703SS 40 4" 02 1/4 NPT L Lower 3 4 to 20 mA A psi See
703LFSS 04 1/2 NPT D psi/kPa Standard
Ranges

34
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 700Plus Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Industrial Transmitter Gauge

S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S
2.44 3.62
[62] [92]

3.98
[101] 2.84
[72]

1/4 NPT = 3.19 [81]

1/2 NPT = 3.43 [87]
.88 [22]
SQ.

1.14
1/4 NPT
[29]
1/2 NPT

Standard Ranges
psi Ranges (A) psi Ranges (A)
Range Specific Figure Minor Range Specific Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Code Range Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 5 0.5 120 0 to 160 psi 20 2
020 30" Hg to 15 psi 10/5 0.5/0.5 130 0 to 200 psi 20 2
030 30" Hg to 30 psi 10/5 1/1 140 0 to 300 psi 50 5
040 30" Hg to 60 psi 10/10 2/1 150 0 to 400 psi 50 5
050 30" Hg to 100 psi 30/20 2/2 160 0 to 600 psi 100 10
060 30" Hg to 150 psi 30/20 5/2 180 0 to 1000 psi 100 20
070 30" Hg to 300 psi 30/50 5/5 190 0 to 1500 psi 300 20
080 0 to 15 psi 3 0.2 200 0 to 2000 psi 200 20
090 0 to 30 psi 5 0.5 210 0 to 3000 psi 500 50
100 0 to 60 psi 10 1 220 0 to 5000 psi 1000 100
110 0 to100 psi 10 2 230 0 to 10,000 psi 2000 200
For dual scale ranges, specify the appropriate Units of Measure: D (psi/kPa) followed by the corresponding A (psi)
Range Code. Other pressure ranges are also available including: Altitude, Ammonia, Refrigerant and Receiver.
Consult Special Application Ranges section or factory for availability.

35
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Special Application Ranges
The H.O. Trerice Co. offers a broad spectrum of pressure gauges to satisfy the specialized
applications of today’s industry. The following Special Application Ranges can be specified
on almost all Trerice Pressure Gauges. Please consult Availability Table on page 38.
S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S

Liquid Level Ranges (Altitude)

A Liquid Level range is calibrated to measure feet or meters of H 2O (water). Gauges with this type of range
are usually specified with either an optional red set hand (not available on 81/2" or 12" Dial Sizes) or an
index pointer (not available on liquid filled gauges). See Options & Accessories section for complete
availability. Dual scale ranges with ft H 2O and corresponding psi scales are available.

Standard Liquid Level Ranges

psi & Feet of Water Ranges (H)
psi ft H 2O
Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
010 30" Hg to 0 / –34 to 0 ft H2O 5 0.5 5 0.5
020 30" Hg to 15 psi / –34 to 34 ft H2O 10/5 0.5/0.2 5/5 0.5/0.5
030 30" Hg to 30 psi / –34 to 70 ft H2O 10/5 0.5/0.5 10/10 1/1
040 30" Hg to 60 psi / –34 to 140 ft H2O 10/10 1/1 10/20 2/2
050 30" Hg to 100 psi / –34 to 230 ft H2O 30/20 2/1 30/20 2/2
060 30" Hg to 150 psi / –34 to 350 ft H2O 30/30 5/2 34/50 2/2
070 30" Hg to 300 psi / –34 to 700 ft H2O 30/20 5/2 34/50 10/5
080 0 to 15 psi / 0 to 35 ft H2O 3 0.1 5 0.2
090 0 to 30 psi / 0 to 70 ft H2O 5 0.2 10 0.5
100 0 to 60 psi / 0 to 140 ft H2O 10 0.5 20 1
110 0 to 100 psi / 0 to 230 ft H2O 10 1 20 2
120 0 to 160 psi / 0 to 370 ft H2O 20 2 40 5
130 0 to 200 psi / 0 to 460 ft H2O 20 2 60 4
140 0 to 300 psi / 0 to 700 ft H2O 50 2 100 5

Feet of Water Ranges (J)

Range Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions
080 0 to 34 ft H2O 5 0.2
090 0 to 70 ft H2O 10 0.5
095 0 to 100 ft H2O 10 1
100 0 to 140 ft H2O 20 1
110 0 to 230 ft H2O 20 2
120 0 to 370 ft H2O 50 5
130 0 to 460 ft H2O 50 5

Meters of Water Ranges (K)

Range Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions
080 0 to 10 m H2O 1 0.1
090 0 to 20 m H2O 2 0.2
095 0 to 30 m H2O 5 0.2
100 0 to 40 m H2O 5 0.5
110 0 to 70 m H2O 10 0.5
120 0 to 120 m H2O 10 1
Other ranges available, consult factory.

36
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Special Application Ranges
Ammonia Ranges
An Ammonia Range is calibrated to measure vacuum and pressure (vac/psi) along with
the corresponding ammonia temperatures (°F of ammonia). Pressure gauges with this
range type require stainless steel wetted parts.

S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S
Standard Ammonia Ranges (P)
psi °F
Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
310 30" Hg to 150 psi / °F Ammonia 30 2 10 2
320 30" Hg to 300 psi / °F Ammonia 50 2 10 2
Other ranges available, consult factory.

Refrigerant Ranges
A Refrigerant Range is calibrated to measure vacuum and pressure (vac/psi)
along with the corresponding refrigerant temperatures (°F of R).

Standard Refrigerant Ranges (R)

psi °F
Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
310 30" Hg to 150 psi / °F R12/R22 25 1 10 2
320 30" Hg to 150 psi / °F R123 30 2 20 5
330 30" Hg to 150 psi / °F R134A 30 2 10 2
340 30" Hg to 300 psi / °F R12/R22 50 2 10 2
350 30" Hg to 300 psi / °F R123 50 2 20 5
360 30" Hg to 300 psi / °F R134A 50 2 20 2
Other ranges available, consult factory.

Receiver Ranges
A Receiver Range is calibrated to translate the output signal from a 3 to 15 psi pneumatic
transmitter into a specified measurement (i.e., temperature, pressure, square root, percent,
etc.). Pressure gauges ordered with a receiver range are furnished with a 3 to 15 psi
bourdon tube measuring element. Care should be taken to ensure the maximum
pressure never exceeds 15 psi.

Standard Receiver Ranges (S)

Range Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions
060 0 to 10 linear 1 0.1
110 0 to 10 sq. rt. 1* 0.1*
370 0 to 100 linear 10 1
440 0 to 100 sq. rt. 10** 1**
420 0 to 100% 10 1
*Non linear scale, stated interval and division at 3.
**Non linear scale, stated interval and division at 30.
Other ranges available, consult factory.

37
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Special Application Ranges
Availability
The following table indicates the special application range
availability of Trerice Pressure Gauges.
S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S

itud el

nt
(Alt Lev

nia
e)

era

ver
mo

frig
uid

cei
Am
Liq

Re
Re
Model
450B, 450LFB ✓ N/A ✓ ✓
450M, 450LFM ✓ N/A ✓ ✓
450SS, 450LFSS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
500XB ✓ N/A ✓ ✓
500XSS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
600CB ✓ N/A ✓ ✓ Specialty Gauge Models
610CB ✓ N/A ✓ ✓ Listed below are Specialty Gauge Models that
620B N/A N/A N/A N/A
were previously available. In response to demand,
we can now make available a wide number of
690 Series ✓ N/A ✓ ✓ ranges to customize most Trerice Pressure
700B, 700LFB ✓ N/A ✓ ✓ Gauges to suit specific measurement applications.
700M, 700LFM ✓ N/A ✓ ✓
Please order using the current model and specify
the range required.
700Plus ✓ ✓ N/A N/A
700SS, 700LFSS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Previous Current Model and Range
700TA, 700TALF* ✓ ✓ ✓ N/A Model

750M, 750LFM ✓ N/A ✓ ✓ 435SS 450SS with Ammonia Range

750SS, 750LFSS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 515XB 500XB with Liquid Level Range and Red Set Hand

760B* N/A N/A N/A N/A 535XSS 500XSS with Ammonia Range

766SS* N/A N/A N/A N/A 545XB 500XB with Refrigerant Range

800B ✓ N/A ✓ N/A 580B 500XB with Receiver Range

800LFB* ✓ N/A ✓ N/A 615B 500XB with Liquid Level Range and Red Set Hand

D82LFB* ✓ N/A ✓ ✓ 615CB 600CB with Liquid Level Range and Red Set Hand

D83LFSS* ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 635SS 500XSS with Ammonia Range

645B 500XB with Refrigerant Range
*Red set hand or index pointer not available with these models.
680B 500XB with Receiver Range
775SS 700SS with Ammonia Range

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 500XB 45 02L H 110

Specify the Units of Measure and Range Code as required.

38
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Notes

S P E C I A LT Y G A U G E S

39
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
500X Series
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

How to Order: Specify the Optional Case Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: 500XB 45 02 L A 110 - FSL Dial Size
Optional Case Styles for 500X 4 1/2 " 6" 8 1/2 " 12"
Flangeless, Black Finished, Cast Aluminum Case, Lower Connection FSL FSL N/A N/A
Flangeless, Black Finished, Cast Aluminum Case, Back Connection FSB FSB N/A N/A
Panel Mounted, Hinged Ring Case Back Connection HRB HRB N/A HRB
Panel Mounted, Hinged Ring Case Lower Connection HRL HRL N/A HRL
N/A = Not available. Please order using the code listed.

Flangeless

Dial Size C E F G H J
41/2 " 4.79 [121.7] 3.83 [97.2] .94 [23.8] 1.63 [41.3] 1.46 [37.1] 2.00 [50.8]
6” 6.29 [159.8] 4.70 [119.5] .94 [23.8] 1.63 [41.3] 1.46 [37.1] 2.03 [51.6]

Hinged Ring

Dial Size C G H J K L M N P
41/2 " 6.10 [155] 1.62 [41] 1.59 [40] 1.97 [50] 5.38 [136] 0.22 [5] 4.78 [121] 4.94 [125] 0.34 [8]
6" 7.69 [195] 1.62 [41] 1.59 [40] 1.97 [50] 7.00 [177] 0.28 [7] 6.22 [158] 6.44 [163] 0.34 [8]
12" 14.75 [375] 1.62 [41] 1.38 [35] 2.50 [63.5] 13.50 [342] 0.28 [7] 12.50 [317] 12.81 [325] 0.73 [18.5]

40
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
600C

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Kit Only. Not Factory installed. Dial Size
Optional Case Style - 600C 3 1/2 " 4 1/2 "
Surface Mounted Back Flange Kit 115-0222 198-0016
Please order using the code listed.

3 1/2" Includes back flange. Use existing screws from gauge.

4 1/2" Includes back flange and replacement screws.

41
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
700 Series
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

How to Order: Specify the Optional Case Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: 700SS 40 04 B D 220 - FMB
DIAL SIZE
Case Style - 700 Series 2 1/2 " 4" 6"
Surface Mounted Case with Back Flange, Lower Connection N/A SML SML
Surface Mounted Case with Back Flange, Back Connection SMB SMB SMB
Flush Mounted Case with Front Flange, Back Connection FMB FMB FMB
Flush Mounted Case with Front Flange, Lower Connection N/A FML FML
Panel Mounted Case with U-Clamp, Back Connection UCB UCB UCB
N/A = Not available. Please order using the code listed.

2 1/2", 4" & 6" Surface Mount

A

D – 3 HOLES J
EQUALLY
SPACED P

C
G

.87 [22] A.F. F

Dial Size Material A C D E F G H J K P

21/2 " [63] Brass 3.35 [85] 2.52 [64] 0.14 [3.6] 2.22 [56.5] 0.57 [14.5] 0 [0] 0.98 [25] 1.56 [39.5] 2.95 [75] 0.22 [5.5]
SS 3.35 [85] 2.52 [64] 0.14 [3.6] 2.22 [56.5] 0.57 [14.5] 0 [0] 0.98 [25] 1.56 [39.5] 2.95 [75] 0.22 [5.5]
4" [100] Brass 5.20 [132] 3.98 [101] 0.19 [5] 3.39 [86] 0.75 [19] 1.04 [27] 1.32 [34] 2.07 [53] 4.57 [116] 0.22 [5.5]
SS 5.20 [132] 3.98 [101] 0.19 [5] 3.39 [86] 0.75 [19] 1.36 [35] 1.26 [32] 2.07 [53] 4.57 [116] 0.22 [5.5]
6" [150] Brass 7.72 [196] 6.34 [161] 0.23 [6] 4.57 [116] 0.81 [21] 1.04 [27] 1.32 [34] 2.09 [53] 7.01 [178] 0.24 [6]
SS 7.72 [196] 6.34 [161] 0.23 [6] 4.57 [116] 0.81 [21] 1.36 [35] 1.26 [32] 2.09 [53] 7.01 [178] 0.24 [6]

2 1/2" Front Flange

1.42
[36]
.20 BRASS = .98 [25]
Ø.14 [3.6] [5] S/S = 1.08 [28]
3 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED

Ø3.35 Ø2.44
Ø2.52 [62]
[85] [64]

.55 [14]
A.F.

Ø2.95 [75]

42
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
700 Series

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

4" & 6" Front Flange J

P
D WIDE SLOT

K N
A C PANEL
CUTOUT
G

H
.88 [22]
A.F.
F

Dial Size Material A C D E F G H J K N P

4" [100] Brass 5.20 [132] 3.98 [101] 0.19 [5] 3.39 [86] 0.63 [16] 1.04 [27] 1.44 [37] 1.93 [49] 4.57 [116] 4.13 [105] 0.24 [6]
SS 5.20 [132] 3.98 [101] 0.19 [5] 3.39 [86] 0.63 [16] 1.36 [35] 1.38 [35] 1.93 [49] 4.57 [116] 4.13 [105] 0.24 [6]
6" [150] Brass 7.72 [196] 6.34 [161] 0.23 [6] 4.57 [116] 0.69 [18] 1.04 [27] 1.44 [37] 1.97 [50] 7.01 [178] 6.50 [165] 0.24 [6]
SS 7.72 [196] 6.34 [161] 0.23 [6] 4.57 [116] 0.69 [18] 1.36 [35] 1.38 [35] 1.97 [50] 7.01 [178] 6.50 [165] 0.24 [6]

2 1/2" U-Clamp 1.42 [36]

.16 BRASS = .98 [25]
[4] S/S = 1.08 [28]

Ø2.76
[70]
3.31 2.83 Ø2.52 Ø2.54 [65]
[84] [72] [64] PANEL CUTOUT

.55 [14]
A.F.

.39 [10] MAX.

PANEL THICK

4" & 6” U-Clamp J

N
A C PANEL
CUTOUT
G

.39 [10] MAX.

PANEL THICK.

Dial Size Material A C G H J N P

4" [100] Brass 4.33 [110] 3.98 [101] 1.04 [27] 1.44 [37] 1.93 [49] 4.02 [102] 0.18 [5]
SS 4.33 [110] 3.98 [101] 1.36 [35] 1.38 [35] 1.93 [49] 4.02 [102] 0.18 [5]
6" [150] Brass 6.69 [170] 6.34 [161] 1.04 [27] 1.44 [37] 1.97 [50] 6.39 [162] 0.24 [6]
SS 6.69 [170] 6.34 [161] 1.36 [35] 1.38 [35] 1.97 [50] 6.39 [162] 0.24 [6]

43
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
760B & 766SS All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

How to Order: Specify the Optional Case Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Sample Order Number: 766SS 60 02 L M 660 - SML 760B 760B 766SS 766SS
Optional Case Styles for 760B & 766SS 2 1/2 " 4" 4" 6"
Surface Mounted Case with Back Flange, Lower Connection N/A N/A SML SML
Surface Mounted Case with Back Flange, Back Connection N/A N/A SMB SMB
Flush Mounted Case with Front Flange, Back Connection FMB FMB FMB FMB
Flush Mounted Case with Front Flange, Lower Connection N/A N/A FML FML
Panel Mounted Case with U-Clamp, Back Connection UCB* N/A UCB UCB
N/A = Not available. Please order using the code listed.
*Supplied with stainless steel case.

766SS A
J
D – 3 HOLES P
4" & 6" Surface Mount EQUALLY SPACED

.88 [22] A.F. F

Dial Size A C D E F H J K P
4" [100] 5.20 [132] 3.98 [101] .19 [5] 3.43 [87] .75 [19] 1.26 [32] 2.07 [53] 4.57 [116] .22 [5.5]
6" [150] 7.72 [196] 6.34 [161] .23 [6] 4.84 [123] .81 [21] 1.26 [32] 2.09 [53] 7.01 [178] .22 [5.5]

760B Ø.14 [3.6]

1.38
[35]
.20
2 1/2" Front Flange 3 HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED [5]
BRASS = .98 [25]
S/S = 1.08 [28]

.55
[14]
Ø3.35 Ø2.48 A.F. Ø2.44
[85] [63] [62]

Ø2.95 [75]

44
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
760B & 766SS

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

760B Ø.19 [4.8] 1.81 [46]
3 HOLES
4" Front Flange EQUALLY .22 [5.5]
SPACED

Ø4.56 Ø5.20 [132]

[116] 4.15 [105.5]
Ø3.98 [101] PANEL CUTOUT

1.39 [35]

766SS J
D – WIDE SLOT
4" & 6" Front Flange P

A C N
PANEL CUTOUT

.87 [22] A.F.

F

Dial Size Material A C D E F H J K N P

4" [100] Brass 5.20 [132] 3.98 [101] .19 [5] 3.43 [87] 0.63 [16] 1.38 [35] 1.93 [49] 4.57 [116] 4.13 [105] 0.24 [6]
SS 5.20 [132] 3.98 [101] .19 [5] 3.43 [87] 0.63 [16] 1.38 [35] 1.93 [49] 4.57 [116] 4.13 [105] 0.24 [6]
6" [150] Brass 7.72 [196] 6.34 [161] .23 [6] 4.76 [121] 0.69 [18] 1.38 [35] 1.97 [50] 7.01 [178] 6.50 [165] 0.24 [6]
SS 7.72 [196] 6.34 [161] .23 [6] 4.84 [123] 0.69 [18] 1.38 [35] 1.97 [50] 7.01 [178] 6.50 [165] 0.24 [6]

760B & 766SS 766SS

2 1/2" U-Clamp* 4" & 6" U-Clamp
1.19 [30.3]
J
.22 [5.6] .91 [23.1]
P

2.5 [63] N
3.31 [84] 2.83 [72] 2.69 [68] PANEL A C PANEL
CUTOUT CUTOUT

.25 [6.4] MAX. .39 [10] MAX. H

* Supplied with Stainless Steel Case PANEL THICK. PANEL THICK.

Dial Size Material A C H J N P

4" [100] Brass 4.33 [110] 3.98 [101] 1.44 [37] 1.93 [49] 4.02 [102] 0.18 [5]
SS 4.33 [110] 3.98 [101] 1.38 [35] 1.93 [49] 4.02 [102] 0.18 [5]
6" [150] Brass 6.69 [170] 6.34 [161] 1.44 [37] 1.97 [50] 6.39 [162] 0.24 [6]
SS 6.69 [170] 6.34 [161] 1.38 [35] 1.97 [50] 6.39 [162] 0.24 [6]

45
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
D80 Series
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

How to Order: Specify the Optional Case Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: D82LFB 25 02 L A 160 - SML
Dial Size
Case Style - D80 Series 2" 2 1/2 " 4"
Surface Mounted, Back Flange Case for Lower Connection N/A SML SML
* Panel Mounted, Front Flange Kit for Back Connection 198-0028 198-0025 198-0027
* Panel Mounted, Front Ring Kit for Back Connection N/A 198-0024 N/A
* Panel Mounted, U-Clamp Kit for Back Connection 198-0031 198-0026 198-0029

* Kit Only. Not Factory installed.

2 1/ 2" & 4" Surface Mount

A CASE VENT J
Ø.D 3 HOLES CUT TIP AFTER
EQUALLY SPACED INSTALLATION

B
E

Dial Size A B C D E F J K
21/2 " 3.35 [85] 1.43 [36.3] 2.68 [68] 0.14 [3.6] 2.23 [56.6] 0.52 [13.2] 1.38 [35.1] 2.95 [75]
4" 5.20 [132] 2.19 [55.6] 4.18 [106] 0.19 [4.8] 3.07 [78] 0.62 [15.7] 1.47 [37.3] 4.57 [116]

2", 2 1/2" & 4" Front Flange

Dial Size A C H J K P
2" 3.03 [77] 2.09 [53] 0.99 [25] 0.94 [24] 2.65 [65] 0.32 [8]
21/2 " 3.35 [85] 2.67 [68] 0.99 [25] 0.82 [21] 2.95 [75] 0.32 [8]
4" 5.20 [132] 4.17 [106] 0.99 [25] 0.91 [23] 4.56 [116] 0.42 [10]

46
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
D80 Series

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

2 1/2" Front Ring

2", 2 1/2" & 4" U-Clamp

Dial Size C H J M P R V
2" 2.09 [53] .99 [25] 1.10 [28] 1.91 [48.5] .18 [4.5] 2.28 [58] 2.76 [70]
21/2 " 2.68 [68] .99 [25] 1.20 [30.5] 2.44 [62] .28 [7] 2.83 [72] 3.31 [84]
4" 4.17 [106] .99 [25] 1.32 [33.5] 3.88 [98.6] .28 [7] 4.33 [110] 4.80 [122]

47
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
800 Series All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

How to Order: Specify the Optional Case Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: 800B 15 01 B D 140 - UCB
Dial Size
Case Styles - 800 Series 1 1/2 " 2" 2 1/2 " 4"
Panel Mounted Case with Front Flange, Back Connection FMB FMB FMB FMB
Panel Mounted Case with U-Clamp, Back Connection UCB UCB UCB N/A
Please order using the code listed.

Front Flange

Dial Size C H J K L M
11/2 " 2.40 [61] 0.73 [18.5] 0.98 [25] 1.97 [50] .14 [3.5] 1.61 [41]
2" 2.80 [71] 0.83 [21] 1.02 [26] 2.36 [60] .14 [3.5] 1.97 [50]
21/2 " 3.35 [85] 0.83 [21] 1.06 [27] 2.95 [75] .14 [3.5] 2.52 [64]
4" 5.20 [132] 0.98 [25] 1.26 [32] 4.57 [116] .19 [4.8] 3.96 [100.5]

1 1/2", 2", 2 1/2" U-Clamp

Dial Size C H J N P R V
11/2 " 1.73 [44] 1.08 [27.5] 1.12 [28.5] 1.57 [40] 0.24 [6] 1.97 [50] 2.44 [62]
2" 2.13 [54] 1.02 [26] 1.18 [30] 1.97 [50] 0.22 [5.5] 2.28 [58] 2.76 [70]
21/2 " 2.68 [68] 1.02 [26] 1.18 [30] 2.48 [63] 0.22 [5.5] 2.83 [72] 3.31 [84]

48
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
800LF Series

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

How to Order: Specify the Optional Case Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: 800LFB 35 02 B A 030 - UCB

Dial Size
Case Styles - 800LF Series 2 1/2 " 3 1/2 "
* Panel Mounted, Front Flange Kit for Back Connection 198-0020 N/A
* Surface Mounted, Back Flange Kit for Lower Connection 198-0022 N/A
* Panel Mounted, Front Ring Kit for Back Connection 198-0021 N/A
* Panel Mounted, U-Clamp Kit for Back Connection 198-0026 N/A
Panel Mounted Case with U-Clamp, Back Connection N/A UCB

* Kit Only. Not Factory installed.

Please order using the code listed.

2 1/2" Front Flange

2 1/2" Back Flange

49
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Case Styles
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
800LF Series (continued)
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

2 1/2" Front Ring

2 1/2" U-Clamp

3 1/2" U-Clamp

50
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Features
PRESSURE GAUGES
Windows (PLW/SGW)

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Trerice offers a complete line of window options, including: plastic (acrylic)
and laminated safety glass. Please consult the Option Application Table for
window availability. Replacement windows are sold separately; please
consult the price sheet for item numbers.

Red Set Hand (RSH)

Attached at the center of the dial face, a red set hand can be adjusted to
indicate a desired predetermined reference point. The set point is adjusted
by removing the ring and window of the gauge (dry gauge only). When used
on a liquid filled gauge, please specify the set point when ordering. Please
consult the Option Application Table for set hand availability.

Maximum Registering Pointers (MAX)

Maximum registering pointers can be furnished on most dry 31/2"dial size
and larger pressure gauges having a pressure range of 60 psi or greater.
The pointer is designed to indicate the maximum or minimum pressure
attained by the process being measured since the pointer was last reset. The
pointer assembly is installed to an acrylic window, with an external knob for
manually resetting the pointer. Please consult the Option Application Table
for maximum registering pointer availability.

Electric Contacts
Electric contact assemblies can be supplied on most 4", 41/2" and 6"
pressure gauges. These units are well suited for making the electrical
contact required to activate alarms, signals, or other electrical devices.
Each unit is provided with an external adjustment key, making it easy to
adjust and providing for tamper-resistant operation. The contacts have
adjustable magnets to eliminate pointer bounce caused by vibration, and
have pass/repass capability, allowing the pointer to move past the set point
while maintaining contact. For applications that require a liquid-filled gauge, a
special inductive type contact is required. Please consult factory for
additional information.

Electric Contact Configurations Recommended Load Limits

Optional Contact Style Contact Action Volts Resistive Inductive
Feature Code
110 Vac 0.25 A 0.13 A
EC1 Single High Single contact:
Makes on clockwise rotation 24 Vdc 0.40 A 0.25 A

EC2 Single Low Single contact:

Breaks on clockwise rotation
EC3 High-Low Double contact:
High contact makes on clockwise rotation
Low contact breaks on clockwise rotation
EC4 Double High Double contact:
1st makes on clockwise rotation
2nd makes on clockwise rotation
Please consult the Option Application Table for electric contact availability.

51
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Features
PRESSURE GAUGES
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Weatherproofed Cases (WPC)

Trerice pressure gauges may be sealed for outdoor use, or for use in
applications where sprays and washes will come in contact with the
gauge. Trerice Series 450, 700, 750 and all liquid-filled gauges are
hermetically sealed and are inherently weatherproof. The weather-
proofing option is available for most other pressure gauges.

Pressure Relief Plugs (PRP)

This feature is designed to release non-instantaneously developed
internal case pressure at 3 to 5 psi, and can be supplied on most 31/2"
and larger pressure gauges. Please consult the Option Application
Table for pressure relief plug availability.

Silicone Dampened Movements (SDM)

The application of a highly viscous silicone oil to the gear, sector, and all
bearing points of the movement will help reduce the effects of vibration
and pulsation to which the gauge may be subjected. This feature will
extend the life of the gauge by reducing wear on the movement, and is
available on most Trerice Pressure Gauges. Please consult the Option
Application Table for silicone dampened movement availability.

Capillary Tube Bleeders (CTB)

The No. 421 Capillary Bleeder has been designed as
an accessory for the 500X Series Pressure Gauge. This
feature makes it possible to completely eliminate air or
other pressure media that may be trapped in the bourdon No. 421 BLEEDER
tube of a gauge. After installation, the bleeder must be BACK CONNECTION

opened to allow the entrapped air or medium to be

purged from the bourdon tube. After purging, the bleeder
can be closed, permitting proper action of the gauge.
When used on a 500XB gauge, the bleeder assembly is
manufactured from brass, and has a maximum pressure
of 1000 psi. When used on a 500XSS gauge, the bleeder
assembly is manufactured from 347 stainless steel, and
has a maximum pressure of 5000 psi. Please consult the
Option Application Table for capillary bleeder availability.
No. 421 BLEEDER
SIDE CONNECTION

52
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Features
PRESSURE GAUGES

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Snubber Screws and Restrictors
A snubber screw or restrictor may be installed in the gauge socket to reduce shock to the gauge
and prevent wear on the movement, and should be installed where sudden pressure surges or
oscillations are expected. Snubber screws reduce the pulsation by forcing the pressure medium
through a porous metal core, while restrictors use a small orifice for pulsation reduction. Trerice also
offers externally installed pressure snubbers. Please consult the Accessories section for details.

Snubber Screws and Restrictors

Optional Item No. Service Construction
Feature Code
SS2 D368 Air & other gases 316 stainless steel body &
core, 1/4-20 UNC thread
SS4 D369 Vapor & low viscosity 316 stainless steel body &
fluids under 30 SSU core, 1/4-20 UNC thread
SS6 D370 Water and oils 316 stainless steel body &
30 SSU to 250 SSU core, 1/4-20 UNC thread
SS8 D371 Heavy oils and viscous 316 stainless steel body,
fluids 250 SSU to 500 SSU 1/4-20 UNC thread
Core omitted, 0.040 orifice
RES 104-0005.3 Air, gases & fluids Brass, push-in
RSS Optional feature Air, gases & fluids 316L stainless steel,
only. Not sold screw-in
separately.

Please consult the Option Application Table for snubber screw and restrictor availability.

Alternate Fill Fluids (SLF & HLF)

By minimizing wear on the gauge internals resulting from vibration or oscillation, liquid filling can
prolong the life of a pressure gauge. Liquid filling also acts a permanent lubricant to the moving
parts of the instrument. Trerice provides glycerine as the standard fill material. Silicone (SLF)
and halocarbon (HLF) are available as alternate fills. Please consult factory for availability.

Recalibration and Certification

The factory is equipped to recalibrate and/or certify pressure gauges having ±0.5% Full Scale
ASME B40.100 Grade 2A or lesser accuracy in ranges from 30" Hg vacuum to 20,000 psi pressure.
Price is determined by range, gauge accuracy and number of points certified; please consult factory.

53
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Optional Features
OPTION AVAILABILITY TABLE
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Optional Feature Codes

PLW SGW RSH MAX EC-X WPC PRP SDM CTB SS-X RES RSS

Plastic Laminated Red Maximum Electric Weather- Pressure Silicone Capillary Snubber Push-in Restrictor
Window Safety Glass Set Registering Contact3 Proofed Relief Dampened Tube Screw Restrictor Screw
(Acrylic) Window Hand1 Pointer2 Case Plug Movement Bleeder
450
Series S O O O O S N/A O N/A O N/A N/A
(Dry)

450
Series S O O N/A O S N/A N/A N/A O N/A N/A
Liquid
Filled

500X
Series O O O O O O O O O O N/A N/A

600
Series O N/A O N/A N/A O O O N/A N/A O N/A

690 S N/A O O N/A O O O N/A N/A O N/A

Series

700 O S N/A O O S S O N/A N/A N/A O

Series

750 O S N/A O N/A S S N/A N/A N/A N/A O

Series

1 Red set hand is not available with 11/2”, 2”, 81/2”, or 12” dial size. Set hand per 21/2”, dial size is an adhesive decal, applied directly
to inside surface window.
2 Maximum registering pointer not available on liquid filled gauges or 21/2”, dial sizes.
3 Electric contact only available with 4”, 41/2”, or 6” dial sizes. Consult factory for liquid filled gauge applications.

S – Standard Product Feature O – Optional Feature at Additional Charge N/A – Not Available

How to Order
Specify the Optional Feature Ordering Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: 600CB 45 02 L A 110 PLW

54
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Accessories
PRESSURE GAUGES
Impulse Dampeners

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

870 Series Pressure Impulse Dampeners are designed to improve
readability and prevent wear on delicate gauge mechanisms by
slowing rapid pressure changes and reducing shock and chattering.
An impulse dampener should be installed on a gauge in any application
where pressure spikes and/or pulsations may be present. Trerice
Impulse Dampeners are engineered for field serviceability (cleaning
and parts replacement) and are constructed from brass or stainless
steel for use on a variety of pressure media.
870 Series Impulse Dampeners
Item Body & Insert Connection Maximum Approximate
No. Material Size (NPT) Pressure (psig) Service Shipping Weight

870-1 Brass 1/4 1000 Air, water, steam and gases 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
870-2 Brass 1/4 1000 Gasoline and light oils 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
870-3 Brass 1/4 1000 Lubricating and heavy oils 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]

870-7 303SS 1/4 5000 Includes 3 pistons for various viscosities 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
870-10 303SS 1/2 10,000 Includes 3 pistons for various viscosities 0.8 lbs [0.36 kg]

870-13 316SS 1/4 5000 Includes 3 pistons for various viscosities 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
870-16 316SS 1/2 10,000 Includes 3 pistons for various viscosities 0.8 lbs [0.36 kg]

Pressure Snubbers
872 Series Pressure Snubbers are designed to improve readability and prevent
wear on delicate gauge mechanisms by slowing rapid pressure changes and
reducing shock and chattering. A pressure snubber should be installed on a
gauge in any application where pressure spikes and/or pulsations may be
present. If a single snubber does not correct the oscillation, it is recommended to
place an additional snubber in line with the first. Trerice Pressure Snubbers
reduce the pulsation by forcing the pressure medium through a porous metal
core and are constructed from brass or 303 stainless steel for use on a variety of
pressure media.
872 Series Pressure Snubbers
Item Body & Insert Connection Maximum Approximate
No. Material Size (NPT) Pressure (psig) Service Shipping Weight

872-1 Brass 1/4 1000 Air and gases 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
872-2 Brass 1/4 1000 Water, steam, gasoline and light oils 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
872-3 Brass 1/4 1000 Lubricating and heavy oils 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]

872-4 303SS 1/4 2000 Air and gases 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
872-5 303SS 1/4 2000 Water, steam, gasoline and light oils 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
872-6 303SS 1/4 2000 Lubricating and heavy oils 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]

872-7 Brass 1/2 5000 Air and gases 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
872-8 Brass 1/2 5000 Water, steam, gasoline and light oils 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
872-9 Brass 1/2 5000 Lubricating and heavy oils 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]

872-10 303SS 1/2 10,000 Air and gases 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
872-11 303SS 1/2 10,000 Water, steam, gasoline and light oils 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
872-12 303SS 1/2 10,000 Lubricating and heavy oils 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]

55
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Test Plugs & Accessories
The Trerice Test Plug provides a convenient access port for determining the pressure and/or temperature
of process media contained in a pipe line or vessel. The test plug is designed for use in chilled or D3750
hot water systems and is permanently installed in the system at the desired test location. A test
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

shown

thermometer or pressure gauge with test adapter can be inserted through the plug to deter-
mine the conditions within the system. When the probe is withdrawn, the inner valve plug
closes to seal the system. The test plug includes a removable cap to protect the inner valve
plug and provide a secondary seal.
Nordel, otherwise known as EPDM, provides excellent service in hot or cold water. Nordel
should not be used with hydrocarbon solvents, hydrocarbon oils, chlorinated hydro carbons
or turpentine.
Neoprene, a synthetic rubber, provides excellent service in ammonia, high aniline point petroleum oils and
silicate ester lubricants. Neoprene should not be used with silicone greases, silicone oils or di-ester
based lubricants.

Test plugs are designed for initial startup Tests should be made as quickly as possible because the inner plug
and testing, not continuous or frequent use. resealing time is dependent upon the length of time the probe remains
If continuous or frequent use is desired or inserted, as well as the temperature and pressure of the system. The
expected, a test well should be installed for test plug may take longer to reseal at lower temperatures or pressures.
temperature applications and a needle valve The probe used for testing should never exceed a diameter of 0.156" (4
installed for pressure applications. mm). The pressure gauge used for testing should always have a range of
twice the system pressure.

Test Plugs Accessories

Test Plug Item Approx.
Test Plug with Retainer Connection Body Max Pres. Max Approximate No. Description Shipping
Item No. Item No. Size (NPT) & Cap Core (psig) Temp. Shipping Weight Weight

D3741 D3764 1/4 Brass Nordel 1000 350°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg] D3747 Gauge Adapter, 0.1 lbs
1/8" diameter [0.05 kg]
D3743 D3763 1/4 Brass Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
D3749 2" Brass Extension, 0.1 lbs
D3758 D3766 1/4 316SS Nordel 1000 350°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg] 1/4 NPT [0.05 kg]
D3757 D3765 1/4 316SS Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg] D3753 2" Brass Extension, 0.2 lbs
1/2NPT [0.09 kg]
D3742 D3770 1/2 Brass Nordel 1000 350°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]
D3744 D3769 1/2 Brass Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]
D3762 D3772 1/2 316SS Nordel 1000 350°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]
D3761 D3771 1/2 316SS Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]

Test Kits Test Kit Replacement Items

Item Pressure Approximate Item Description Approximate
No. Range (psi) Shipping Weight No. Shipping Weight

D3750 0 to 100 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg] 700B2502LA110 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
lower connection, 0 to 100 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
D3751 0 to 200 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
700B2502LA130 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
D3752 0 to 300 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg] lower connection, 0 to 200 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
D3748 0 to 600 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg] 700B2502LA140 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
lower connection, 0 to 300 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
Each test kit contains:
(1) 700B Pressure Gauge, 700B2502LA160 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
lower connection, 0 to 600 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
(1) B82105P03F&C Thermometer,
(1) B82105P05F&C Thermometer, B82105P03 B82105 Bimetal Thermometer,
(1) D3747 Gauge Adapter, 13/4" dial size, 5" stem, 25° to 125°F & C 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
(1) Carrying Case B82105P05 B82105 Bimetal Thermometer,
13/4" dial size, 5" stem, 20° to 240°F & C 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]

58
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Accessories
PRESSURE GAUGES

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

Ball Valves
866 Ball Valve is a single entry flow valve, incorporating a Teflon
seat to shut off the flow of process media to the pressure instrument,
thereby allowing the instrument to be isolated from the pressure media or
removed from service. The Trerice 866 Ball Valve is constructed from brass,
for use on air, water, oil and other noncorrosive process media. It is
recommended to place a needle valve, ball valve or gauge cock
in line before every pressure gauge installation.

866 Ball Valve

Item Connection Maximum Maximum Approximate
No. Type Size Body Seat Ball Handle Pressure (psig) Temperature Shipping Weight
866 FXF 1/4 NPT Brass Teflon Plated brass Lever 500 psig 180°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]

Gauge Cocks
865/880 Series Quarter Turn Gauge Cocks provide an
economical way to shut off the flow of air to the pressure
instrument, thereby allowing the instrument to be isolated from
the pressure media or removed from service. Trerice Gauge
Cocks are constructed from brass and are intended for use on
air lines where leakage is not of concern. It is recommended 865
865MFG
to place a needle valve, ball valve or gauge cock in line
before every pressure gauge installation.

In applications where process media leakage may result in

possible personal injury or property damage, gauge cocks
should not be specified as they contain no packing gland and
leakage may result. For tight shut-off and prevention of leak- 865-1
age, use of a Trerice Ball Valve or Needle Valve is required.

880

865/880 Series Gauge Cocks

Item Connection Maximum Maximum Approximate
No. Type Size Body Plug Pressure (psig) Temperature Shipping Weight

865 FXF 1/4 NPT Brass Brass 200 500°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
865MFG MXF 1/4 NPT Brass Brass 200 500°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
865-1 FXF 1/4 NPT Brass Brass 300 500°F 0.3 lbs [0.14 kg]
880 MXF 1/4 Union Brass Brass 150 500°F 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]

Pointer Jack
The D329 Pointer Jack is required for removing the pointer of a pressure gauge without
causing damage to the dial face, pointer, pointer shaft or movement of the gauge.

Approximate Shipping Weight

0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]

57
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Test Plugs & Accessories
The Trerice Test Plug provides a convenient access port for determining the pressure and/or temperature
of process media contained in a pipe line or vessel. The test plug is designed for use in chilled or D3750
hot water systems and is permanently installed in the system at the desired test location. A test shown
OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES

thermometer or pressure gauge with test adapter can be inserted through the plug to deter-
mine the conditions within the system. When the probe is withdrawn, the inner valve plug
closes to seal the system. The test plug includes a removable cap to protect the inner valve
plug and provide a secondary seal.
Nordel, otherwise known as EPDM, provides excellent service in hot or cold water. Nordel
should not be used with hydrocarbon solvents, hydrocarbon oils, chlorinated hydro carbons
or turpentine.
Neoprene, a synthetic rubber, provides excellent service in ammonia, high aniline point petroleum oils and
silicate ester lubricants. Neoprene should not be used with silicone greases, silicone oils or di-ester
based lubricants.

Test plugs are designed for initial startup Tests should be made as quickly as possible because the inner plug
and testing, not continuous or frequent use. resealing time is dependent upon the length of time the probe remains
If continuous or frequent use is desired or inserted, as well as the temperature and pressure of the system. The
expected, a test well should be installed for test plug may take longer to reseal at lower temperatures or pressures.
temperature applications and a needle valve The probe used for testing should never exceed a diameter of 0.156" (4
installed for pressure applications. mm). The pressure gauge used for testing should always have a range of
twice the system pressure.

Test Plugs Accessories

Test Plug Item Approx.
Test Plug with Retainer Connection Body Max Pres. Max Approximate No. Description Shipping
Item No. Item No. Size (NPT) & Cap Core (psig) Temp. Shipping Weight Weight

D3741 D3764 1/4 Brass Nordel 1000 350°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg] D3747 Gauge Adapter, 0.1 lbs
1/8" diameter [0.05 kg]
D3743 D3763 1/4 Brass Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
D3749 2" Brass Extension, 0.1 lbs
D3758 D3766 1/4 316SS Nordel 1000 350°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg] 1/4 NPT [0.05 kg]
D3757 D3765 1/4 316SS Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg] D3753 2" Brass Extension, 0.2 lbs
1/2NPT [0.09 kg]
D3760 D3768 3/8 Brass Nordel 1000 350°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]
D3759 D3767 3/8 Brass Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.1 lbs [0.05 kg]

D3742 D3770 1/2 Brass Nordel 1000 350°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]
D3744 D3769 1/2 Brass Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]
D3762 D3772 1/2 316SS Nordel 1000 350°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]
D3761 D3771 1/2 316SS Neoprene 1000 200°F 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]

Test Kits Test Kit Replacement Items

Item Pressure Approximate Item Description Approximate
No. Range (psi) Shipping Weight No. Shipping Weight

D3750 0 to 100 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg] 700B2502LA110 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
lower connection, 0 to 100 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
D3751 0 to 200 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
700B2502LA130 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
D3752 0 to 300 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg] lower connection, 0 to 200 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
D3748 0 to 600 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg] 700B2502LA140 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
lower connection, 0 to 300 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
Each test kit contains:
(1) 700B Pressure Gauge, 700B2502LA160 700B Pressure Gauge, 21/2", 1/4 NPT,
lower connection, 0 to 600 psi 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
(1) B82105P03F&C Thermometer,
(1) B82105P05F&C Thermometer, B82105P03 B82105 Bimetal Thermometer,
(1) D3747 Gauge Adapter, 13/4" dial size, 5" stem, 25° to 125°F & C 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
(1) Carrying Case B82105P05 B82105 Bimetal Thermometer,
13/4" dial size, 5" stem, 20° to 240°F & C 0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]

58
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Notes

PRESSURE GAUGES

59
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Diaphragm Seals
DESIGN & OPERATION Description
A Diaphragm (or Chemical) Seal is a
INSTRUMENT protective device used to isolate a
CONNECTION
SEALS

pressure sensing instrument from

INSTRUMENT
the process fluid being monitored.
FLANGE

CAP SCREW
INSTRUMENT
FLANGE GASKET
DIAPHRAGM

FLUSHING CONNECTION

PROCESS
FLANGE

BLEED SCREW DIAPHRAGM

NUT

PROCESS
FLANGE
GASKET

PROCESS CONNECTION

Principles of Operation
A Diaphragm Seal is a device consisting of a diaphragm clamped between two suitable housings that are
properly gasketed to prevent leakage of liquid or gas. The diaphragm (a dividing membrane or thin partition)
acts as a barrier to isolate and protect the sensing element of a pressure instrument from potentially destructive
process media. Without such a barrier, the process media might clog or corrode the pressure instrument, causing
failure or inaccurate response. The sensing element of the pressure instrument, as well as the space above the
diaphragm of the seal, is evacuated and then filled with an incompressible liquid. When force (process media) is
applied to the diaphragm seal, the internal diaphragm will flex and the displaced liquid fill will then transmit the
force to the sensing element of the pressure instrument, resulting in a pressure measurement.

Features
Continuous Seal Operation
Trerice Diaphragm Seals (except Mini Seals and Sanitary Seals) are designed for continuous seal operation.
A diaphragm stop plate, located within the instrument housing, enables the diaphragm to assist in containing the
process media should the pressure instrument be damaged or removed. This allows the process to continue to
operate until it can be shut down to repair or replace the instrument or seal. This safety feature is especially
important where the process media is corrosive or harmful.

Various Diaphragm SIzes

Trerice Diaphragm Seals are available in a variety of diaphragm sizes: Mini (Series 2), Compact (Series 3),
Sanitary (Series 4), Standard (Series 5) and Large (Series 6). Mini and Compact diaphragm sizes are designed to
provide economical protection for pressure gauges (Contractor/Commercial/Utility) with a dial face size of 41/2" or
smaller. Sanitary Diaphragm Seals are designed for use with Tri-Clamp process connections. Standard and Large
diaphragm sizes are the most versatile, with a variety of available materials and connections. The Large diaphragm
size has twice the diaphragm surface area of the Standard diaphragm size and is therefore more sensitive and
better suited for low pressure applications.

60
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Fill Port

DIAPHRAGM
Trerice Diaphragm Seals are furnished standard with a fill port in the side of the instrument housing.
This port provides access to the fill area above the diaphragm. An adapter fitting can be connected so
that the assembly can be evacuated and completely filled with liquid without entrapping air, thereby
maintaining the integrity of the system. A bleed screw is inserted after filling to plug the port and provide
a means to bleed excess fill during the instrument calibration process.

Clean-out Design
Most Trerice Diaphragm Seals are of the Clean-out design, utilizing a snap-in or welded style diaphragm,
with an o-ring gasket between the diaphragm and instrument housing. This allows the bolts to be removed
and the housings separated to permit inspection, cleaning or installation of the process housing without
loss of the liquid fill fluid in the instrument housing.

SEALS
Note: Should the bolts of a Non Clean-out design diaphragm seal (Styles 05, 10 and 11) be loosened
or removed, loss of the liquid fill will result.

Flushing Connection
Most Trerice Diaphragm Seals can be ordered with a 1/4 NPT Flushing Connection (located in the side
of the process housing), which enables periodic back flushing of solids from the system.

Selecting A Diaphragm Seal

In choosing the appropriate diaphragm seal, it is essential to have an understanding of the pressure
instrument to be isolated, the process medium, and any temperature or pressure considerations. The
process housing (or adapter ring), diaphragm, and process housing gasket are “wetted” parts which
come in contact with the process medium, making proper material selection critical. The instrument
housing, instrument housing gasket, nuts and bolts, and liquid fill fluid do not come into contact with
the process medium and therefore are “non-wetted” parts. External environmental considerations, such
as atmospheric conditions or extreme temperatures, may influence material and design selection.

All Trerice Diaphragm Seals should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the
particular application. The information contained in this catalog is offered only as a
guide to assist in making the proper selection. Selection of the proper diaphragm
seal, as well as the liquid fill fluid, is the sole responsibility of the user. Improper
application may cause failure of the seal, resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage. For correct use and application of all diaphragm seals, please
refer to Diaphragm Seal Standard ASME B40.2. This document may be obtained from
the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), United Engineering Center,
345 East 42nd Street, New York, NY 10017.

Process Housing or Adapter Ring

Generally, the material chosen is identical to that used in the piping system. Many different metal
alloys, as well as nonmetallic materials, are available. A unique, patented Teflon-lined process housing
is offered for use with Teflon-lined piping systems. The Teflon-lined steel housing can safely withstand
high pressures and temperatures without leakage. Diaphragm seals supplied with nonmetallic process
housings are furnished with a steel pressure plate under the fasteners, which spreads the bolting pressure
over a large area and prevents the nuts or bolts from imbedding themselves into the process housing.

61
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Diaphragm Seals
DESIGN & OPERATION
Diaphragm
SEALS

Both welded and removable metal diaphragms are available, as are Teflon and Viton diaphragm materials.
Trerice metal diaphragms have both radial and spoke corrugations, resulting in an extremely flexible
diaphragm. This flexibility increases the diaphragm’s ability to displace fill fluid into the pressure instrument,
providing excellent accuracy at low pressures. Trerice Teflon diaphragms provide greater sensitivity than
metal diaphragms and are compatible with many caustic process media. Trerice Viton diaphragms are
extremely pliable and offer optimum sensitivity at low pressures.

◗ Type W (Welded Metal)

DIAPHRAGM

◗ Diaphragm is welded at its outer edge directly to the instrument housing.

◗ Ensures no leakage of the fill fluid.
◗ Best choice for high temperature applications.
◗ Economically priced.
◗ Diaphragm and instrument housing must be replaced as a complete assembly.
◗ Clean-out design.
◗ Type M (Removable Metal)
◗ Diaphragm is replaceable if worn or damaged.
◗ Can be rebuilt many times to “like new” condition.
◗ Very cost effective.
◗ Available in Clean-out or Non Clean-out design.
◗ Type T (Teflon)
◗ Offers excellent compatibility with most process media.
◗ Greater sensitivity than metal diaphragms.
◗ Best choice for abrasive fluid applications.
◗ Available in Clean-out or Non Clean-out design.
◗ Type V (Viton)
◗ Compatible with most process media.
◗ Most sensitive diaphragm material available.
◗ Ideal for low pressure applications. For Viton diaphragm applications that also
require pulsation damping, a .040 orifice should
◗ Available in Clean-out or Non Clean-out design. be specified. Standard porous stones are not
recommended. Please consult factory.

Process Housing Gasket

Process housing gaskets are installed in all seals (except Mini Seals and Sanitary Seals). They seat into a
recessed area of the process housing, eliminating the possibility of causing damage to the gasket by overtighten-
ing the bolts. The process housing gasket is self-energized (utilizing process pressure to seat the gasket),
reducing the possibility of leakage. Process housing gaskets are normally made of Teflon for applications up to
500°F, but can be supplied in Grafoil for temperature requirements up to 800°F. Consult factory for availability.
Instrument Housing
The instrument housing is isolated from the process media by the diaphragm and is normally furnished
in nickel plated, carbon steel. For severe environmental conditions, a 316 stainless steel housing with stain-
less steel nuts and bolts is also available. For other material requirements, consult factory.
Instrument Housing Gasket
Viton instrument housing gaskets are used in Type M (Removable Metal) and Type T (Teflon) seals, and
have a 500°F temperature limit. No instrument housing gasket is required on Type V (Viton) seals as the
diaphragm provides a “self-gasketed” seal.

62
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Nuts and Bolts

DIAPHRAGM
Bolts are normally hexagonal head, heat treated alloy steel, while nuts are hexagonal type stainless steel.
Stainless steel bolts are furnished with stainless steel instrument housings and are also available with standard
nickel plated, carbon steel instrument housings. Special materials are also available; consult factory. (Mini Seals
and Sanitary Seals are of welded construction and, therefore, nuts and bolts are not required for assembly.)
Liquid Fill Fluids
The liquid fill fluid transmits the process pressure acting upon the diaphragm to the sensing element of the
pressure instrument. Because fill fluids may freeze at low temperatures, vaporize at high temperatures, or react
chemically with process media or other materials, caution must be exercised when selecting the liquid fill fluid.
Please consult the table below for liquid fill temperature limits. Other fill fluids may be available; consult factory.

Liquid Fill Fluid Temperature Limits Fill Fluid Pressure Limits

SEALS
Standard Instrument Oil 10°F to 300°F Standard Instrument Oil Vacuum/Pressure
Glycerine 0°F to 210°F Glycerine Pressure Only
High Temperature Silicone – 60°F to 500°F Silicone Vacuum/Pressure
Halocarbon – 50°F to 500°F Halocarbon Vacuum/Pressure

Temperature and Pressure Limitations

Temperature and Operating Range Limitations
Diaphragm Diaphragm Maximum Minimum Pressure Maximum Readable
Size Type Temperature* Gauge Range Vacuum (30” Hg to 0 Range)
Series 6 M, W 500°F 0 to 30 psi 24" Hg
T 500°F 0 to 30 psi 26" Hg
Series 5 M, W 500°F 0 to 60 psi 21" Hg
T 500°F 0 to 60 psi 23" Hg
V 350°F 0 to 5 psi 29" Hg
Series 4 W472 500°F Range Dependent** Not Recommended
Series 3 W305 500°F 0 to 100 psi Not Recommended
Series 2 W205 500°F 0 to 100 psi Not Recommended
* Choice of fill fluids may affect maximum temperature. Please refer to Liquid Fill Fluid Temperature Limits above.
** See Sanitary Gauge product data page for minimum operating pressures.

Maximum Working Pressure

Style Maximum Pressure
Pipe-Mounted 2500 psi @ 100°F (5000 psi @ 100°F – optionally available – consult factory)
Flanged ASA flange pressure rating Seals with a
In-Line Flow-Thru 600 psi @ 100°F** polypropylene, PVC
or Teflon process
Saddle-Welded 600 psi @ 100°F** housing have a
Drop-In Welded 600 psi @ 100°F** maximum working
pressure of 300 psi
Mini Diaphragm 2000 psi @ 100°F at a maximum
Compact Diaphragm 1000 psi @ 100°F temperature of 140°F.
Sanitary 1000 psi @ 100°F
** Should not exceed pressure rating of pipe being used.

For applications other than those listed, please consult factory. The above temperature,
pressure, and vacuum limits apply only when diaphragm seals are properly mounted,
installed, operated and maintained.

The accuracy of a pressure instrument may be affected when mounted to a diaphragm seal,
especially in ranges of 100 psi or below. Please consult factory for further information.

63
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Threaded-NPT
Diaphragm Seals
The Trerice Threaded NPT Diaphragm
Seal is offered in both Clean-out and
SEALS

Non Clean-out designs, with female

threaded connections of 1/4 NPT through
1 NPT. The Non Clean-out design can be
furnished with diaphragm materials of
Teflon (T), Viton (V), or Removable
Metal (M), while the Clean-out design
is available with all diaphragm choices,
DIAPHRAGM

including Welded Metal (W).

Selection of the proper diaphragm seal

is the sole responsibility of the user.
Temperature and pressure limitations
must be considered. Please refer to the
Diaphragm Seal Design & Operation
Section of this catalog. Improper
application may cause failure of the seal,
resulting in possible personal injury or
Clean-out or Non Clean-out Design property damage.
______________________________________
Flushing Connection Available For correct use and application of
M511 shown Threaded Process Connection
all diaphragm seals, please refer to
Diaphragm Seal Standard ASME B40.2.

SPECIFICATIONS
Available Diaphragm Process Clean-out 1/4 NPT
Style Diaphragm Types* Size Connection Design Flushing Connection
510 M, T, V Standard Threaded No No
511 M, T, V Standard Threaded No Yes
515 M, T, V, W Standard Threaded Yes No
516 M, T, V, W Standard Threaded Yes Yes
610 M, T Large Threaded No No
611 M, T Large Threaded No Yes
615 M, T, W Large Threaded Yes No
616 M, T, W Large Threaded Yes Yes
*M = Removable Metal, T = Teflon, V = Viton, W = Welded Metal Note: Due to the variety of available diaphragm seal
configurations and materials, it is not possible to list
each weight in this catalog. Please consult factory.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: M 5 10 04 S S CC

Process
Diaphragm Diaphragm Connection Diaphragm Housing Instrument Housing
Type Size Style Size Material Material & Bolt Material
M Metal 5 Standard 10 Non Clean-out, Non-Flushing See See See CC Carbon Steel
T Teflon 6 Large 11 Non Clean-out, Flushing Connection Diaphragm Process SS 316 Stainless Steel
V Viton** 15 Clean-out, Non-Flushing Sizes Materials Housing
W Welded† 16 Clean-out, Flushing Materials

**Diaphragm Type V available only with Diaphragm Size 5.

† Diaphragm Type W available only with Styles 15 and 16. See Sizes and Materials Table

64
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Threaded-NPT
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Diaphragm Seals

DIAPHRAGM
SEALS
Diaphragm Type and Size A B H D
M, T, W 5 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1 NPT as specified 1.63 [41] 3.25 [83]
V 5 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1 NPT as specified 1.88 [48] 3.25 [83]
M, T, W 6 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, 1 NPT as specified 1.63 [41] 4.00 [102]

Sizes and Materials

Connection Sizes Diaphragm Materials Process Housing Materials
Instrument Process Connection
Code Connection (NPT) (NPT) Code Material Code Material
01 1/4 1/4 D Carpenter 20 C Steel
02 1/2 1/4 F 304 Stainless Steel* D Carpenter 20
03 1/4 1/2 G Hastelloy B F 304 Stainless Steel
04 1/2 1/2 H Hastelloy C-276 G Hastelloy B
05 1/4 3/4 M Monel H Hastelloy C-276
06 1/2 3/4 N Nickel M Monel
07 1/4 1 S 316 Stainless Steel N Nickel
08 1/2 1 T Teflon P Polypropylene
U Tantalum S 316 Stainless Steel
V Viton** T Teflon
Z PVC
* 304 Stainless Steel diaphragm not available with Diaphragm Size 6.
**Viton Diaphragm available only with Diaphragm Size 5.

65
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Flange-Mounted
Diaphragm Seals
The Trerice Flange-Mounted
SEALS

Diaphragm Seal is furnished with a

Clean-out design in ANSI Raised Face
Flange (RFF) sizes of 1/2" through 3".
Process housing flanges mate with the
piping flange, which is supplied by the
user. Available diaphragm choices
include: Teflon (T), Viton (V), Removable
DIAPHRAGM

Metal (M) and Welded Metal (W).

Selection of the proper diaphragm seal

is the sole responsibility of the user.
Temperature and pressure limitations
must be considered. Please refer to the
Diaphragm Seal Design & Operation
Section of this catalog. Improper
application may cause failure of the seal,
Clean-out Design resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage.
Flushing Connection Available ______________________________________
M530 shown ANSI Raised Face Flanged For correct use and application of all
diaphragm seals, please refer to
Process Connection
Diaphragm Seal Standard ASME B40.2.

SPECIFICATIONS
Available Diaphragm Process Clean-out 1/4 NPT Flushing
Style Diaphragm Types* Size Connection Design Connection
525 M, T, V, W Standard 1/2" ANSI RFF Yes No
526 M, T, V, W Standard 1/2" ANSI RFF Yes Yes
530 M, T, V, W Standard 1" to 3" ANSI RFF Yes No
531 M, T, V, W Standard 1" to 3" ANSI RFF Yes Yes
625 M, T, W Large 1/2" and 1" ANSI RFF Yes No
626 M, T, W Large 1/2" and 1" ANSI RFF Yes Yes
630 M, T, W Large 11/2" to 3" ANSI RFF Yes No
631 M, T, W Large 11/2" to 3" ANSI RFF Yes Yes

*M = Removable Metal, T = Teflon, V = Viton, W = Welded Metal Note: Due to the variety of available diaphragm seal
configurations and materials, it is not possible to list
each weight in this catalog. Please consult factory.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: M 5 25 04 S S CC

Process
Diaphragm Diaphragm Connection Diaphragm Housing Instrument Housing
Type Size Style Size Material Material & Bolt Material
M Metal 5 Standard 25 Small Flange, Non-Flushing See See See CC Carbon Steel
T Teflon 6 Large 26 Small Flange, Flushing Connection Diaphragm Process SS 316 Stainless Steel
V Viton** 30 Large Flange, Non-Flushing Sizes Materials Housing
W Welded 31 Large Flange, Flushing Materials

**Diaphragm Type V available only with Diaphragm Size 5.

See Sizes and Materials Table

66
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Flange-Mounted
Diaphragm Seals
Styles 25 & 26 Styles 30 & 31

D
D II A
S
SE APPH
HRRA
AGGM
M
Diaphragm Type Flange Diaphragm Type Flange

EA
and Size A B Rating H D and Size A B Rating H D

AL
M, T, V, W 1/4, 1/2
NPT 1/2 150# 1.69 [43] 3.25 [83] M, T, V, W 1/4, 1/2
NPT 1 150# 1.69 [43] 4.25 [108]
5 Series as specified 300# 1.69 [43] 3.50 [89] All Series as specified 300# 1.69 [43] 4.75 [121]

LS
M, T, W 1/4, 1/2 NPT 1/2 150# 1.69 [43] 4.00 [102] 11/2 150# 1.63 [41] 5.00 [127]

S
6 Series as specified 300# 1.69 [43] 4.00 [102] 300# 1.63 [41] 6.00 [152]
1 150# 1.69 [43] 4.00 [102] 2 150# 1.63 [41] 6.00 [152]
300# 1.81 [46] 4.50 [114] 300# 1.63 [41] 6.50 [165]
3 150# 1.63 [41] 7.50 [191]
300# 1.81 [46] 8.00 [203]
Sizes and Materials
Connection Sizes Diaphragm Materials Process Housing Materials
Instrument Process
Code Connection (NPT) Connection Code Material Code Material
The following are available only on Styles 25 and 26. D Carpenter 20 C Steel
01 1/4 1/2" 150# RFF F 304 Stainless Steel1 D Carpenter 20
02 1/2 1/2" 150# RFF G Hastelloy B F 304 Stainless Steel
03 1/4 1/2" 300# RFF H Hastelloy C-276 G Hastelloy B
04 1/2 1/2" 300# RFF M Monel H Hastelloy C-276
The following are available only on Styles 530, 531, 625 and 626. N Nickel L Teflon-lined 3
21 1/4 1" 150# RFF S 316 Stainless Steel M Monel
22 1/2 1" 150# RFF T Teflon N Nickel
23 1/4 1" 300# RFF U Tantalum P Polypropylene4
24 1/2 1" 300# RFF V Viton2 S 316 Stainless Steel
The following are available only on Styles 30 and 31. T Teflon4
41 1/4 11/2" 150# RFF Z PVC4
42 1/2 11/2" 150# RFF
43 1/4 11/2" 300# RFF
44 1/2 11/2" 300# RFF
51 1/4 2" 150# RFF
52 1/2 2" 150# RFF
53 1/4 2" 300# RFF
54 1/2 2" 300# RFF
61 1/4 3" 150# RFF
62 1/2 3" 150# RFF
63 1/4 3" 300# RFF
64 1/2 3" 300# RFF
1 304 Stainless Steel diaphragm not available with Diaphragm Size 6.
2 Viton Diaphragm available only with Diaphragm Size 5.
3 Teflon-lined Process Housing available only with Style 30.
4 Polypropylene, PVC and Teflon Process Housings available only with Styles 30 and 31.
67
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 In-Line Threaded
Diaphragm Seals
The Trerice In-Line Threaded Diaphragm
Seal is furnished with a Clean-out design in
SEALS

threaded or socket-welded pipe connections

of 1/4" through 1". Since the diaphragm seal
is installed “in line” to the system piping,
the process media will flow through the seal,
eliminating the “dead-end” area found on
threaded or flanged seals. Available
diaphragm choices include: Teflon (T),
DIAPHRAGM

Viton (V), Removable Metal (M) and

Welded Metal (W).

Selection of the proper diaphragm seal

is the sole responsibility of the user.
Temperature and pressure limitations
must be considered. Please refer to the
Diaphragm Seal Design & Operation
Section of this catalog. Improper
application may cause failure of the seal,
resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage.
Clean-out Design
M535 shown ______________________________________
Threaded or Socket-Welded For correct use and application of all
Process Connection diaphragm seals, please refer to
Diaphragm Seal Standard ASME B40.2.

SPECIFICATIONS
Available Diaphragm Process Clean-out 1/4 NPT
Style Diaphragm Types* Size Connection Design Flushing Connection
535 M, T, V, W Standard Threaded Yes No
540 M, T, V, W Standard Socket-Welded Yes No
635 M, T, W Large Threaded Yes No
640 M, T, W Large Socket-Welded Yes No

*M = Removable Metal, T = Teflon, V = Viton, W = Welded Metal Note: Due to the variety of available diaphragm seal
configurations and materials, it is not possible to list
each weight in this catalog. Please consult factory.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: T 5 35 06 T T CC

Process
Diaphragm Diaphragm Connection Diaphragm Housing Instrument Housing
Type Size Style Size Material Material & Bolt Material
M Metal 5 Standard 35 Threaded See See See CC Carbon Steel
T Teflon 6 Large 40 Socket-Welded Connection Diaphragm Process SS 316 Stainless Steel
V Viton** Sizes Materials Housing
W Welded Materials

**Diaphragm Type V available only with Diaphragm Size 5.

See Sizes and Materials Table

68
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 In-Line Threaded
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Diaphragm Seals

DIAPHRAGM
SEALS
Diaphragm Type and Size A B H U C D
M, T, W 5 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4 NPT 1.63 [41] 0.88 [22] 1.24 [32] 3.25 [83]
1/2 NPT 2.13 [54] 0.88 [22] 1.50 [38] 3.25 [83]
3/4 NPT 2.38 [60] 0.88 [22] 1.63 [41] 3.25 [83]
1 NPT 2.63 [67] 0.88 [22] 1.75 [44] 3.25 [83]
V 5 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4 NPT 1.63 [41] 1.00 [25] 1.24 [32] 3.25 [83]
1/2 NPT 2.13 [54] 1.00 [25] 1.50 [38] 3.25 [83]
3/4 NPT 2.38 [60] 1.00 [25] 1.63 [41] 3.25 [83]
1 NPT 2.63 [67] 1.00 [25] 1.75 [44] 3.25 [83]
M, T, W 6 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4 NPT 1.63 [41] 0.88 [22] 1.24 [32] 4.00 [102]
1/2 NPT 2.13 [54] 0.88 [22] 1.50 [38] 4.00 [102]
3/4 NPT 2.38 [60] 0.88 [22] 1.63 [41] 4.00 [102]
1 NPT 2.63 [67] 0.88 [22] 1.75 [44] 4.00 [102]

Sizes and Materials

Connection Sizes Diaphragm Materials Process Housing Materials
Instrument Process
Code Connection (NPT) Connection Code Material Code Material
01 1/4 1/4" NPT/SW D Carpenter 20 C Steel
02 1/2 1/4" NPT/SW F 304 Stainless Steel* D Carpenter 20
03 1/4 1/2" NPT/SW G Hastelloy B F 304 Stainless Steel
04 1/2 1/2" NPT/SW H Hastelloy C-276 G Hastelloy B
05 1/4 3/4" NPT/SW M Monel H Hastelloy C-276
06 1/2 3/4" NPT/SW N Nickel M Monel
07 1/4 1" NPT/SW S 316 Stainless Steel N Nickel
08 1/2 1" NPT/SW T Teflon P Polypropylene
U Tantalum S 316 Stainless Steel
V Viton** T Teflon
Z PVC
* 304 Stainless Steel diaphragm not available with Diaphragm Size 6.
** Viton Diaphragm available only with Diaphragm Size 5.

69
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Saddle-Welded
Diaphragm Seals
The Trerice Saddle-Welded Diaphragm
SEALS

Seal is furnished with a Clean-out design,

for use on pipe sizes of 1" through 8". The
diaphragm seal is installed by welding the
process housing directly onto the pipe.
Available diaphragm choices include:
Teflon (T), Viton (V), Removable Metal
(M) and Welded Metal (W).
DIAPHRAGM

Selection of the proper diaphragm seal

is the sole responsibility of the user.
Temperature and pressure limitations
must be considered. Please refer to the
Diaphragm Seal Design & Operation
Section of this catalog. Improper
application may cause failure of the seal,
resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage.
Clean-out Design ______________________________________
M545 shown Saddle-Welded For correct use and application of all
diaphragm seals, please refer to
Process Connection
Diaphragm Seal Standard ASME B40.2.

SPECIFICATIONS
Available Diaphragm Process Clean-out 1/4 NPT
Style Diaphragm Types* Size Connection Design Flushing Connection
545 M, T, V, W Standard Welded Yes No
645 M, T, W Large Welded Yes No
*M = Removable Metal, T = Teflon, V = Viton, W = Welded Metal Note: Due to the variety of available diaphragm seal
configurations and materials, it is not possible to list
each weight in this catalog. Please consult factory.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: W 5 45 05 S S CC

Process
Diaphragm Diaphragm Connection Diaphragm Housing Instrument Housing
Type Size Style Size Material Material & Bolt Material
M Metal 5 Standard 45 Saddle-Welded See See See CC Carbon Steel
T Teflon 6 Large Connection Diaphragm Process SS 316 Stainless Steel
V Viton** Sizes Materials Housing
W Welded Materials

**Diaphragm Type V available only with Diaphragm Size 5.

See Sizes and Materials Table

70
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Saddle-Welded
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Diaphragm Seals

DIAPHRAGM
SEALS
Hole
Diaphragm Type and Size A B U C D Diameter
M, T, W 5 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1 0.88 [22] 2.13 [55] 3.50 [89] 1.00 [25]
11/2 0.88 [22] 2.38 [60] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
2 0.88 [22] 2.63 [67] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
3 0.88 [22] 3.25 [83] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
4 0.88 [22] 3.81 [97] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
6 0.88 [22] 4.94 [125] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
8 0.88 [22] 5.94 [151] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
V 5 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1 1.00 [25] 2.13 [55] 3.50 [89] 1.00 [25]
11/2 1.00 [25] 2.38 [60] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
2 1.00 [25] 2.63 [67] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
3 1.00 [25] 3.25 [83] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
6 1.00 [25] 4.94 [125] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
8 1.00 [25] 5.94 [151] 3.50 [89] 1.50 [38]
M, T, W 6 Series 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1 0.88 [22] 2.13 [55] 4.25 [108] 1.00 [25]
11/2 0.88 [22] 2.38 [60] 4.25 [108] 1.50 [38]
2 0.88 [22] 2.63 [67] 4.25 [108] 1.50 [38]
3 0.88 [22] 3.25 [83] 4.25 [108] 1.50 [38]
4 0.88 [22] 3.81 [97] 4.25 [108] 1.50 [38]
6 0.88 [22] 4.94 [125] 4.25 [108] 1.50 [38]
8 0.88 [22] 5.94 [151] 4.25 [108] 1.50 [38]

Sizes and Materials

Connection Sizes Diaphragm Materials Process Housing Materials
Instrument Process
Code Connection (NPT) Connection Code Material Code Material
01 1/4 1" Pipe D Carpenter 20 C Steel
02 1/2 1" Pipe F 304 Stainless Steel* D Carpenter 20
05 1/4 11/2" Pipe G Hastelloy B F 304 Stainless Steel
06 1/2 11/2" Pipe H Hastelloy C-276 G Hastelloy B
07 1/4 2" Pipe M Monel H Hastelloy C-276
08 1/2 2" Pipe N Nickel M Monel
09 1/4 3" Pipe S 316 Stainless Steel N Nickel
10 1/2 3" Pipe T Teflon S 316 Stainless Steel
11 1/4 4" Pipe U Tantalum
12 1/2 4" Pipe V Viton**
13 1/4 6" Pipe
14 1/2 6" Pipe
15 1/4 8" Pipe
16 1/2 8" Pipe
* 304 Stainless Steel diaphragm not available with Diaphragm Size 6.
** Viton Diaphragm available only with Diaphragm Size 5.
71
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Drop-In Welded
Diaphragm Seals
The Trerice Drop-In Welded Diaphragm
SEALS

Seal is furnished with a Clean-out design

for use on piping 4" or larger in diameter.
The diaphragm seal is installed by welding
the process housing directly into the pipe.
Available diaphragm choices include: Teflon
(T), Viton (V), Removable Metal (M) and
Welded Metal (W).
DIAPHRAGM

Selection of the proper diaphragm seal is

the sole responsibility of the user.
Temperature and pressure limitations
must be considered. Please refer to the
Diaphragm Seal Design & Operation
Section of this catalog. Improper
}application may cause failure of the seal,
resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage.
______________________________________
Clean-out Design For correct use and application of all
M565 shown diaphragm seals, please refer to
Welded Process Connection Diaphragm Seal Standard ASME B40.2.

SPECIFICATIONS
Available Diaphragm Process Clean-out 1/4 NPT
Style Diaphragm Types* Size Connection Design Flushing Connection
565 M, T, V, W Standard Threaded Yes No

*M = Removable Metal, T = Teflon, V = Viton, W = Welded Metal Note: Due to the variety of available diaphragm seal
configurations and materials, it is not possible to list
each weight in this catalog. Please consult factory.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: M 5 65 11 S S CC

Process
Diaphragm Diaphragm Connection Diaphragm Housing Instrument Housing
Type Size Style Size Material Material & Bolt Material
M Metal 5 Standard 65 Drop-In Welded See See See CC Carbon Steel
T Teflon Connection Diaphragm Process SS 316 Stainless Steel
V Viton Sizes Materials Housing
W Welded Materials

See Sizes and Materials Table

72
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Drop-In Welded
All dimensions are nominal.
Diaphragm Seals

DIAPHRAGM
SEALS
Sizes and Materials
Connection Sizes Diaphragm Materials Process Housing Materials
Instrument Process
Code Connection (NPT) Connection Code Material Code Material
11 1/4 3" Process Housing D Carpenter 20 C Steel
12 1/2 3" Process Housing F 304 Stainless Steel D Carpenter 20
G Hastelloy B F 304 Stainless Steel
H Hastelloy C-276 G Hastelloy B
M Monel H Hastelloy C-276
N Nickel M Monel
S 316 Stainless Steel N Nickel
T Teflon S 316 Stainless Steel
U Tantalum
V Viton

73
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Mini & Compact
Diaphragm Seals Trerice Mini & Compact Diaphragm
Seals provide an economical way to
isolate and protect pressure instruments
from corrosion and clogging.
SEALS

Style 205 Diaphragm Seals are designed

for use with pressure ranges of 100 psi or
greater and can be mounted to pressure
gauges of 31/2" dial size or smaller.
Style 305 Diaphragm Seals are designed
for use with pressure ranges of 60 psi or
DIAPHRAGM

greater and can be mounted to pressure

gauges of 41/2" dial size or smaller.
Style 306 Diaphragm Seals include all
features found on the 305 with the addition
of a 1/4 NPT flushing connection.

All-Welded Design Selection of the proper diaphragm seal

No Gaskets or Bolts is the sole responsibility of the user.
Temperature and pressure limitations
1/4 NPT or 1/2 NPT must be considered. Please refer to the
Process Connections Diaphragm Seal Design & Operation
W205 shown Section of this catalog. Improper
316L Stainless Steel application may cause failure of the seal,
Construction resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage.
______________________________________
For correct use and application of all
diaphragm seals, please refer to Diaphragm
Seal Standard ASME B40.2.

SPECIFICATIONS

Diaphragm 1/4 NPT

Style Type Diaphragm Size Minimum Pressure Range Process Connection Clean-out Design Flushing Connection

205 Welded Metal Mini 0 to 100 psi when Threaded No No

mounted to 31/2" gauge
305 Welded Metal Compact 0 to 60 psi when Threaded No No
mounted to 41/2" gauge

306 Welded Metal Compact 0 to 60 psi when Threaded No Yes

mounted to 41/2" gauge

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: W 2 05 01 S S S

Process
Diaphragm Diaphragm Connection Diaphragm Housing Instrument
Type Size Style Size Material Material Housing Material
W Welded 2 Mini 05 Non Clean-out, See S 316 SS S 316 SS S 316 SS
3 Compact Welded Body Connection
06 Flushing, Sizes Table
Welded Body

74
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Mini & Compact
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Diaphragm Seals

DIAPHRAGM
A
Instrument
Connection

SEALS
H

B
Process
Connection

Style A B H D
205 1/4 NPT 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1.24 [31] 1.35 [34]
305 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1.75 [44] 2.25 [57]
306 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1.50 [38] 1.89 [48]

Sizes
Connection Sizes
Instrument Process
Code Connection (NPT) Connection (NPT)
01 1/4 1/4

02* 1/2 1/4

03 1/4 1/2

04* 1/2 1/2

* Not available on style 205.

75
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Sanitary
Diaphragm Seals
The Trerice Sanitary Diaphragm
Seal is intended for use in the food
and pharmaceutical industries, or in any
SEALS

application where a thorough cleaning

of the wetted surface is required.
Ease of maintenance is ensured as
surfaces that contact the process media
are virtually free of crevices. The all
welded construction and external
Tri-Clamp connection allow for easy
DIAPHRAGM

removal and cleaning.

Selection of the proper diaphragm seal

is the sole responsibility of the user.
Temperature and pressure limitations
must be considered. Please refer to the
Diaphragm Seal Design & Operation
Section of this catalog. Improper
application may cause failure of the seal,
resulting in possible personal injury or
External Tri-Clamp property damage.
______________________________________
W472 shown Clean-out Design For correct use and application of all
diaphragm seals, please refer to
All Welded Design Diaphragm Seal Standard ASME B40.2.

SPECIFICATIONS
Available Diaphragm Process Clean-out 1/4 NPT
Style Diaphragm Types* Size Connection Design Flushing Connection
472 Type W Sanitary Tri-Clamp Yes No

* W = Welded Metal Note: Due to the variety of available diaphragm seal

configurations and materials, it is not possible to list
each weight in this catalog. Please consult factory.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: W 4 72 09 S S S

Process
Diaphragm Diaphragm Connection Diaphragm Housing Instrument
Type Size Style Size Material Material Housing Material
W Welded 4 Sanitary 72 Tri-Clamp See S 316 Stainless S 316 Stainless S 316 Stainless Steel
Connection Steel Steel
Sizes on
Sizes Table

76
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Sanitary
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Diaphragm Seals

DIAPHRAGM
SEALS
Tri-Clamp Size A H D
11/2" 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1.81 [46] 2.00 [50]
2" 1/4, 1/2 NPT as specified 1.38 [35] 2.50 [64]

Sizes
Connection Sizes
Instrument Process
Code Connection (NPT) Connection
07 1/4 11/2" Tri-Clamp
08 1/2 11/2" Tri-Clamp
09 1/4 2" Tri-Clamp
10 1/2 2" Tri-Clamp

Clamps, gaskets and ferrules are not supplied by Trerice.

77
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
Diaphragm Seals
Capillary Tubing
Capillary tubing assemblies are used to remote mount a
SEALS

pressure sensing instrument away from the process

area. This is typically done to facilitate monitoring or
isolate the pressure instrument from conditions of
extreme vibration or temperature. Standard tubing
is 1/8" O.D. 304 stainless steel (316 stainless steel
optional), with silver soldered 303 stainless steel fittings.
A 302 stainless steel armored covering is also available.
DIAPHRAGM

Please consult the table below for the standard

configurations.

Connection 304 Stainless 304 Stainless Steel Capillary

Fitting Size Steel Capillary with 302 Stainless Steel Armor
1/4 NPT Male x 1/4 NPT Male DT5560 -- DT5580 --
Please specify capillary
1/4 NPT Male x 1/4 NPT Female DT5561 -- DT5581 -- length in feet.
1/4 NPT Male x 1/2 NPT Male DT5562 -- DT5582 -- Example: DT5561- 1 5
1/4 NPT Male x 1/2 NPT Female DT5563 -- DT5583 --
1/4 NPT Female x 1/4 NPT Female DT5564 -- DT5584 --
1/4 NPT Female x 1/2 NPT Male DT5565 -- DT5585 --
1/4 NPT Female x 1/2 NPT Female DT5566 -- DT5586 --
1/2 NPT Male x 1/2 NPT Male DT5567 -- DT5587 --
1/2 NPT Male x 1/2 NPT Female DT5568 -- DT5588 --
1/2 NPT Female x 1 /2 NPT Female DT5569 -- DT5589 --

Fittings and Bushings

A variety of fittings are available for mounting virtually any pressure instrument to
a diaphragm seal. Bushings are also available to reduce or increase instrument
or process connection sizes. Consult factory for availability.

78
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
Diaphragm Seals
Diaphragms

DIAPHRAGM
Replacement diaphragms are available for all seals (except Type W, Mini and Sanitary seals).
Please specify the item number from the table below.

Material Series 5 Clean-out Series 5 Non Clean-out Series 6 Clean-out Series 6 Non Clean-out
Carpenter 20 DM5403-D DM5401-D DM6403-D DM6401-D
304 Stainless Steel DM5403-F DM5401-F DM6403-F DM6401-F
Hastelloy B DM5403-G DM5401-G DM6403-G DM6401-G
Hastelloy C-276 DM5403-H DM5401-H DM6403-H DM6401-H
Monel DM5403-M DM5401-M DM6403-M DM6401-M
Nickel DM5403-N DM5401-N DM6403-N DM6401-N

SEALS
316 Stainless Steel DM5403-S DM5401-S DM6403-S DM6401-S
Teflon DM5403-T DM5404-T DM6403-T DM6404-T
Tantalum DM5403-U DM5401-U DM6403-U DM6401-U
Viton DM5403-V DM5403-V N/A N/A

N/A = Not Available

Gaskets
Trerice recommends replacing the diaphragm gasket and/or instrument housing gasket any time the diaphragm
is replaced. The process housing gasket should be replaced if it shows wear or damage. Please see the table
below for gasket ordering information.
Instrument Housing and Diaphragm Gaskets (Viton)
Material Series 5 Clean-out Series 5 Non Clean-out Series 6 Clean-out Series 6 Non Clean-out
Type M T5410 M5406 T6410 M6406
Type T T5411 & M5406 T5411 & M5406 T5410 & M5406 T5410 & M5406

Process Housing Gaskets (Teflon)

Material Series 5 Clean-out Series 5 Non Clean-out Series 6 Clean-out Series 6 Non Clean-out
Type M T5407 T5411 T6407 T6411
Type T T5407 T5407 T6407 T6407
Type W T5407 N/A T6407 N/A

N/A = Not Available

79
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Table of Contents
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION

Industrial Thermometers Design & Operation 82-83

Trerice Industrial Thermometers
are either of the liquid-in-glass SX9 Solar Therm • Light-Powered Digital 84
or light-powered digital type.
Adjustable Angle Series 86

Rigid Stem Series 88

BX Plus Series • with Integrated RTD 90

Retort Series • for Food Processing 92

Hydro-Therm Series 94

Econo-Therm Series 96

Options & Accessories 98-99

Dial Thermometers Design & Operation 100-103

Direct or Remote mounted thermometers
suited for a variety of temperature measuring Remote Mounted 31/2" Stainless Steel Case 104
requirements
Remote Mounted 41/2"- 81/2" Aluminum Case 106

Direct Mounted 41/2" & 6" Universal Angle 108

Direct Mounted 31/2" & 41/2" Adjustable Angle 110

Thermal System Selection 112

Temperature Ranges 114

Options & Accessories 115-117

80
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Table of Contents
TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION

TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION
Bimetal Thermometers Design & Operation 118-119
Direct Mounted thermometers
with all stainless steel construction Adjustable Angle 120
and hermetically sealed cases
are designed for use in Bottom Connect 122
demanding industrial
applications. Rear Connect 124
X-Series 126
Compact 128
Pocket 129
Bimetal Plus • with Integrated Sensor 130
Options & Accessories - Bimetals 133

Electronic Temperature Sensors Design & Operation 136-137

Sensors providing an
Electronic Signal
RTD & Thermocouple Sensors 138
to a Controller or Options & Accessories
Indicating Device.
143
Digital Temperature Indicator TRD20 Series 144
Digital Temperature Indicator TRD16 Series 146
Indicator Selector Switch TRS16 Series 148

Thermowells Design & Operation 150-151

Provide leak-tight protection for
applications where the process for Industrial Thermometers 152
media may be corrosive or
contained under pressure. for Econo Thermometers 153
for Dial Thermometers 154
for Bimetals, Thermocouples & RTDs 155

Options & Accessories 162

81
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Industrial Thermometers
DESIGN & OPERATION
Description
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

A thermometer is an instrument
designed to measure and indicate
the temperature of a specific
application or condition. An Industrial
Thermometer, commonly known as
a “Liquid-In-Glass” or Light-Powered
Digital Thermometer, is installed at the
point of measurement and is
usually read from that location.

Principles of Operation
Liquid-in-Glass
This thermometer is comprised of a
liquid-filled sealed glass tube and bulb,
which is affixed to the front of a metal
temperature scale, and extends into a
metal bulb chamber (stem). Flaked
graphite is used within the bulb chamber
to transfer the measured temperature to
the glass bulb. Temperature changes
cause the thermo-active fill to expand or
contract within the tube. This activity is
instantly visible in the tube against the
calibrated markings of the temperature
scale. For purposes of readability, the
tube is formed with a lens front to
create a magnified indicating column.

Light-Powered Digital
This thermometer is comprised of a
thermistor wire that extends into the
stem. Flaked graphite is used to transfer
the measured temperature to the
Liquid-in-Glass thermistor. Temperature change causes
a change in the output of the thermistor;
this output is translated through a
pre-programmed algorithm in the
microprocessor resulting in a digital
display of the temperature.
Selecting an Industrial
All Trerice Industrial Thermometers should be carefully selected to meet
the demands of the particular application. The information contained in
this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper
selection. Improper applications may cause failure of the instrument,
resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For applications
Light-Powered Digital where the process media may be corrosive or contained under pressure,
the use of a thermowell is required to prevent damage to the thermometer
and facilitate its removal from the process.

82
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Selecting an Industrial Thermometer (Liquid in-glass only)

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
Case
The case is durable, die cast aluminum with dark blue epoxy powder coating (Hydro-Therm is furnished with
Valox Case), and is available in scale sizes from 51/2 " through 12". Cases are available in adjustable angle,
rigid straight, and rigid 90° and 45° angle configurations. The adjustable angle case can be moved to any
viewing position for enhanced readability.

Stem
The stem is the sensitive portion of the instrument that is inserted into the process. Stems can be provided
in aluminum, brass, or stainless steel. Aluminum and brass stems include a brass coupling nut, while the
stainless steel stem includes a stainless steel coupling nut.
Aluminum stems must always be installed in a thermowell. Brass and stainless steel stems may be installed using a union
connection bushing in place of a thermowell. Trerice however, recommends the use of a thermowell to facilitate the removal
of the thermometer.

Window
Windows are supplied in clear acrylic (ranges through 300°F), or double-strength glass (standard on ranges
above 300°F).For direct sunlight applications, an ultraviolet protective plastic window is available. This window
helps prevent sunlight induced deterioration of thermoactive fills.

Accuracy
The accuracy of an industrial thermometer is expressed as a variance (plus or minus) in scale divisions.
All Trerice Industrial Thermometers are accurate to within one scale division of the temperature range.
Extreme ambient conditions above 120˚ F or below 30˚ F) may more than double the allowable accuracy tolerance of spirit filled
thermometers. This effect increases on thermometers operating at the high end of their scale, and decreases on thermometers
operating at the low end of their scale. Please consult factory for further information.

Range and Scale

A wide variety of ranges are available in Fahrenheit, Celsius, or dual scale; in temperatures from -40°F (-40°C)
through 500°F (260°C). Ranges are indelibly presented in black figures and markings upon an aluminum scale in
lengths from 51/2 " to 12". Space constraints, as well as measurement readability, should be considered when
selecting a scale size.

Thermoactive Fills
Trerice Industrial Thermometers are available with either of the following fill types:
• Spirit – A blue-colored, organic, spirit fill is standard. This proprietary fill is available for use with
temperatures of 500°F and below and can be supplied in alternate colors (consult factory).
• Mercury – Blue appearing mercury fill is only available for retort type thermometers as mercury
fill is specifically required.

Thermowells
For applications where the process media may be corrosive or contained under pressure, the use of a ther-
mowell is required to prevent damage to the thermometer and facilitate its removal from the process.
Thermowells are available in various lengths, connections, sizes, and materials. Please consult the
Thermowell Section of this catalog.
To ensure minimum response time, Trerice Heat Transfer Paste should be applied to the sensing portion of the stem
before installation into a thermowell. 1 oz. tube: Item No. 107-0001

83
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 SX9 Solar Therm
Light-Powered Digital Thermometer
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

Light Powered
No Batteries Required
Specifications
7" Case Size Model Scale Size
SX9 7" Adjustable Angle
Large LCD ˚F/˚C
Switchable Display
Case Cast Aluminum,
Min/Max Feature Blue epoxy finish
1% or 1˚F Accuracy Stem Industrial, Bimetal or Air-Duct
Cast Aluminum Case
Connection Industrial: 11/4 -18 UNEF-2A
Adjustable-Angle Stem coupling nut
Bimetal: 304 Stainless steel
The Trerice SX9 “Solar Therm” 1/4" diameter
is ideally suited for replacement Air-Duct: Reversible mounting
of existing mercury-in-glass flange with 3 bolt holes
thermometers in environmentally
conscious applications. It features Sensor Glass passivated thermistor
a rugged cast aluminum case,
Range -40 to 300˚ F (-40˚ to 150˚ C)
easy to read LCD display and an
adjustable-angle stem that is fully Display 9/16” LCD digits switchable
interchangeable with industrial between F/C. Push button
liquid-in-glass thermometers. Also min/max readings with reset
available is a bimetal type stem
Accuracy 1% or 1˚ F, whichever is greater
for applications where a digital
thermometer is preferred over Resolution 1/10˚
SX91403 shown existing analog bimetals. The
“Solar Therm” requires no Update Interval 10 seconds
external power and needs only Lux Rating 10 Lux (one foot candle)
10 lux of illumination to operate.
The unique Min/Max feature Ambient Operating Temperature
0 to 140˚ F (-20˚ to 60˚ C)
provides instant recall of minimum
and maximum temperatures over Ambient Temperature Error
a given period and is easily reset. None

• Optional features available: Humidity Maximum: 95 RH,

Please consult the Options non condensing
& Accessories Section for details.
Thermowell Approximate Shipping Weight
1.5 lbs [0.68 kg]
• For applications where the
process media may be corrosive
or contained under pressure,
the use of a thermowell is
required to prevent damage to
the thermometer and facilitate
its removal from the process.
(Refer to page 152)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: SX9 1 403 05

Model Stem (Style & Material) Stem (Length) Specific Range

SX9 403 31/2" (standard) 05 -40˚ to 300˚ F/C

1 Industrial (Aluminum)
7" Adjustable 406 6" (standard)
604 4" Bimetal
5 Bimetal (304 SS)
606 6" Bimetal
006 6" Air-Duct
9 Air-Duct (Aluminum)*
012 12" Air-Duct
* Not for use with Thermowell
84
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 SX9 Solar Therm
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
.87 BIMETAL STEM AIR-DUCT STEM AIR-DUCT STEM
2.27 [22] MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
[58]
.69 [18]
Ø.25
- 3 HOLES
.88 [22] Ø2.50
EQUALLY
[Ø64] SPACED
1/2 NPT

2.27 [58]

A
A

9.69
[246]
Ø1.50

0.25 [Ø38]
[6.4]
.63 [16]

1.72 [44] 1.25 [32]

HEX

T
EN
TM
US
ADJ
EM
ST
90°

Ø.44 [11]
90
°S
TE
M
(A) Stem Length Dimension AD
JU
ST
31/2" Industrial 3.50 [88.9] ME
NT
6" Industrial 6.00 [152.4]
4" Bimetal 4.00 [101.6]
6" Bimetal 6.00 [152.4]
6" Air-Duct 6.00 [152.4]
12" Air-Duct 12.00 [304.8]

Thermowells for SX9 Solar-Therm

for INDUSTRIAL STYLE Stems for BIMETAL STYLE Stems

Model Stem Insertion Material Model Stem Insertion Model

Length Length Length Length
3-4F2 31/2" 21/2" Brass 76-4G2 4" 21/2" Brass
3-4FA2 31/2" 1.7" with 1" lagging extension Brass 76-4GA2 4" 2” with 1" lagging extension Brass
3-4J2 6” 5" Brass 76-4J2 6" 41/2" Brass
3-4JD2 6" 21/2" with 21/2" lagging extension Brass 76-4JC2 6" 21/2" with 2" lagging extension Brass

85
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Adjustable Angle
7" • 9" • 12" Scale Sizes
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

7", 9", 12" Scale Specifications

± 1 Scale Division Models Scale Sizes
Accuracy
AX9 7"
Cast Aluminum Case BX9 9" Adjustable Angle
CX9 12"
Adjustable Angle Stem
Fill Type Spirit: Blue colored, organic

Case Cast Aluminum,

blue epoxy finish

Stem Aluminum, brass, 304 stainless

steel or air-duct style available

Connection Standard: 11/4 -18 UNEF-2A

coupling nut
Air-Duct: Reversible mounting
flange with 3 bolt holes

Window Acrylic on ranges to 300° F

Recognized globally as the
Glass on ranges over 300° F
Trerice “BX” Industrial
Thermometer, this is an Tube Lens front, magnifying type
instrument of extreme
accuracy and rugged Scale Aluminum, white background with
dependability. Available black graduations and markings
in scale sizes of 7" (AX9), Top Plate ABS
BX91403 shown 9" (BX9), & 12" (CX9), with
a durable cast aluminum Accuracy ±1 scale division
case, this universally Approximate Shipping Weight
adjustable, liquid-in-glass AX9: 1.5 lbs [0.68 kg]
thermometer is the most BX9: 1.6 lbs [0.73 kg]
widely specified instrument CX9: 2.0 lbs [0.91 kg]
of its kind.

• Optional features available:

Please consult the Options
& Accessories Section for details.
Thermowell
• For applications where the
process media may be corrosive
or contained under pressure,
the use of a thermowell is
required to prevent damage to
the thermometer and facilitate
its removal from the process.
(Refer to page 152)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: BX9 1 403 07

Model Stem (Material) Stem (Length) Specific Range

AX9 7" Adjustable 1 Aluminum (standard) 403 31/2" See Standard

BX9 9" Adjustable 2 Brass 406 6" Ranges
CX9 12" Adjustable 3 304 SS 408 8"
512 12"
006 6" Air-Duct
9 Air-Duct (Aluminum)*
012 12" Air-Duct
* Not for use with Thermowells
86
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Adjustable Angle
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

.87 [22] AIR-DUCT STEM AIR-DUCT STEM

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
2.27 [58] MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

.69 [18]
Ø.25- 3 HOLES
.88 [22] EQUALLY
Ø2.50
[Ø64] SPACED

2.27 [58]

AX = 9.69 [246]
BX = 11.69 [297]
CX = 14.69 [373]
Ø1.50
[Ø38]
.63 [16]

1.72 [44] 1.25 [32]

HEX

A
T
EN
TM
JUS
AD
EM
ST
90°

0.44 [11]
90°
ST
EM
(A) Stem Length Dimension AD
JU
ST
3 1/ 2" 3.50 [88.9] ME
NT
6" 6.00 [152.4]
8" 8.00 [203.2]
12" 12.00 [304.8]

Standard Ranges
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –40° to 110°F 17 –40° to 40°C 41 –40° to 110°F & –40° to 40°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
02 0° to 100°F 24 –18° to 38°C 42 0° to 100°F & –18° to 38°C 5° 1° 5° 0.5°
03 30° to 130°F 25 0° to 55°C 43 30° to 130°F & 0° to 55°C 5° 1° 5° 1°
04 0° to 160°F 26 –18° to 70°C 44 0° to 160°F & –18° to 70°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
06 30° to 180°F 27 0° to 83°C 46 30° to 180°F & 0° to 83°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
07 30° to 240°F 19 0° to 115°C 47 30° to 240°F & 0° to 115°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
08 30° to 300°F 20 0° to 150°C 48 30° to 300°F & 0° to 150°C 10° 2° 10° 2°
09 50° to 400°F 28 10° to 205°C 49 50° to 400°F & 10° to 205°C 25° 5° 10° 2°
15 50° to 500°F 31 10° to 260°C 55 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 25° 5° 10° 2°
Dual scale figure intervals may differ

87
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Rigid Stem
7" • 9" • 12" Scale Sizes
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

7", 9", 12" Scale Specifications

± 1 Scale Division Models Scale Sizes
Accuracy
AX1 7"
Cast Aluminum Case BX1 9" Rigid Straight
CX1 12"
Rigid Straight or Rigid 90˚
Angle Case AX2 7"
BX2 9" Rigid 90˚ Angle
CX2 12"

Fill Type Spirit: Blue colored, organic

Case Cast Aluminum,

blue epoxy finish

Stem Aluminum, brass,

304 stainless steel

Connection 11/4 -18 UNEF-2A coupling nut

The Rigid Stem Industrial Window Acrylic on ranges to 300° F

Glass on ranges over 300° F
Thermometer is offered
for applications where a Tube Lens front, magnifying type
nonadjustable case is
Scale Aluminum, white background with
preferred. The durable cast black graduations and markings
aluminum case is available
in rigid straight or rigid 90° Top Plate ABS

BX12403 shown angle forms. This thermometer Accuracy ±1 scale division

features accuracy, responsive-
Approximate Shipping Weight
ness and durability.
AX1: 1.2 lbs [0.55 kg]
BX1: 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
• Optional features available: CX1: 1.8 lbs [0.82 kg]
Please consult the Options AX2: 1.0 lbs [0.45 kg]
& Accessories Section for details.
BX2: 1.3 lbs [0.59 kg]
Thermowell CX2: 1.7 lbs [0.77 kg]
• For applications where the
process media may be corrosive
or contained under pressure,
the use of a thermowell is
required to prevent damage to
the thermometer and facilitate
its removal from the process.
(Refer to page 152)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: CX1 2 406 15

Model Stem (Material) Stem (Length) Specific Range

AX1 7" Rigid 1 Aluminum 403 31/2" See Standard

BX1 9” Straight 2 Brass 406 6" Ranges
CX1 12" 3 304 SS 408 8"
AX2 7” Rigid 512 12"
BX2 9" 90˚ Angle
CX2 12”

88
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Rigid Stem
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Rigid-Straight Rigid-90˚ Angle

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
.87
2.27 [58] [22]

AX = 8.90 [226] AX = 8.28 [210]

BX = 10.90 [277] BX = 10.28 [261]
CX = 13.90 [353] CX = 13.28 [337]

1.80
[46]

.81
[21]

1.25
[32] A
1.02 [26] 1.25
HEX [32]
HEX

(A) Stem Length Dimension

3 1/ 2" 3.50 [88.9]
Ø.44 [11]
6" 6.00 [152.4]
8" 8.00 [203.2]
12" 12.00 [304.8]

Standard Ranges
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –40° to 110°F 17 –40° to 40°C 41 –40° to 110°F & –40° to 40°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
02 0° to 100°F 24 –18° to 38°C 42 0° to 100°F & –18° to 38°C 5° 1° 5° 0.5°
03 30° to 130°F 25 0° to 55°C 43 30° to 130°F & 0° to 55°C 5° 1° 5° 1°
04 0° to 160°F 26 –18° to 70°C 44 0° to 160°F & –18° to 70°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
06 30° to 180°F 27 0° to 83°C 46 30° to 180°F & 0° to 83°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
07 30° to 240°F 19 0° to 115°C 47 30° to 240°F & 0° to 115°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
08 30° to 300°F 20 0° to 150°C 48 30° to 300°F & 0° to 150°C 10° 2° 10° 2°
09 50° to 400°F 28 10° to 205°C 49 50° to 400°F & 10° to 205°C 25° 5° 10° 2°
15 50° to 500°F 31 10° to 260°C 55 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 25° 5° 10° 2°
Dual scale figure intervals may differ

89
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 BX Plus
Industrial Thermometer with Integrated RTD
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

9" Scale
Specifications
± 1 Scale Division Accuracy
Models Scale Size
Local Indication/Remote Data
Acquisition BX9 9" Adjustable Angle
100Ω or 1000Ω RTD Sensors available BX1 9" Rigid Straight
BX2 9" Rigid 90˚ Angle

Fill Type Spirit: Blue colored, organic

Case Cast Aluminum,

blue epoxy finish

Stem Aluminum, Brass, or

304 Stainless Steel

Process Connection
11/4 -18 UNEF-2A coupling nut

Electrical Connection
Molded cordset with coupling nut
and six meter cable

Window Acrylic on ranges to 300° F

Glass on ranges over 300° F

Tube Lens front, magnifying type

The Trerice BX-Plus has all the Scale Aluminum, white background with
black graduations and markings
standard features of the original
BX Series Industrial Thermometer, Top Plate Stainless Steel
but with a “Plus”. The “Plus” being
an internally mounted 100Ω or Sensor
1000Ω RTD, allowing for remote International grade thin film
temperature monitoring, while platinum, 3-wire, 100Ω or
simultaneously providing local 1000Ω RTD
indication. This patented* dual α = 0.00385Ω/Ω/°C
sensor design eliminates the need
for additional instrumentation or Accuracy Thermometer: ±1 scale division
connections when designing a RTD: ±3˚C or 0.6% of temperature
system to include both mechanical
and electronic temperature sensing. Approximate Shipping Weight
BX9: 1.9 lbs [0.86 kg]
*U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,664,885 and 5,769,542.
BX1: 1.7 lbs [0.77 kg]
• Optional features available: BX2: 1.6 lbs [0.73 kg]
Please consult the Options
& Accessories Section for details.

• These instruments are specifically

designed for use with Trerice Digital
Indicators (refer to the Electronic
Temperature Sensor Section) and
Electronic Controllers (refer to the
Control Section).

MODEL BX9240307RTC HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: BX9 1 403 07 RTC

Model Stem Material Stem (Length) Specific Range Sensor Type

BX9 9" Adjustable 1 Aluminum 403 31/2" See RTC 100Ω RTD
BX1 9" Straight (standard) 406 6" Standard RTM 1000Ω RTD
BX2 9" 90˚ Angle 2 Brass 408 8" Ranges
3 304 SS 512 12"

90
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 All dimensions are nominal.
BX Plus
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Adjustable-Angle Rigid-Straight Rigid-90˚ Angle

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
RTD CONNECTOR .87
2.27 .58 [15]
2.27 [22]
.87 [58]
[58] [22]

.58 .58
[15] [15]

10.28
10.90 [261]
11.69
[277]
[297]

1.80
[46]

1.25
[32]
.81 A
HEX 1.25
1.25 [21] [32]
1.72 [44] [32] HEX
HEX 1.02
[26] A

Ø.44
[11]

Ø.44
[11]

BROWN

T
EN
TM BLUE
JUS
AD RTD
EM
˚ ST
90
(A) Stem Length Dimension
90˚
ST
EM 3 1/ 2" 3.50 [88.9]
AD
JU
ST BLACK (+) 6" 6.00 [152.4]
ME
NT 8" 8.00 [203.2]
INTERNAL WIRING
12" 12.00 [304.8]

Standard Ranges
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –40° to 110°F 17 –40° to 40°C 41 –40° to 110°F & –40° to 40°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
02 0° to 100°F 24 –18° to 38°C 42 0° to 100°F & –18° to 38°C 5° 1° 5° 0.5°
03 30° to 130°F 25 0° to 55°C 43 30° to 130°F & 0° to 55°C 5° 1° 5° 1°
04 0° to 160°F 26 –18° to 70°C 44 0° to 160°F & –18° to 70°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
06 30° to 180°F 27 0° to 83°C 46 30° to 180°F & 0° to 83°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
07 30° to 240°F 19 0° to 115°C 47 30° to 240°F & 0° to 115°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
08 30° to 300°F 20 0° to 150°C 48 30° to 300°F & 0° to 150°C 10° 2° 10° 2°
09 50° to 400°F 28 10° to 205°C 49 50° to 400°F & 10° to 205°C 25° 5° 10° 2°
15 50° to 500°F 31 10° to 260°C 55 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 25° 5° 10° 2°
Dual scale figure intervals may differ

91
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Retort
for Food Processing
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

9" Scale Size Specifications

± 1 Scale Division Accuracy Models Scale Size
Cast Aluminum Case BX1 9" Rigid Straight
Rigid Straight Case BX2 9" Rigid 90˚ Angle
Rigid 45˚ Angle Case BX5 9" Rigid 45˚ Angle
Rigid 90˚ Angle Case

Fill Type Mercury: Blue appearing

Case Cast Aluminum,

blue epoxy finish

Stem One-piece,
304 stainless steel

Process Connection
11/4 -18 UNEF-2A coupling nut
(A union connection bushing is
required for installation; please
consult page 99 of the Options
The Trerice Retort Industrial and Accessories section.)
Thermometer is the instrument Window Acrylic on ranges to 300° F
of choice within the food Glass on ranges over 300° F
processing and canning
Tube Lens Front,
industries. The scale is blue appearing mercury
configured to indicate the
BX13403R21 shown temperature and corresponding Scale Aluminum, white background with
black graduations and markings
pressure of steam. This
thermometer is furnished Top Plate ABS
with a rigid, stainless steel Accuracy ±1 scale division
stem, in straight or angle forms,
and features a 9" scale and Approximate Shipping Weight
rugged cast aluminum case. BX1: 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
BX2: 1.3 lbs [0.59 kg]
BX5: 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
• Optional features available:
Please consult Options &
Accessories Section for details.

• This thermometer includes a

one-piece stainless steel stem
and is designed to be directly
installed using a union connection
bushing (page 99); therefore, use
of a thermowell is not required.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: BX1 3 403 R21

Model Stem (Material) Stem (Length) Specific Range

BX1 Straight 3 304 SS 403 31/2" See Standard

BX2 90˚ Angle Ranges
BX5 45˚ Angle

92
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Retort
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
Rigid-Straight Rigid-90˚ Angle Rigid-45˚ Angle

2.27 .87
[58] [22]

10.90 10.28 10.28

[277] [261] [261]

1.80
[46]
.98
[25.0]

1.25 3.50 3.50

[32] [88.9] [88.9]
HEX
.81
.72
[21]
1.25 [18]
1.02 [32] 45°
[26] 3.50 HEX
[88.9]
1.25
[32]
HEX

Ø.44
[11]

Standard Ranges
Fahrenheit & psi Scale Fahrenheit psi
Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
R21 170° to 270°F & 0 to 25 psi 10°F 1°F 5 psi 1 psi
R22 200° to 400°F & 0 to 220 psi 20°F 2°F Progressive*

Fahrenheit & Celsius Scale Fahrenheit Celsius

Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
R24 170° to 270°F & 80° to 130°C 10°F 1°F 5°C 1°C
R23 200° to 400°F & 95° to 205°C 20°F 2°F 105°C 1°C

Celsius & kg/cm Scale 2

Celsius kg/cm2
Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
R45 80° to 135°C & 0 to 2.1 kg/cm2 5°C 0.5°C 0.5 kg/cm2 0.1 kg/cm2
*Progressive scale: 0-40 (10 psi intervals); 40-120 psi (20 psi intervals), 120 to 180 psi (30 psi intervals), 180 to 220 psi (40 psi interval).

93
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Hydro-Therm
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

51/2" Scale Size Specifications

± 2% Accuracy Models Scale Size
Valox Case HT30 51/2" Rigid Straight
1/2 NPT Brass Thermowell HT31 51/2" Rigid 90˚ Angle
included

Fill Type Spirit: Blue colored, organic

Case Valox

Stem Brass

Connection 1/2 NPT brass thermowell

(included)

Window Acrylic

Tube Lens front, magnifying type

Scale Aluminum, white background with

black graduations and markings

Top Plate ABS

Accuracy ±2%
The NEW Trerice
HT30 shown Hydro-Therm is the ideal Approximate Shipping Weight
instrument for both hot and 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
chilled water hydronic
applications. The blue,
organic “spirit” fill is easily
read without the the
environmental concerns
of mercury. The sturdy Valox
case is available in rigid
straight or rigid 90˚angle
configurations. The 2" stem
makes this the perfect
instrument for smaller pipeline
and other such applications.
The 1/2 NPT brass thermowell
is included.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: HT30 47

Model Specific Range

HT30 Straight 41 -40˚ to 110˚ F/C

HT31 90˚Angle 47 30˚ to 240˚ F/C

HT31 shown

94
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Hydro-Therm
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
HT30 HT31
1.50
[38]

6.45 6.45
5.60 [164] [164]
[142]

1/2 NPT

2.00 .63 [15]

[50] HEX

.63 [15]
2.00
HEX
[50]
1/2 NPT

Note: Shown with included thermowell.

Standard Ranges
Dual Scale Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
41 -40° to 110°F & -40° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
47 30° to 240°F & 0° to 120°C 20° 2° 20° 2°

95
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Econo-Therm
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

51/2" Scale Size Specifications

± 1 Scale Division
Models Scale Size
Accuracy
4350 51/2" Rigid Straight
Cast Aluminum Case 4352 51/2" Rigid 90˚ Angle
Rigid Straight or
Rigid 90˚Angle Case
Fill Type Spirit: Blue colored, organic

Case Cast aluminum,

blue epoxy finish

Stem Aluminum, brass or

air-duct style

Connection Use of thermowell required

(must be ordered separately)
Air-duct stem has mounting
flange with 3 bolt holes

Window Polycarbonate frame front

The Trerice Econo Thermometer Tube Lens front, magnifying type

provides accuracy and durability
at an economical price. This Scale Aluminum, white background with
black graduations and markings
liquid-in-glass thermometer has a
durable cast aluminum case and Accuracy ±1 scale division
a polycarbonate frame front and Approximate Shipping Weight
4352 shown window. Rigid straight and rigid 0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]
90° angle cases are available.

• Optional features available:

Please consult the Options &
Accessories Section for details.

• Trerice Econo Thermometers

(air-duct stem excluded) have
no external mounting hardware,
and as such, require the use
of a thermowell, which is
attached to the stem via a set
screw. The thermowell must be
ordered separately – please
refer to page 153 of the
Thermowell Section.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 4350 1 02 07

Model Stem (Material) Stem (Length) Specific Range

4350 Straight 1 Aluminum* 02 2" (Aluminum Stem only) See Standard

4352 90˚ Angle 2 Brass 04 4" (Brass Stem only) Ranges
9 Air-Duct ** 06 6"
12 12" (Air-Duct Stem)

*Use of thermowell required (must be ordered separately-refer to page 153).

**Model 4352 only

96
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Econo-Therm
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
AIR-DUCT STEM
1.33 .82
[34] [21]

Ø.50
[13]
6.69
[170]
Ø.25
- 3 HOLES
Ø2.50 EQUALLY
[Ø64] SPACED

1.42
[36] U

.88 [22]
1.62
HEX
[41]

Ø1.50
[Ø38]
U
AIR-DUCT STEM
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

Ø.53
[14]

Note: Shown with required thermowell (must be ordered separately. Refer to page 153.)

U Length Dimension
2" (Aluminum) 1.31 [33.3]
4" (Brass) 3.25 [82.6]
6" (Air-Duct) 6.00 [152.4]
12" (Air-Duct) 12.00 [304.8]
Standard Ranges
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –40° to 110°F 17 –40° to 40°C 41 –40° to 110°F & –40° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
03 30° to 130°F 25 0° to 55°C 43 30° to 130°F & 0° to 55°C 10° 1° 5° 1°
06 30° to 180°F 27 0° to 83°C 46 30° to 180°F & 0° to 83°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
07 30° to 240°F 19 0° to 115°C 47 30° to 240°F & 0° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
08 30° to 300°F 20 0° to 150°C 48 30° to 300°F & 0° to 150°C 30° 5° 10° 2°
09 50° to 400°F 28 10° to 205°C 49 50° to 400°F & 10° to 205°C 50° 5° 20° 2°
13 200° to 500°F 32 93° to 260°C 53 200° to 500°F & 93° to 260°C 25° 5° 10° 2°
Dual scale figure intervals may differ.

97
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
Industrial Thermometers
INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS

Stem Materials
Most Trerice Industrial Thermometers are furnished standard with an aluminum stem. Brass and 304
stainless steel stems are optionally available. An air-duct stem, provided with a 3" O.D. reversible aluminum
flange (mounted using three sheet metal screws) and perforated aluminum guard, will deliver maximum
sensitivity in air ducts. Air-duct stems are available on Adjustable Angle Industrial Thermometers and Econo
Thermometers. Please consult the “How to Order” section of the appropriate product data page.

Integrated RTD “Plus” Option (RTC/RTM)

Most Trerice Industrial Thermometers can be ordered with a “Plus.” The “Plus” being an internally mounted
100Ω or 1000Ω RTD, allowing for remote temperature monitoring, while simultaneously providing local
indication. This patented* dual sensor design eliminates the need for additional instrumentation when
designing a system to include both mechanical and electronic temperature sensing. Please order using
option codes RTC (100Ω RTD) or RTM (1000Ω RTD).
*U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,664,885 and 5,769,542.

Specifications
Sensor Accuracy Electrical Connection Maximum
Temperature
International grade ±0.3°C or 0.6% Molded cordset with 500°F (260°C)
thin film platinum, of temperature coupling nut and six
3-wire 100Ω or meter cable
1000Ω RTD
α = 0.00385Ω/Ω/°C

Cases (BPC/CPC)
Industrial Thermometers can be provided with brass or chrome plated cases in 9" (BX) scale size.
Please order using option codes BPC (brass plated case) or CPC (chrome plated case).

Windows (GLW/UVW)
Windows are furnished in acrylic or double strength glass. For direct sunlight applications, an ultra-violet
protective plastic window is available. This window helps prevent sunlight induced deterioration of
thermoactive fill. Please consult the table below for available window options.

Window Material Temperature Range

Up to 300°F (150°C) Over 300°F (150°C)
Acrylic Standard N/A
Double Strength Glass GLW Standard
UV Protective Plastic UVW N/A

98
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
Industrial Thermometers

INDUSTRIAL THERMOMETERS
Weatherproofed Cases (WPC)
Trerice Industrial and Econo Thermometers may be sealed for outdoor use, or for use in
applications where sprays and washes may come in contact with the thermometer. Please
order using option code WPC (weatherproofed case).

Union Connection Bushings

Trerice Industrial Thermometers with brass or 304 stainless steel stems may
be installed using a union connection bushing in place of a thermowell.
Please consult the table below for bushing item numbers.

Thermometers with an aluminum stem must always be installed

in a thermowell to protect the thermometer stem.

Union Connection Bushings

Material With 2 1/2”

Connection Without Extension Neck Extension Neck
Brass 3/4 NPT 703-05D6 082-0013
Brass 1 NPT 703-06D6 082-0096
304 Stainless Steel 3/4 NPT 703-05D6.2 082-0013.2
304 Stainless Steel 1 NPT 703-06D6.2 082-0096.2

How to Order
Specify the Optional Feature Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: BX1 1 403 07 WPC

99
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Dial Thermometers
DESIGN & OPERATION
Description
DIAL THERMOMETERS

A thermometer is an instrument designed to measure and indicate the temperature of a

specific application or condition. A Dial Thermometer (filled system thermometer) can
either be read at the point of measurement or from a remote location using a desired
length of capillary tubing.

‘O’ RING GASKET

CASE
POINTER

WINDOW

BOURDON TUBE

DIAL FACE

MOVEMENT

ADJUSTABLE UNION TYPE

SENSING BULB ASSEMBLY
CAPILLARY
TUBING

SENSING BULB

Principles of Operation
Trerice Dial Thermometers operate using a filled thermal system. This system consists of capillary
tubing and a sensing bulb, which are filled with an expandable chemical compound. The fill is
contained within the sealed thermal system, and is affected (expands or contracts) by temperature
changes at the sensing bulb. As temperature increases, expanding fill travels via the capillary tube
system to the bourdon tube within the instrument’s case. The expansion causes the bourdon tube to
flex and the resulting motion is transmitted as a temperature measurement through a mechanical
movement to the pointer and dialface.

100
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Selecting a Dial Thermometer

DIAL THERMOMETERS
All Trerice Filled System Dial Thermometers should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application.
The information contained in this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper selection. Improper
application may cause failure of the instrument, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For applications
where the process media may be corrosive or contained under pressure, the use of a thermowell is required to prevent
damage to the thermometer and facilitate its removal from the process.

Thermal System Actuation

Trerice Dial Thermometers are available with either Vapor or Liquid actuation fills.

Vapor Actuation
Trerice Vapor Actuated Dial Thermometers are the industry standard and are noted for their economical
cost and excellent speed of response. The physical principles of vapor actuation require that the dialface be
printed with a nonlinear, progressively graduated temperature scale. These instruments are available for direct
mounting, or for remote mounting with capillary lengths up to 100 feet. Sensing bulb length is dependent
upon the capillary length selected (a longer capillary length will require a longer sensing bulb length). Vapor
Dial Thermometers are available in temperature ranges up to 450°F (232°C). Note: Erratic performance may
be encountered if the measured process temperature rapidly crosses ambient temperature.

CAUTION: Vapor Dial Thermometers should be installed with the case, capillary tubing, and sensing bulb located at a similar
elevation to avoid measurement inaccuracies. If the sensing bulb must be installed at a different elevation than the case,
please advise the factory when ordering so that the instrument can be calibrated accordingly.

Liquid Actuation
Trerice Liquid Actuated Dial Thermometers have a good response time and are furnished with a temperature
scale of linear graduation. These instruments are available for direct mounting, or for remote mounting with
capillary lengths up to 20 feet. Sensing bulb length is consistent and not affected by capillary length or
temperature range. Liquid Dial Thermometers are available in temperature ranges up to 300°F (150°C), and
are ideally suited for measuring process temperatures which routinely cross ambient. However, care should
be taken to insure against the exposure of the capillary to temperatures above or below the factory calibration
temperature of 75°F (24°C).

CAUTION: Temperature indication error will be introduced whenever the capillary tubing is exposed to ambient
temperatures above or below 75°F. The following formula MUST be considered when specifying liquid actuation:
Where: S = thermometer range span in °F
L = capillary length in feet
T = capillary temperature variation from 75°F
Error = 0.000082 x S x L x T
Example: S = 210 (30 to 240°F)
L = 20
T = 10 (85°F)
Error = 0.000082 x 210 x 20 x 10 = 3.4°

Vapor and Liquid Actuated Dial Faces

The physical principles of vapor actuation require that the dialface for vapor dial thermometers be printed with
a non-linear progressively graduated temperature scale. Liquid actuated dial thermometers are furnished with
linear dialfaces. Please see the Thermal System Selection section of our online catalog for sample vapor and
liquid actuated dialfaces.

101
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Dial Thermometers
DESIGN & OPERATION
Thermal System Actuation Comparison
DIAL THERMOMETERS

Consideration Vapor Actuation Liquid Actuation

Price Economical Premium
Response Time Excellent Good
Dialface Non-linear Linear
Maximum Temperature Range 450°F (232°C) 300°F (149°C)
Cross Ambient Applications Not recommended Recommended
Available Thermal Systems All (except averaging) All
Bulb Size Dependent on capillary length Consistent
Maximum Capillary Length 100 feet 20 feet
Accuracy +1 scale division +1 scale division

Case
Cases are made from stainless steel or cast aluminum, in sizes from 31/2" through 81/2". Trerice Dial
Thermometers can be directly mounted, or remotely mounted using capillary tubing, so that the
measurement can be read from a convenient viewing location. Direct mounted thermometers are
available with adjustable angle or universal angle connections, while remote mounted thermometers
can be ordered for almost any surface or panel mounting requirement.

Window and Ring

The window is normally held in place by a ring or snapped directly to the case of the
thermometer. Plastic and clear glass are typical window materials. Ring styles include
threaded, friction and hinged, depending upon the case type chosen.

Accuracy
The accuracy of a dial thermometer is expressed as a variance (plus or minus) in scale divisions.
All Trerice Dial Thermometers are accurate to within one scale division of the measured range.
Ambient temperature conditions and elevation variances may affect measurement accuracy.

102
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Measurement Range and Dial

DIAL THERMOMETERS
Trerice Dial Thermometers are available in Fahrenheit, Celsius, and Dual Scale temperature ranges
from -40°F (-40°C) through 450° (-230°C). Ranges are indelibly presented in black figures and
markings upon a white finished aluminum dialface. The physical principles of vapor actuation
require the dialface to have a non-linear, progressively graduated temperature scale; therefore, the
temperature range should be selected so that the intended measuring point falls within the upper
two-thirds of the range scale. Liquid Actuated Dial Thermometers have temperature scales of linear
graduation, thus, the intended measuring point should fall within the middle third of the range scale.

Thermal System
• Bulb – Trerice Dial Thermometers are furnished with copper, brass or stainless steel
sensing bulbs, depending upon the system actuation and the requirements of the
application. A fixed union connection is standard, with an adjustable union connection
optionally available. The fixed union connection is furnished with a standard sensing bulb
length of 13/4" to 55/8", depending upon the actuation and capillary length. The adjustable
union connection may be adjusted over a 24-inch length prior to initial insertion. This allows
the sensing bulb to be installed at any desired insertion length (U-length). Plain and Teflon
covered bulbs are available for open tank applications. Other bulb styles, including
averaging and air-sensing, can be furnished on some models. Please see the Dial
Thermometer Sensing Bulb Section for complete bulb specifications.
• Capillary – Trerice Dial Thermometers can be specified with various capillary materials
and special covers to meet the requirements of any application.

Thermowells
For applications where the process media may be corrosive or contained under pressure, the use
of a Trerice Thermowell is required to prevent damage to the thermometer and facilitate its removal
from the process. Thermowells are available in various lengths, connections, sizes, and
materials. Please consult page 154 of the Thermowell Section.
To ensure minimum response time, Trerice Heat Transfer Paste should be applied to the sensing portion
of the bulb before installation into a thermowell. 1 oz. tube: Item No. 107-0001

103
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Remote Mounted Dial Thermometer
3 1/2" Stainless Steel Case

31/2" Dial Size Specifications

DIAL THERMOMETERS

± 1 Scale Division Models Dial Size Case Styles

Accuracy
Stainless Steel Case
80025 3 1/2" Adjustable Angle,
with mounting
Vapor or Liquid bracket
Actuated

80035 3 1/2" Surface Mounted,

back flanged,
with bottom outlet

80036 3 1/2" Surface Mounted,

back flanged
with back outlet

80040 3 1/2" Flush Mounted,

front flanged,
with back outlet

80041 3 1/2" Flush Mounted,

u-clamp
with back outlet

V80025 shown Movement Brass

Case Material
Stainless Steel

Window Acrylic, snap-in with

The Trerice Remote Mounted Dial • Optional features available: Nitrile O-ring seal
Thermometer is used extensively Please consult the Optional
Features Section for details. Adjustable, black finish
in the building and construction Pointer
industry and is the preferred Thermowell
Dialface Aluminum, white background with
temperature instrument for OEMs • For applications where the
process media may be corrosive black graduations and markings
worldwide. The stainless steel case is or contained under pressure,
available in many styles for panel the use of a thermowell is Accuracy ±1 scale division
and surface mounting. This instrument required to prevent damage
Approximate Shipping Weight
to the thermometer and facilitate
has a 31/2" dial size and is available its removal from the process. 1.3 lbs [0.59 kg]
with either vapor or liquid actuation.
(Refer to page 154)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: V 80035 110 B01 05

Actuation Model Range Code Thermal System Capillary Length*

V Vapor 80025 See Standard See Thermal 05 5 Feet
L Liquid 80035 Ranges Selection 10 10 Feet
80036 (pages 112-113) 15 15 Feet
80040 20 20 Feet
80041
* Other Capillary lengths available: Specify in feet. Vapor: 100 Feet Max
Liquid: 20 Feet Max

104
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

80025 Adjustable Angle 80035 & 80036 Surface 80040 Flush Mounted 80041 Flush Mounted
with mounting bracket Mounted back flanged front flanged U-clamp

DIAL THERMOMETERS
J
.25
J [6.4]
J MAX.
P
P
J

C M A C A M A M

2.22
2.93 [56.4]
[74.5]

F F

Mounting Dimensions for Drilling Dimensions for: ØL 3 HOLES EQUALLY

80025 80035 SPACED
80036
80040
80041
.75
[19.1] K N
1.50
[38.1]

Ø.22
[5.6]
2 HOLES

Ø1.00 [25.4] (80036 ONLY)

Model A C F J K L M N P
80025 N/A 3.67 [93.2] 0.32 [8.2] 1.33 [33.9] N/A N/A 3.51 [89.2] N/A N/A
80035 4.91 [124.7] 3.67 [93.2] 0.43 [11.0] 1.44 [36.6] 4.50 [114.3] 0.25 [6.4] N/A N/A N/A
80036 4.91 [124.7] 3.67 [93.2] N/A 1.44 [36.6] 4.50 [114.3] 0.25 [6.4] N/A N/A N/A
80040 4.84 [122.9] N/A N/A 1.33 [33.6] 4.44 [112.8] 0.25 [6.4] 3.51 [89.2] 3.62 [92.0] 0.17 [4.3]
80041 4.31 [109.5] N/A N/A 1.33 [33.8] N/A N/A 3.51 [89.2] 3.62 [92.0] 0.17 [4.3]

Standard Ranges (Dual Scale includes both Fahrenheit & Celsius)

Vapor Actuated Liquid Actuated
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale
Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code
030 -40° to 150°F 430 -40° to 65°C 230 020 -40° to 120°F 420 -40° to 50°C 220
040 -20° to 100°F 440 -30° to 40°C 240 050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250
050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250 060 0° to 160°F 460 -20° to 70°C 260
065 0° to 160°F 465 -20° to 70°C 265 100 30° to 180°F 495 0° to 80°C 300
100 30° to 180°F 500 0° to 85°C 300 110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310
110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310 130 50° to 300°F 530 10° to 150°C 330
120 30° to 300°F 520 0° to 150°C 320
145 100° to 350°F 545 40° to 180°C 345
160 200° to 450°F 560 90° to 230°C 360

105
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Remote Mounted Dial Thermometer
4 1/2" • 6" • 8 1/2" Cast Aluminum Case
41/2", 6", 81/2" Specifications
Dial Sizes
Models Dial Sizes Case Styles
DIAL THERMOMETERS

± 1 Scale Division
Accuracy 80341 41/2" Surface Mounted,
Cast Aluminum Case 80361 6" back flanged,
80381 81/2" with bottom outlet
Vapor or
Liquid Actuated

80342 41/2" Surface Mounted,

80362 6" back flanged,
80382 81/2" with back outlet

80345 41/2" Flush Mounted,

80365 6" hinged ring,
with back outlet

Movement Brass

Case Material
Cast Aluminum, black finish

Window Clear glass

Ring Friction type, 304 stainless steel

(hinged type, black finished
V80341 shown aluminum; 80345, 80365 only)

Pointer Adjustable, black finish

This Trerice Remote-Mounted Dial • Optional features available:
Please consult the Optional Dialface Aluminum, white background with
Thermometer is furnished with a Features Section for details. black graduations and markings
rugged cast aluminum case in 41/2",
6" and 81/2" dial sizes. This Thermowell Accuracy ±1 scale division
instrument is designed for a wide • For applications where the
process media may be corrosive Approximate Shipping Weight
variety of industrial applications, or contained under pressure, 41/2" Dial: 2.4 lbs [1.09 kg]
and is available with vapor or liquid the use of a thermowell is
6" Dial: 3.0 lbs [1.36 kg]
required to prevent damage
actuation. to the thermometer and facilitate 81/2" Dial: 4.0 lbs [1.82 kg]
its removal from the process.
(Refer to page 154)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: V 80341 050 B02 20

Actuation Model Range Code Thermal System Capillary Length*

V Vapor 80341 41/2" See Standard See Thermal 05 5 Feet

L Liquid 80361 6" Ranges System 10 10 Feet
80381 81/2" Selection 15 15 Feet
(pages 112-113) 20 20 Feet
80342 41/2"
80362 6"
80382 81/2"

80345 41/2"
80365 6"

* Other Capillary lengths available: Specify in feet. Vapor: 100 Feet Max
Liquid: 20 Feet Max

106
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Surface Mount Back Flange Case Models 80341, 80361, 80381 (bottom outlet), Models 80342, 80362, 80382 (back outlet)

A ØD 3 HOLES MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

J

DIAL THERMOMETERS
EQUALLY
SPACED .06
[1.5]

120° 120°

K K
C

G G
B

Ø1.00
ØL
[25.4]
H
F

Dial Size A B C D F G H J K L
4 1/2" 5.88 [149.7] 2.39 [60.7] 4.79 [121.7] 0.22 [5.6] 0.94 [23.8] 1.63 [41.3] 1.41 [35.7] 2.06 [52.4] 5.38 [136.5] 0.25 [6.4]
6" 7.62 [193.6] 3.14 [79.8] 6.29 [159.8] 0.28 [7.1] 0.94 [23.8] 1.63 [41.3] 1.41 [35.7] 2.09 [53.0] 7.00 [177.8] 0.31 [7.9]
8 1/2" 10.25 [260.4] 4.38 [111.1] 8.80 [223.4] 0.28 [7.1] 0.97 [24.6] 1.63 [41.3] 1.41 [35.7] 2.24 [56.8] 9.63 [244.5] 0.31 [7.9]

Flush Mount Hinged Ring Case Models 80345 & 80365

J PANEL CUTOUT
P

120° 120°

N K

C M

ØL

Dial Size C G H J K L M N P
41/2" 6.10 [155.0] 1.62 [41.1] 1.31 [33.4] 1.97 [50.0] 5.38 [136.7] 0.22 [5.6] 4.78 [121.4] 4.94 [125.5] 0.34 [8.6]
6" 7.69 [195.3] 1.62 [41.1] 1.31 [33.4] 1.97 [50.0] 7.00 [177.8] 0.28 [7.1] 6.22 [158.0] 6.44 [163.5] 0.34 [8.6]

Standard Ranges (Dual Scale includes both Fahrenheit & Celsius)

Vapor Actuated Liquid Actuated
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale
Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code
030 -40° to 150°F 430 -40° to 65°C 230 020 -40° to 120°F 420 -40° to 50°C 220
040 -20° to 100°F 440 -30° to 40°C 240 050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250
050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250 060 0° to 160°F 460 -20° to 70°C 260
065 0° to 160°F 465 -20° to 70°C 265 100 30° to 180°F 495 0° to 80°C 300
100 30° to 180°F 500 0° to 85°C 300 110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310
110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310 130 50° to 300°F 530 10° to 150°C 330
120 30° to 300°F 520 0° to 150°C 320
145 100° to 350°F 545 40° to 180°C 345
160 200° to 450°F 560 90° to 230°C 360

107
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Direct Mounted Dial Thermometer
4 1/2" & 6" Cast Aluminum Case • Universal Angle

41/2", 6" Dial Sizes Specifications

± 1 Scale Division
DIAL THERMOMETERS

Accuracy Models Dial Sizes Case Style

Cast Aluminum Case 80742 41/2" Universal Angle

80762 6"
Vapor or Liquid
Actuated

Movement Brass

Case Material
Cast Aluminum, black finish

Window Clear glass

Ring Friction type, stainless steel

Pointer Adjustable, black finish

Dialface Aluminum, white background with

black graduations and markings

Accuracy ±1 scale division

Approximate Shipping Weight

V80742 shown 80742: 2.0 lbs [0.91 kg]
80762: 2.4 lbs [1.09 kg]

The Trerice Universal Angle Dial • Optional features available:

Please consult the Optional
Thermometer is available in 41/2" Features Section for details.
and 6" dial sizes with a rugged cast
Thermowell
aluminum case. After the sensing bulb
• For applications where the
has been installed, the case may be process media may be corrosive
adjusted 180° front to back, and or contained under pressure,
the use of a thermowell is
rotated 360° for maximum readability. required to prevent damage
This instrument is available with vapor to the thermometer and facilitate
its removal from the process.
or liquid actuation.
(Refer to page 154)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: L 80742 110 B35

Actuation Model Range Code Thermal System

V Vapor 80742 See Standard See Thermal
L Liquid 80762 Ranges System Selection
(pages 112-113)

108
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

DIAL THERMOMETERS
2.01
[50.9]

90°

(Dial Size) 41/2”

4.81 [122.2]
(Dial Size) 6”
6.31 [160.3]

90°

.63 4.07
[16.0] [103.5]

Standard Ranges (Dual Scale includes both Fahrenheit & Celsius)

Vapor Actuated Liquid Actuated
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale
Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code
030 -40° to 150°F 430 -40° to 65°C 230 020 -40° to 120°F 420 -40° to 50°C 220
040 -20° to 100°F 440 -30° to 40°C 240 050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250
050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250 060 0° to 160°F 460 -20° to 70°C 260
065 0° to 160°F 465 -20° to 70°C 265 100 30° to 180°F 495 0° to 80°C 300
100 30° to 180°F 500 0° to 85°C 300 110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310
110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310 130 50° to 300°F 530 10° to 150°C 330
120 30° to 300°F 520 0° to 150°C 320
145 100° to 350°F 545 40° to 180°C 345
160 200° to 450°F 560 90° to 230°C 360

109
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Direct Mounted Dial Thermometer
3 1/2" Stainless Steel Case & 4 1/2" Cast Aluminum Case • Adjustable Angle

31/2", 41/2" Dial Sizes Specifications

Models Dial Sizes Case Styles
DIAL THERMOMETERS

± 1 Scale Division
Accuracy
80030 31/2" Adjustable Angle
Stainless Steel or
Cast Aluminum Case

Vapor or Liquid Actuated

80445 41/2" Adjustable Angle

(Vapor Only)

Movement Brass

Case Material
80030: Stainless steel
80445: Cast aluminum, black finish

Window
80030: Acrylic, snap-in with Nitrile
O-ring seal
80445: Clear glass

Ring 80030: None

V80445 shown 80445: Friction-type, stainless steel

Pointer Adjustable, black finish

Dialface Aluminum, white background with

The Trerice Adjustable Angle Dial • Optional features available: black graduations and markings
Thermometer is intended for use Please consult the Optional
Features Section for details.
within the construction and HVAC Accuracy ±1 scale division
industries. Once the sensing bulb has Thermowell
Approximate Shipping Weight
been installed, the angle of the dial- • For applications where the
face may be adjusted forward and
process media may be corrosive 80030: 1.3 lbs [0.59 kg]
or contained under pressure,
80445: 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
backward to provide maximum the use of a thermowell is
readability. This instrument is required to prevent damage
to the thermometer and facilitate
available in 31/2" and 41/2" dial its removal from the process.
sizes with a flangeless, stainless (Refer to page 154)
steel or cast aluminum case.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: V 80445 110 B31

Actuation Model Specific Range Thermal System

V Vapor 80030 See Standard See Thermal
L Liquid 80445 (vapor only) Ranges System Selection
(pages 112-113)

110
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

80030

DIAL THERMOMETERS
1.29
[32.7]

2.26 3.67
[57.3] [93.1]

1.93
[48.9]
200°
.96
[24.5]

200° ADJUSTMENT
ABOUT THIS POINT

80445 1.28
[32.5]

Ø4.98
[126.5]
2.93
[74.5]

1.92
[48.9] 200°

82
[20.8]
200° ADJUSTMENT
ABOUT THIS POINT

Standard Ranges (Dual Scale includes both Fahrenheit & Celsius)

Vapor Actuated Liquid Actuated
Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale
Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code Range Code Range Range Code Range Range Code
030 -40° to 150°F 430 -40° to 65°C 230 020 -40° to 120°F 420 -40° to 50°C 220
040 -20° to 100°F 440 -30° to 40°C 240 050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250
050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250 060 0° to 160°F 460 -20° to 70°C 260
065 0° to 160°F 465 -20° to 70°C 265 100 30° to 180°F 495 0° to 80°C 300
100 30° to 180°F 500 0° to 85°C 300 110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310
110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310 130 50° to 300°F 530 10° to 150°C 330
120 30° to 300°F 520 0° to 150°C 320
145 100° to 350°F 545 40° to 180°C 345
160 200° to 450°F 560 90° to 230°C 360

111
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermal System Selection
Remote Mounted Dial Thermometers
Minimum Bulb Insertion Length
for Capillary Length (in feet) shown
DIAL THERMOMETERS

Bulb & Capillary Style Order Connection Bulb Capillary

Code Style & Material Tubing Vapor Actuated Liquid Act.
Material Material up to 10 15-50 over 50 All Lengths
Union Connection B01 Brass, Vapor: Copper Copper with 2" 33/4" 5 5/8" 2"
1/2NPT Liquid: Brass Bronze
1/2 NPT HUB Braided
CONNECTING Armour
TUBING U 7/16"

B10 Stainless Stainless Stainless 2" 33/4" 55/8" 2"

Steel, Steel Steel
SPLIT BULB 1/2 NPT
NUT

Adjustable Union Connection B02 Brass, Vapor: Copper Copper with 13/4" 31/2" 51/4" 13/4"
1/2NPT Liquid: Brass Bronze
Braided Armor
1/2 NPT HUB
Adjustable up to 24"
U 7/16"

B04 Stainless Stainless Stainless 13/4" 31/2" 51/4" 13/4"

BULB Steel, Steel Steel
CONNECTING 1/2 NPT
TUBING ADJ. UNION
FITTING Adjustable up to 24"

Plain Bulb B05 None Vapor: Copper Copper with 2" 33/4" 55/8" 2"
Liquid: Brass Bronze
Braided
CONNECTING
TUBING X Armor
7/16"

B06 None Stainless Stainless 2" 33/4" 55/8" 2"

Steel Steel
BULB

Teflon Covered Bulb B08 None Vapor: Copper Bronze 15" 15" 15" 23/4"
Liquid: Brass Braided Armor
CONNECTING
SEALED with with Teflon
X END
TUBING Teflon Cover
Cover
5/16"

B07 None Stainless Stainless 15" 15" 15" 23/4"

BULB Steel Steel
TEFLON COVER OVERALL with Teflon with Teflon
Cover Cover

Averaging Bulb B11* Brass, Copper Copper with N/A N/A N/A Approx.
1/2 NPT Bronze Braided 8 Feet
1/2 NPT HUB Armor
CONNECTING
TUBING U

B12* Stainless Stainless Stainless N/A N/A N/A Approx.

Steel, Steel Steel 8 Feet
1/2 NPT
SPLIT
NUT BULB

* B11 and B12 Averaging Bulbs are not available with vapor actuation.
112
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Remote Mounted Dial Thermometers (cont’d)

Minimum Bulb Insertion Length

Order Connection Bulb Capillary for Capillary Length (in feet) shown
Bulb & Capillary Style
Code Style & Material Tubing Vapor Actuated Liquid Act.
Material Material up to 10 15-50 over 50 All Lengths
Air Sensitive Bulb B13 Steel Copper Copper with 9" 9" 11" 8"
STEEL MOUNTING
Mounting Bronze
1/2 NPT HUB FLANGE Flange, Braided
Brass Armor
CONNECTING U 11/16"
TUBING Fittings

HELICAL
SPLIT NUT BULB

Union Connection with Spiral Armour B15 Brass, Vapor: Copper Copper with 2" 3 3/4" 5 5/8" 2"
1/2
NPT Liquid: Brass Bronze
Braid & SS
ARMORED 1/2 NPT HUB Spiral
CONNECTING
TUBING Armor
U
7/16"

B16 Stainless Stainless Stainless 2" 3 3/4" 5 5/8" 2"

Steel, Steel Steel with
1/2 NPT SS Spiral
SPLIT NUT BULB
Armor

Direct Mounted Dial Thermometers

Order Connection Bulb Minimum Bulb Insertion
Bulb Style Code Material Material Length
Vapor Actuated Liquid Act.
Union Connection B31 Brass, Vapor: Copper 2" 2"
1/2
NPT Liquid: Brass
1/2 NPT HUB

2” 7/16"

B32 Stainless Stainless 2" 2"

Steel, Steel
SPLIT BULB 1/2 NPT
NUT

Union Connection with Bendable Extension B33 Brass, Vapor: Copper 31/2" 31/2"
1/2
NPT Liquid: Brass
1/2 NPT HUB
3-1/2”
7/16"

B34 Stainless Stainless 31/2" 31/2"

2" BULB Steel, Steel
SPLIT
NUT 1/2 NPT

Air Sensitive Bulb B35 Steel Copper 9" 8"

STEEL MOUNTING Mounting
1/2 NPT HUB FLANGE
Flange,
VAPOR: 9”
CONNECTING
LIQUID: 8” 11/16" Brass
TUBING
Fittings

HELICAL BULB
SPLIT NUT

113
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Temperature Ranges
Dial Thermometers
Trerice offers a variety of temperature ranges to satisfy virtually any application. The following tables
list the standard available ranges with figure intervals and minor divisions for Vapor or Liquid actuated
DIAL THERMOMETERS

dial thermometers.

Vapor actuated dial thermometers have a progressive scale. Maximum readability and stated intervals are in the
upper two thirds of the scale. Liquid actuated dial thermometers have a linear scale. Figure intervals are equal
throughout the range. Fahrenheit is primary (outside) scale on dual scale ranges.

Vapor Actuated Ranges with Major and Minor Divisions

Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
030 -40° to 150°F 430 -40° to 65°C 230 -40° to 150°F & -40° to 65°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
040 -20° to 100°F 440 -30° to 40°C 240 -20° to 100°F & -30° to 40°C 10° 2° 5° 1°
050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250 0° to 100°F & -20° to 40°C 10° 1° 10° 1°
065 0° to 160°F 465 -20° to 70°C 265 0° to 160°F & -20° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
100 30° to 180°F 500 0° to 85°C 300 30° to 180°F & 0° to 85°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310 30° to 240°F & 0° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
120 30° to 300°F 520 0° to 150°C 320 30° to 300°F & 0° to 150°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
145 100° to 350°F 545 40° to 180°C 345 100° to 350°F & 40° to 180°C 30° 2° 10° 1°
160 200° to 450°F 560 90° to 230°C 360 200° to 450°F & 90° to 230°C 30° 2° 10° 2°
Vapor actuated dial thermometers have a progressive scale. Maximum readability and stated intervals are in the upper two thirds of the scale.

Liquid Actuated Ranges with Major and Minor Divisions

Fahrenheit Scale Celsius Scale Dual Scale Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Division
020 -40° to 120°F 420 -40° to 50°C 220 -40° to 120°F & -40° to 50°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
050 0° to 100°F 450 -20° to 40°C 250 0° to 100°F & -20° to 40°C 10° 1° 10° 0.5°
060 0° to 160°F 460 -20° to 70°C 260 0° to 160°F & -20° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
100 30° to 180°F 495 0° to 80°C 300 30° to 180°F & 0° to 85°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
110 30° to 240°F 510 0° to 115°C 310 30° to 240°F & 0° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
130 50° to 300°F 530 10° to 150°C 330 50° to 300°F & 10° to 150°C 50° 5° 20° 2°
Liquid actuated dial thermometers have a linear scale. Figure intervals are equal throughout the range.

Vapor and Liquid Actuated Dial Faces

The physical principles of vapor actuation require that the dialface for vapor dial thermometers be printed with
a non-linear progressively graduated temperature scale. Liquid actuated dial thermometers are furnished with
linear dialfaces. Please see the Thermal System Selection section of our online catalog for sample vapor and
liquid actuated dialfaces.

114
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
Dial Thermometers

Windows (PLW/GLW/SGW)

DIAL THERMOMETERS
Trerice offers a complete set of window options, including: plastic (acrylic PLW), glass (GLW), and laminated
safety glass (SGW). Please consult the Option Availability Table for window availability. Replacement windows
are sold separately, please consult the price sheet for item numbers.

Set Hand (RSH)

Attached at the center of the dialface, a red set hand can be adjusted to indicate a desired
pre-determined reference point. The set point is adjusted by removing the ring and window
of the thermometer. Please consult the Option Availability Table for set hand availability.
A second red set hand may be available on some models – please consult factory.

Maximum Registering Pointer (MAX)

A maximum registering pointer can be furnished on most Trerice Dial Thermometers. This
pointer is designed to indicate the maximum or minimum temperature attained by the
process being measured since the pointer was last reset. The pointer assembly is installed to
an acrylic window, with an external knob for manually resetting the pointer. Please consult
the Option Availability Table for maximum registering pointer availability.

Electric Contacts
Electric contact assemblies can be supplied on most 41/2" & 6" dial thermometers. These
units are well suited for making the electrical contact required to activate alarms, signals,
or other electrical devices. Each unit is provided with an external adjustment key, making it
easy to adjust and providing for tamper resistant operation. The contacts have adjustable
magnets to eliminate bounce caused by vibration, and have pass/repass capability, allowing
the pointer to move past the set point while maintaining contact.

Electric Contact Configurations Recommended Load Limits

Optional Volts Resistive Inductive
Feature Code Contact Style Contact Action
110 Vac 0.25 A 0.13 A
EC1 Single High Single contact:
24 Vdc 0.40 A 0.25 A
Makes on clockwise rotation
EC2 Single Low Single contact:
Breaks on clockwise rotation
EC3 High-Low Double contact:
High contact makes on clockwise rotation
Low contact breaks on clockwise rotation
EC4 Double High Double contact:
1st makes on clockwise rotation
2nd makes on clockwise rotation
Please consult the Option Availability Table for electric contact availability.

115
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories (cont’d)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Dial Thermometers

Weatherproofed Cases (WPC)

DIAL THERMOMETERS

Trerice Dial Thermometers may be sealed (NEMA 3) for outdoor use, or for use in applications where sprays and
washes may come in contact with the thermometer. Please consult the Option Availability Table for weatherproofed
case availability.

Silicone Dampened Movements (SDM)

The application of highly viscous silicone to the gear, sector, and all bearing points of the movement will help reduce
the effects of vibration to which the thermometer may be subjected. This feature will extend the life of the instrument by
reducing wear on the movement, and is available on most Trerice Filled System Dial Thermometers. Please consult the
Option Availability Table for silicone dampened movement availability.

7 3/ 8” Square Case
This 7 3/8" square front, back outlet
1.96
case (Model 80373) is constructed [50.2]
from black finished cast aluminum. .31
A black steel bezel ring is included 7.38 [7.9]
[187.3]
for panel mounting the thermometer.
Please consult the Option
Availability Table for square case
availability, and order as model
V80373 or L80373.
7.38
[187.3]

PANEL THICKNESS
Micro Switches (MSS/MSD)
Single (MSS) or double (MSD) Micro Switches, designed to operate low
Recommended Load Limits
current alarms and warning lights, are available on 6" and 7 3/8" Trerice Vapor
Volts Resistive Inductive
Dial Thermometers. The switches are factory-set to close and operate a circuit
when the temperature reaches a predetermined point. Red set hands are 250 VAC 10 A 10 A
provided to indicate the temperature at which the switches have been set to 125 VDC 0.4 A 0.3 A
operate. Although Micro Switches are designed for applications where the
alarm temperature remains at the factory set point, they may be field adjusted
if required. When ordering, please provide the set point(s) required.

3/4 NPT Hub (SHB/SHS)

A 3/4 NPT union connection hub is available in brass (SHB) or 316 stainless
steel (SHS). This hub may be installed by the factory or ordered as a Material Item Number
separate unit. When ordering separately, please use the item numbers
Brass 082-0015
listed in table.
316 Stainless Steel 082-0015.2

116
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
The following table indicates optional features that Option Availability Table
are available for Trerice Dial Thermometers.

DIAL THERMOMETERS
ned
r
ndo ety

inte
c) indow

ed
act

e
ent mpe
Wi Saf

and

ubl
Po

ub
oof
w

ndo

or h
ont

gle witc
Do

ss T H
ss ed

et H

vem Da

SS
ing
(ac stic W

se rpr
gis m

cC
Wi
Gla inat

Re mu

Sin ro S
Ca athe

Bra NP
ter

Mo cone

or
dS

ctri
ss
ryli

i
Lam

x
Pla

Gla

Mic

3/4
Ma
Re

Ele

We

Sili
Optional
Feature PLW SGW GLW RSH MAX EC-X WPC SDM MS-X SH-X
Code

Model
80025 S N/A O O O N/A N/A O N/A O
80030 S N/A O O O N/A N/A O N/A O
80035 S N/A O O O N/A N/A O N/A O
80036 S N/A O O O N/A O O N/A O
80040 S N/A O O O N/A O O N/A O
80041 S N/A O O O N/A O O N/A O
80341 O O S O O O O O N/A O
80342 O O S O O O O O N/A O
80345 O O S O O O O O N/A O
80361 O O S O O O O O O* O
80362 O O S O O O O O O* O
80365 O O S O O O O O O* O
80381 O O S O O N/A O O N/A O
80382 O O S O O N/A O O N/A O
80445 O N/A S O N/A N/A N/A O N/A O
80742 O O S O O O O O N/A O
80762 O O S O O O O O O O
80373 N/A N/A S O O N/A O O O O
S - Standard Product Feature O - Optional Feature at Additional Charge N/A - Not Available

* 6” Vapor Dial Thermometers only.

How to Order
Specify the Optional Feature Code (from the table above) at the end of the
Instrument Ordering Code.
Sample Order Number: V 80341 110 B01 05 EC1

117
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Bimetal Thermometers
DESIGN & OPERATION
B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

POINTER WINDOW EXTERNAL

RESET
ON BACK OF
CASE

CASE

ADJUSTABLE
ANGLE
HINGE
ASSEMBLY

DIAL FACE

1/2 NPT
THREADED
CONNECTION

STEM

Description
A thermometer is an instrument designed to measure and indicate the temperature of
a specific application or condition. A bimetallic dial thermometer, commonly known as
a bimetal thermometer, is installed at the point of measurement and is usually read
from that location.

Principles of Operation
The Trerice Bimetal Thermometer employs a bimetallic sensing element which reacts consistently
to temperature change, producing an accurately calibrated temperature measurement. The sensing
element consists of two dissimilar metals welded together (in the form of a coil), and encased in a
stainless steel stem. The coil is silicone dampened (ranges up to 300°F) to protect against vibration,
and connected to a dial pointer on the instrument face. When the stem is exposed to temperature
change, the coil expands or contracts, and the corresponding reaction is transmitted to the pointer,
thereby indicating the temperature of the process.

118
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Selecting a Bimetal Thermometer

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
All Trerice Bimetal Thermometers should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application.
The information contained in this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper selection. Improper
application may cause failure of the instrument, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use
and application of all bimetal thermometers, please refer to Bimetallic Actuated Thermometer Standard ASME B40.3. This
document may be obtained from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New York, NY
10016-5990.
For applications where the process media may be corrosive or contained under pressure, the use of a
thermowell is required to prevent damage to the thermometer and facilitate its removal from the process.

Case
The Trerice Bimetal Thermometer is available in an adjustable angle, rear or lower connected case.
The hermetically sealed case is made from highly polished, type 300 stainless steel in sizes from 1" through 5".

Window and Ring

Double strength glass and plastic are standard window materials. The window is held in place by a ring,
which is crimped around the case of the instrument.

Accuracy
The accuracy of a bimetal thermometer is expressed as a percentage (plus or minus) of the maximum scale range.
Trerice Bimetal Thermometers are accurate to ±1.0% Full Scale, ASME B40.3 Grade A (except pocket type: ±5.0%
Full Scale, ASME B40.3 Grade 3).

Measurement Range and Dial

A wide variety of measurement ranges are available in Dual Scales (Fahrenheit and Celsius) from -100° through
1000°F. Single scale Fahrenheit or Celsius is available on special order. Ranges are indelibly presented in black (°F)
and blue (°C) graduations with black markings upon a white painted dialface. Fahrenheit is the primary (outside)
scale on dual scale ranges.
Ranges up to 250°F (120°C) are provided with overrange protection of 100% of range span. Ranges over 250°F (120°C)
are provided with overrange protection of 50% of range span.

External Reset
Most Trerice Bimetal Thermometers are equipped with an external reset. This feature allows the instrument
to be calibrated at any specific point within the measuring range.

Stem and Connection

Trerice Bimetal Thermometers are furnished with a 0.250" or 0.125" O.D. stainless steel stem in lengths from 21/2"
though 72". Connection styles are either threaded (1/4 or 1/2 NPT) or plain (non-threaded).

Environmental Conditions
The Trerice Bimetal Thermometer is hermetically sealed. The case should not be exposed to sustained
temperatures in excess of 200°F (93°C). For applications where vibration may be present, the thermometer
case can be silicone filled to protect the internals of the instrument.
The thermometer should not be operated continuously above 800°F (425°C), as damage to the instrument may result.

Thermowells
For applications where the process media may be corrosive or contained under pressure, the use of a thermowell
is required to prevent damage to the thermometer and facilitate its removal from the process. Thermowells are available
in various lengths, connections, sizes, and materials. Please consult the Thermowell Section of this catalog.
To ensure minimum response time, Trerice Heat Transfer Paste should be applied to the sensing portion of the stem before
installation into a thermowell. 1 oz. tube: Item No. 107-0001

119
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Adjustable Angle

3", 5" Dial Size Specifications

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

± 1.0% Full Scale Models Dial Sizes

Accuracy
Stainless Steel B836 3"
Case & Stem B856 5"
External Reset
Case 300 stainless steel,
hermetically sealed

Stem 300 stainless steel

1/4" diameter

Coil Bimetallic, silicone dampened on

ranges to 300˚F (148˚C),
above 300˚F not dampened

Connection Adjustable angle, 1/2 NPT

Window Double strength glass

Pointer Balanced, black finish

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

black and blue graduations
and markings

External Reset Yes

B85606 shown
Accuracy ±1.0 % Full Scale ASME B40.3
The Trerice Adjustable Angle • Optional features available: Grade A
Bimetal Thermometer can be Please consult the Options &
Approximate Shipping Weight
Accessories Section for details.
configured to the most desirable
B836: 1.1 lbs [0.5 kg]
viewing angle. This instrument has Thermowell B856: 1.5 lbs [0.68 kg]
a hermetically sealed, stainless steel • For corrosive or pressure
applications, use of a thermowell
case designed to withstand the is recommended to prevent
rigors of industrial environments, damage to the thermometer and
facilitate its removal from the
while producing an accurate,
process (refer to pages 155-161).
responsive measurement. For correct use and application
of all Bimetallic thermometers,
please refer to the Bimetallic
Actuated Thermometer Standard
ASME B40.3.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: B856 06 05

Model Stem (Length) Range Code

B836 02 2 1/ 2" Stem See Standard

B856 04 4" Stem Ranges
06 6" Stem
09 9" Stem
12 12" Stem
15 15" Stem
18 18" Stem
24 24" Stem
Other lengths available: Specify in inches (72" maximum)

120
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Adjustable Angle
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
3.62 [92.1]

2.32 [58.9]

STEM
LENGTH
EXTERNAL
RESET

1/2 NPT

Ø.25 [6.4]

(3” DIAL) 3.21 [81.4]

(5” DIAL) 5.21 [132.3]

.88 [22.4] HEX

ADJUSTABLE
OVER
FULL 90° ARC

STEM MAY BE POSITIONED

IN ANY RADIAL LOCATION
AROUND THE DIAL

Standard Ranges
Dual Scale (Fahrenheit & Celsius Range) Fahrenheit only Range Celsius only Range Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01*† -100° to 100°F & –75° to 40°C 01F*† -100° to 100°F 01C*† -75° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
02 -40° to 160°F & –40° to 70°C 02F -40° to 160°F 02C -40° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
12*† 0° to 100°F & -20° to 40°C 12F*† 0° to 100°F 12C*† -20° to 40°C 10° 1° 10° 1°
† †
03* 25° to 125°F & –5° to 50°C 03F* 25° to 125°F 03C*† -5° to 50°C 10° 1° 5° 1/2°

04 0° to 200°F & –20° to 95°C 04F 0° to 200°F 04C -20° to 95°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
05 20° to 240°F & –10° to 115°C 05F 20° to 240°F 05C -10° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
27 0° to 250°F & –20° to 120°C 27F 0° to 250°F 27C -20° to 120°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
06 50° to 300°F & 10° to 150°C 06F 50° to 300°F 06C 10° to 150°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
07 50° to 400°F & 10° to 200°C 07F 50° to 400°F 07C 10° to 200°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
08 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 08F 50° to 500°F 08C 10° to 260°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
09* 150° to 750°F & 50° to 400°C 09F* 150° to 750°F 09C* 50° to 400°C 100° 10° 50° 5°
10* 200° to 1000°F & 100° to 550°C 10F* 200° to 1000°F 10C* 100° to 550°C 100° 10° 100° 5°
* Minimum stem length for these ranges is 4".
† Minimum insertion length for these ranges is 3".

121
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Bottom Connect
3", 5" Dial Size Specifications
B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

± 1.0% Full Scale Models Dial Sizes

Accuracy
Stainless Steel B834 3"
Case & Steel B854 5"
External Reset Case 300 stainless steel,
hermetically sealed

Stem 300 stainless steel,

1/4" diameter

Coil Bimetallic, silicone dampened on

ranges to 300˚F (148˚C),
above 300˚F not dampened

Connection Bottom, 1/2 NPT

Window Double strength glass

Pointer Balanced, black finished

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

black and blue graduations
and markings

External Reset Yes

B85404 shown
Accuracy ±1.0 % Full Scale ASME B40.3
Grade A
The Trerice Bottom Connection • Optional features available:
Please consult the Options & Approximate Shipping Weight
Bimetal Thermometer has been Accessories Section for details.
designed to meet the needs of B834: 0.8 lbs [0.36 kg]
Thermowell B854: 1.6 lbs [0.72 kg]
standard industrial applications
• For corrosive or pressure
and installations. This instrument applications, use of a thermowell
features a stainless steel, hermetically is recommended to prevent
damage to the thermometer and
sealed case, providing weather tight facilitate its removal from the
protection. process (refer to pages 155-161).
For correct use and application
of all Bimetallic thermometers,
please refer to the Bimetallic
Actuated Thermometer Standard
ASME B40.3.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: B834 04 04

Model Stem Length Range Code

B834 02 2 1/ 2" Stem See Standard

B854 04 4" Stem Ranges
06 6" Stem
09 9" Stem
12 12" Stem
15 15" Stem
18 18" Stem
24 24" Stem
Other lengths available: Specify in inches (72” maximum)

122
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Bottom Connect
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
1.76
[44.7]

1.38
[35.0]

(3” DIAL) Ø 3.00 [76.2]

(5” DIAL) Ø 5.00 [127.0]

(3” DIAL) Ø 2.50 [63.5]

(5” DIAL) Ø 3.50 [88.9]

1/2 NPT
STEM LENGTH

Ø.25 [6.4]

Standard Ranges
Dual Scale (Fahrenheit & Celsius Range) Fahrenheit only Range Celsius only Range Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01*† -100° to 100°F & -75° to 40°C 01F*† -100° to 100°F 01C*† -75° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
02 -40° to 160°F & -40° to 70°C 02F -40° to 160°F 02C -40° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
03*† 25° to 125°F & -5° to 50°C 03F*† 25° to 125°F 03C*† -5° to 50°C 10° 1° 5° 1/2°

04 0° to 200°F & -20° to 95°C 04F 0° to 200°F 04C -20° to 95°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
05 20° to 240°F & -10° to 115°C 05F 20° to 240°F 05C -10° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
27 0° to 250°F & -20° to 120°C 27F 0° to 250°F 27C –20° to 120°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
06 50° to 300°F & 10° to 150°C 06F 50° to 300°F 06C 10° to 150°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
07 50° to 400°F & 10° to 200°C 07F 50° to 400°F 07C 10° to 200°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
08 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 08F 50° to 500°F 08C 10° to 260°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
09* 150° to 750°F & 50° to 400°C 09F* 150° to 750°F 09C* 50° to 400°C 100° 10° 50° 5°
10* 200° to 1000°F & 100° to 550°C 10F* 200° to 1000°F 10C* 100° to 550°C 100° 10° 100° 5°
* Minimum stem length for these ranges is 4".
† Minimum insertion length for these ranges is 3".

123
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Rear Connect
3", 5" Dial Sizes Specifications
B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

± 1.0% Full Scale Models Dial Sizes

Accuracy
Stainless Steel B832 3"
Case & Stem B852 5"
External Reset
Case 300 stainless steel,
hermetically sealed

Stem 300 stainless steel,

1/4" diameter

Coil Bimetallic, silicone dampened

ranges to 300˚F (148˚F),
above 300˚F not dampened

Connection Rear, 1/2 NPT

Window Double strength glass

Pointer Balanced, black finished

Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

black and blue graduations
and markings

External Reset Yes

B85204 shown
Accuracy ±1.0 % Full Scale ASME B40.3
Grade A
The Trerice Rear Connect • Optional features available: Approximate Shipping Weight
Please consult the Options &
Bimetal Thermometer has Accessories Section for details. B832: 0.7 lbs [0.31 kg]
been designed to meet the B852: 1.2 lbs [0.54 kg]
needs of standard industrial Thermowell
• For corrosive or pressure
applications and installations. applications, use of a thermowell
This instrument features a is recommended to prevent
damage to the thermometer and
stainless steel, hermetically facilitate its removal from the
sealed case, providing weather process (refer to pages 155-161).
tight protection. For correct use and application
of all Bimetallic thermometers,
please refer to the Bimetallic
Actuated Thermometer Standard
ASME B40.3.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: B832 02 06

Model Stem Length Range Code

B832 02 2 1/ 2" Stem See Standard

B852 04 4" Stem Ranges
06 6" Stem
09 9" Stem
12 12" Stem
15 15" Stem
18 18" Stem
24 24" Stem
Other lengths available: Specify in inches (72” maximum)

124
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Rear Connect
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
EXTERNAL
RESET

.25 [6.4]

(3” DIAL) 3.21 [81.4]

(5” DIAL) 5.21 [132.2]

1/2 NPT

1.15 STEM LENGTH

[29.1]

Standard Ranges
Dual Scale (Fahrenheit & Celsius Range) Fahrenheit only Range Celsius only Range Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –100° to 100°F & –75° to 40°C 01F –100° to 100°F 01C –75° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
02 –40° to 160°F & –40° to 70°C 02F –40° to 160°F 02C –40° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
12*† 0° to 100°F & –20° to 40°C 12F*† 0° to 100°F 12C*† -20° to 40°C 10° 1° 10° 1°
03 25° to 125°F & –5° to 50°C 03F 25° to 125°F 03C –5° to 50°C 10° 1° 5° 1/2°

04 0° to 200°F & –20° to 95°C 04F 0° to 200°F 04C –20° to 95°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
05 20° to 240°F & –10° to 115°C 05F 20° to 240°F 05C –10° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
27 0° to 250°F & –20° to 120°C 27F 0° to 250°F 27C –20° to 120°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
06 50° to 300°F & 10° to 150°C 06F 50° to 300°F 06C 10° to 150°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
07 50° to 400°F & 10° to 200°C 07F 50° to 400°F 07C 10° to 200°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
08 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 08F 50° to 500°F 08C 10° to 260°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
09* 150° to 750°F & 50° to 400°C 09F* 150° to 750°F 09C* 50° to 400°C 100° 10° 50° 5°
10* 200° to 1000°F & 100° to 550°C 10F* 200° to 1000°F 10C* 100° to 550°C 100° 10° 100° 5°
* Minimum stem length for these ranges is 4".
† Minimum stem length for these ranges is 3".

125
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Rear Connect X-Series
3" Dial Size Specifications
B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

± 1.0% Full Scale

Model Dial Size
Accuracy
Stainless Steel B831X 3"
Case & Stem
Case 300 stainless steel,
Hermetically
Sealed Design hermetically sealed

Stem 300 stainless steel

1/4" diameter

Coil Bimetallic, silicone dampened

ranges to 300˚F (148˚F),
above 300˚F not dampened

Connection Rear 1/2 NPT

Window Polycarbonate

Pointer Balanced, black finished

Perfect for OEM Dial Face Aluminum, white background with

Applications black and blue graduations
and markings

External Reset No

±1.0 % Full Scale ASME B40.3

B831X04 shown Accuracy
Grade A

• Optional features available: Approximate Shipping Weight

The Trerice X-Series OEM
Please consult the Options &
Bimetal Thermometer is Accessories Section for details. B831X: 0.5 lbs [0.22 kg]
designed to meet the demands
Thermowell
of the OEM and industrial market-
• For corrosive or pressure
place, but at an economical price. applications, use of a thermowell
is recommended to prevent
It features a hermetically sealed damage to the thermometer and
case with a narrow, space saving facilitate its removal from the
profile. This instrument does process (refer to pages 155-161).
For correct use and application
not include an external reset, of all Bimetallic thermometers,
ensuring tamperproof operation please refer to the Bimetallic
throughout the life of the unit. Actuated Thermometer Standard
ASME B40.3.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: B831X 04 05

Model Stem Length Range Code

B831X 02 2 1/ 2" Stem See Standard

04 4" Stem Ranges
06 6" Stem
09 9" Stem
12 12" Stem
15 15" Stem
18 18" Stem
24 24" Stem
Other lengths available: Specify in inches (72” maximum)

126
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Rear Connect X-Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
.37 [9.4]

STEM LENGTH

.45 [11.4]

Ø.25 [6.4]

Ø3.00 [76.2]

1/2 NPT

.88 [22.4] HEX

Standard Ranges
Dual Scale (Fahrenheit & Celsius Range) Fahrenheit Only Range Celsius Only Range Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –100° to 100°F & –75° to 40°C 01F –100° to 100°F 01C –75° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
02 –40° to 160°F & –40° to 70°C 02F –40° to 160°F 02C –40° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
12*† 0° to 100°F & –20° to 40°C 12F*† 0° to 100°F 12C*† –20° to 40°C 10° 1° 10° 1°
03 25° to 125°F & –5° to 50°C 03F 25° to 125°F 03C –5° to 50°C 10° 1° 5° 1/2°
04 0° to 200°F & –20° to 95°C 04F 0° to 200°F 04C –20° to 95°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
05 20° to 240°F & –10° to 115°C 05F 20° to 240°F 05C –10° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
27 0° to 250°F & –20° to 120°C 27F 0° to 250°F 27C –20° to 120°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
06 50° to 300°F & 10° to 150°C 06F 50° to 300°F 06C 10° to 150°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
07 50° to 400°F & 10° to 200°C 07F 50° to 400°F 07C 10° to 200°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
08 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 08F 50° to 500°F 08C 10° to 260°C 50° 5° 50° 2°
* Minimum stem length for these ranges is 4".
† Minimum insertion length for these ranges is 3".

127
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Rear Connect Compact Style
2" Dial Size Specifications
± 1.0% Full Scale Models Dial Size
B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

Accuracy
B822Y 2" (Threaded)
Stainless Steel B822YP 2" (Plain)
Case & Stem
Hermetically
Sealed Design Case 300 stainless steel,
hermetically sealed

Stem B822Y: 300 stainless steel

1/4" diameter
B822Y04 shown
B822YP: 300 stainless steel
9/64"
diameter
Designed for minimum • Optional features available:
Please consult the Options & Coil Bimetallic, silicone dampened on
space applications, this ranges to 300˚F (148˚C),
Accessories Section for details.
compact, low-cost thermometer above 300˚F not dampened
maintains the accuracy, Thermowell
Connection B822Y: Rear, 1/4 NPT
responsiveness, and durability • For corrosive or pressure applications,
use of a thermowell is recommended B822YP: Rear, unthreaded
for which the Trerice Line of to prevent damage to the thermometer
Bimetal Thermometers is and facilitate its removal from the
Window Glass
process (refer to pages 155-161).
known. The stainless steel
For correct use and application
case is hermetically sealed. of all Bimetallic thermometers, please Pointer Balanced, black finished
refer to the Bimetallic Actuated
Thermometer Standard ASME B40.3. Dial Face Aluminum, silver background with
black graduations and markings
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: B822Y 04 05
External Reset Yes
Model Stem Length Range Code
B822Y 02 21/2" Stem See Standard Accuracy ±1.0 % Full Scale ASME B40.3
B822YP 04 4" Stem Ranges Grade A
06 6" Stem Approximate Shipping Weight
Other stem lengths and ranges available. Please consult factory.
0.4 lbs [0.18 kg]
Standard Ranges
Dual Scale (Fahrenheit & Celsius Range) Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
02 –40° to 160°F & –40° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
03 25° to 125°F & –5° to 50°C 10° 1° 5° 1/2°

27 0° to 250°F & –20° to 120°C 50° 2° 20° 2°

05 20° to 240°F & –10° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
08 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 50° 5° 20° 2°

B822Y .44
[11.2]
B822YP .50
[12.7]

.44 .25
[11.4] 1/4 NPT [6.4]

.25 Ø.15
[6.4] [3.8]
Ø2.09 Ø2.09
[53.1] [53.1]

.50
[12.7]
.25 STEM LENGTH
[6.3]
STEM LENGTH

All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

128
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Pocket Bimetal
Specifications
1" Dial Size
Model Dial Size

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
± 5.0% Full Scale
B811 1" Accuracy
Stainless Steel
Case 300 stainless steel,
Case & Stem
hermetically sealed
Plastic Stem
Stem 300 stainless steel, Protector with
9/64” diameter Pocket Clip

Coil Bimetallic

Connection Rear, unthreaded The Trerice Pocket Bimetal

Thermometer is designed to
Window Acrylic deliver temperature indications
for general and informal testing
Pointer Black finished purposes. This thermometer has
a hermetically sealed stainless
Dial Face White background with black
graduations and markings steel case with a plain connection
and comes complete with a plastic
External Reset Yes stem protector with pocket clip.

Accuracy ±5.0 % Full Scale ASME B40.3

Grade C For correct use and
application of all bimetallic
Approximate Shipping Weight thermometers, please refer

0.1 lbs [0.05 kg] B81105 shown to Bimetallic Actuated

Thermometer Standard
ASME B40.3.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: B811 05 13

Model Stem Length Range Code

B811 05 5" Stem 11 -20˚ to 120˚F (20˚ Figure intervals / 2˚ Minor Divisions)
13 0˚ to 220˚F (20˚ Figure intervals / 2˚ Minor Divisions)
15 50˚ to 500˚F (50˚ Figure intervals / 5˚ Minor Divisions)
18 0˚ to 120˚C (10˚ Figure intervals / 1˚ Minor Divisions)
20 0˚ to 250˚C (50˚ Figure intervals / 2˚ Minor Divisions)

All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters

.44 4.95
[11.3] [125.7]
LOOP ALLOWS CARRYING CASE
TO BE USED AS HANDLE

Ø1.05
[26.7]

Ø.15 CARRYING CASE Ø.32

[3.8] [8.1]

129
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Bimetal Plus
Integrated Thermocouple or RTD
3", 5" Dial Sizes Specifications
B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

± 1.0% Full Scale

Accuracy
Models Dial Sizes/Stem Styles

Local Indication/ B836 3"

Remote Data B856 5" Adjustable Angle
Acquisition
B832 3" Rear Connection
Thermocouple or B852 5"
RTD Sensors
available
Case 300 stainless steel,
hermetically sealed

Stem 300 stainless steel,

1/4" diameter

Coil Bimetallic, silicone dampened on

ranges to 300˚F (148˚C),
above 300˚F not dampened

Process Adjustable or rear,

Connection 1/2 NPT

Electrical T/C: Miniature plug

Connection RTD: Plug with molded cordset

Window Double strength glass

Pointer Balanced, black finished

MODEL B85606
Dial Face Aluminum, white background
The Trerice Bimetal Plus has all • Optional features available: with black and blue graduations
Please consult the Options & and markings
the standard features of the Trerice
Accessories Section for details.
Bimetal Thermometer, but with a External Reset Yes
“Plus.” The “Plus” being an internally Thermowell
mounted thermocouple or RTD. • For corrosive or pressure Accuracy ±1.0 % Full Scale ASME B40.3
This allows for remote temperature applications, use of a thermowell
Grade A
is recommended to prevent
monitoring while still providing local damage to the thermometer and
indication. This dual sensor design facilitate its removal from the Approximate Shipping Weight
eliminates the need for additional process (refer to pages 155-161).
B832: 0.9 lbs [0.41 kg]
For correct use and application
instrumentation or connections when B852: 1.4 lbs [0.64 kg]
of all Bimetallic thermometers,
designing a system to include both please refer to the Bimetallic B836: 1.3 lbs [0.29 kg]
mechanical and electronic Actuated Thermometer Standard B856: 1.7 lbs [0.77 kg]
temperature sensing. ASME B40.3.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: B856 06 05 TCJ

Model Stem Length* Range Code Sensor Type

B836 04 4" Stem See Standard TCE Type E Thermocouple
B856 06 6" Stem Ranges TCJ Type J Thermocouple
B832 09 9" Stem TCK Type K Thermocouple
B852 12 12" Stem TCT Type T Thermocouple
15 15" Stem RTC 100Ω RTD
18 18" Stem
24 24" Stem
Other lengths available: Specify in inches (48” maximum).
* Minimum insertion length is 31/2”.

130
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Bimetal Plus
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
Adjustable Angle Rear Connection

4.83 STEM
[122.6] LENGTH
2.18 2.66 STEM
[55.4] [67.7] LENGTH
EXTERNAL RESET
1/2 NPT
EXTERNAL RESET
Ø.25
(3” DIAL) 3.21 [81.4] [6.4]
.25
(5” DIAL) 5.21 [132.3] [6.4]
(3” DIAL) 3.21 [81.4]
(5” DIAL) 5.21 [132.3]
.88 [22.4] HEX

1/2 NPT
THERMOCOUPLE
MINIATURE
CONNECTOR
THERMOCOUPLE .88 [22.4] HEX
MINIATURE
ADJUSTABLE CONNECTOR
OVER
FULL 90° ARC

END VIEW
OF RTD
CONNECTOR

BROWN

BLUE

BLACK (+)
RTD CONNECTOR
INTERNAL RTD WIRING 3.68 [93.5]
(3" DIAL
SIZE ONLY)

Standard Ranges*
Dual Scale (Fahrenheit & Celsius Range) Fahrenheit Only Range Celsius Scale Only Range Fahrenheit Celsius
Range Range Range Figure Minor Figure Minor
Code Range Code Range Code Range Intervals Divisions Intervals Divisions
01 –100 to 100°F & –75° to 40°C 01F –100° to 100°F 01C 75° to 40°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
02 –40° to 160°F & –40° to 70°C 02F –40° to 160°F 02C –40° to 70°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
12 0° to 100°F & –20° to 40°C 12F 0° to 100°F 12C -20° to 40°C 10° 1° 10° 1°
03 25° to 125°F & –5° to 50°C 03F 25° to 125°F 03C –5° to 50°C 10° 1° 5° 1/2°

04 0° to 200°F & –20° to 95°C 04F 0° to 200°F 04C –20° to 95°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
05 20° to 240°F & –10° to 115°C 05F 20° to 240°F 05C –10° to 115°C 20° 2° 10° 1°
27 0° to 250°F & –20° to 120°C 27F 0° to 250°F 27C –20° to 120°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
06 50° to 300°F & 10° to 150°C 06F 50° to 300°F 06C 10° to 150°C 50° 2° 20° 2°
08 50° to 500°F & 10° to 260°C 08F 50° to 500°F 08C 10° to 260°C 50° 2° 50° 2°
* Minimum insertion length for all ranges is 31/2".

131
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Bimetal Plus
Options & Accessories
Connection Head with Terminal Block or Transmitter
The connection head is designed to provide a weatherproof, yet accessible conduit connection, and is used to
B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

house a terminal connection block or Trerice TRT30 Temperature Transmitter. The head is available with a screw
cover (cast aluminum or stainless steel) or a flip cover (polypropylene), and includes a 3/4 NPT conduit connection.
5.47
Adjustable Angle [138.9] Rear Connection 4.29
[109.0]
1.54
[39.1]
2.18 4.29 1.54
[55.4] [109.0] [39.1]

(3” DIAL 3.21 [81.4]

(5” DIAL 5.21 [132.3]
3.88
4.16 [98.6]
[105.8]
3.22 3.27
4.62 [81.8] [83.0]
[117.4] 3.30
[83.8]

3.14 0.64 1/2-14 NPT

ADJUSTABLE
[179.8] [16.3] OVER FULL
90˚ ARC

0.25
[6.4]

The terminal block provides an electrical hook-up point within the connection Transmitter Terminal Block
head, allowing for quick and easy attachment of extension wiring. The
Terminal Block is available with either a 2-wire (thermocouple) or 3-wire (RTD)
connection. The Trerice TRT30 Series Temperature Transmitter will convert
a thermocouple or output signal to a 2-wire 4-20 mA signal, thus eliminating
electrical interference and allowing the signal to be transmitted over long
distances. These units are specifically designed for installation into the
connection head.

Specifications
Model Input Accuracy Adjustment Range Maximum Output Load Output Signal
TRT30 Type J, K or T ±0.1% of ±35% for both Thermocouple: 4-20 mA
Thermocouple input span zero and span R max=(V supply-12V)/20 mA
or 100Ω RTD:
Platinum RTD R max=(V supply-10V)/20 mA
Ordering Codes
Terminal Block Transmitter
Connection Head Thermocouple RTD Thermocouple RTD
Aluminum screw cover ABT ABR ATT ATR
Polypropylene flip cover PBT PBR PTT PTR
Stainless steel screw cover SBT SBR STT STR

Weatherproofed Conduit Connection (WCC) 1/2 NPSM

2.31 [58.7] .20 [5.1]
The conduit connection allows the Trerice Bimetal Plus Thermometer to
be mounted directly to conduit piping, or used in applications where sprays
and washes may come in contact with the electrical connection. This
option consists of a stainless steel conduit connection tube, a packing
grommet and a stainless steel connection fitting. Note: The Bimetal Plus Ø1.00 [25.4]

with RTD Sensor does not require this option for weatherproof protection,
as the RTD connection and cable are sealed for outdoor use. Please order
RUBBER
using Option Code WCC (weatherproofed conduit connection). STAINLESS STEEL
PACKING
1/2 NPSM STAINLESS
STEEL NUT
CONNECTOR

How to Order
Specify the Optional Feature Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code. Sample Order Number: B856 06 05 TJC WCC

132
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
Bimetal Thermometers

Windows (PLW/SGW)

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S
Plastic (Acrylic) Windows are optionally available with ranges up to 500°F (260°C) on 3" and 5"
dial size bimetal thermometers. Laminated Safety Glass Windows are available on 3" and 5"
dial size bimetal thermometers (except B831X Series). Please order using Option Code PLW
(plastic window) or SGW (safety glass window).

Maximum Registering Pointer (MAX)

Maximum Registering Pointers can be furnished on the B832
Series Bimetal Thermometers (except Range Codes 03, 03C, 03F).
This pointer is designed to indicate the maximum or minimum
temperature attained by the process being measured since the
pointer was last reset. The pointer assembly is installed to a plexiglass
window, with an external knob for manually resetting the pointer.
Please order using Option Code MAX (maximum registering pointer).

Silicone Liquid Fill (SLF)

Trerice Bimetal Thermometers (except B831X and B81105 Series) with temperature ranges
up to 500°F (260°C) can be silicone liquid filled to reduce pointer oscillation resulting from
application vibration. This feature also acts as a permanent lubricant to the moving parts of
the instrument. Please order using Option Code SLF (silicone liquid fill).

Swivel Union Connection (SWV)

Trerice Series B832, B836, B852 and B856
Bimetal Thermometers are available with an
optional swivel union connection. This feature
allows the thermometer to be rotated to the
desired reading position before being tightened
into the process connection. Thermometers with SWIVEL UNION CONNECTION
FITTING
the swivel connection must be installed with a
thermowell. Please order using Option Code
SWV (swivel union connection).

STEM

THERMOWELL

133
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Options & Accessories
Bimetal Thermometers

Silicone Free Construction (SFC)

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

For applications where silicone is not permitted within the process (i.e., paint systems), Trerice Bimetal Thermometers
(except B831X and B81105) can be manufactured to be silicone free. Bimetal Thermometers (except B831X and
B81105) with ranges above 300°F are supplied standard as “silicone free.” Please order using Option Code SFC
(silicone free construction).

Flanges and Hubs

Trerice offers a variety of instrument mounting accessories. Please consult the table below for mounting flange
and adapter hub item numbers.

Mounting Flanges and Adapter Hubs

Instrument Mounting Item
Description Material Connection Connection Number
Mounting Flange Zinc plated steel 1/2 NPT 2 3/8" bolt circle, 3 3/8" O.D. 065-0015
Swivel Flange Zinc plated steel 1/2 NPT 2 5/16"
slotted bolt circle 065-0032A
with brass hub 3" O.D.

Adapter Hub Brass 1/2 NPT Female 3/4 NPT Male 024-0039

Adapter Hub Stainless steel 1/2 NPT Female 3/4 NPT Male 024-0063

Identification Tags
Trerice Identification Tags are available in a variety of materials. Please consult the table below for tag item numbers.

Tag Material Maximum No. of Characters Item Number

Aluminum 80 152-0015.2A
Paper 90 152-0016A
Stainless steel 80 152-0015A
Stainless steel foil 25 152-0018

How to Order
Specify the Optional Feature Code at the end of the Instrument Ordering Code.

Sample Order Number: B856 06 05 SLF

134
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Notes

B I M E TA L T H E R M O M E T E R S

135
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Electronic Temperature Sensors
DESIGN & OPERATION
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Description
A temperature sensor is a device, typically
a thermocouple or RTD, that provides for
CONDUIT SCREW temperature measurement through an
CONNECTION COVER
FITTING electrical signal. A thermocouple (T/C)
is made from two dissimilar metals that
generate electrical voltage in direct
proportion to changes in temperature.
TERMINAL
BLOCK An RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector)
is a variable resistor that will change its
electrical resistance in direct proportion
to changes in temperature in a precise,
PROCESS
CONNECTION
repeatable and nearly linear manner.

STEM

SENSOR

Principles of Operation

Thermocouples
A thermocouple is made from two dissimilar metal wires. The wires are are joined together at one end to form a
measuring (hot) junction. The other end, known as the reference (cold) junction, is connected across an electronic
measurement device (controller or digital indicator). A thermocouple will generate a measurement signal not in
response to actual temperature, but in response to a difference in temperature between the measuring and
reference junctions. A small ambient temperature sensor is built into the electronic measuring device near the
point where the reference junction is attached. The ambient temperature is then added to the thermocouple
differential temperature by the measuring device in order to determine and display the actual measured temperature.
Only two wires are necessary to connect a thermocouple to an electrical circuit; however, these connecting
wires must be made from the same metals as the thermocouple itself. Adding wire made from other materials
(such as common copper wire) will create new measuring junctions that will result in incorrect readings.

RTDs
To greater or lesser degrees, all electrical conducting materials have some amount of resistance to the flow of
electricity. When a known electric voltage is applied across a conductor, the resistance varies based on the
temperature of the conductor. This resistance can be measured and will correspond to a specific temperature. While
various elements are affected by temperature in different ways, platinum is commonly used in an RTD due to its
purity, linearity and stability over a wide range of temperatures. An electronic readout device, such as a controller or
digital indicator designed to measure resistance, is required for use with RTD sensors.

Only two standard copper wires are necessary to connect an RTD to an electrical circuit, however, these connecting
wires are also subject to small changes in resistance based on surrounding temperature. For this reason an “extra”
third hookup wire is built into most RTDs as a compensation wire to allow the controller or display unit to correct for
these variations.

136
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Selecting an Electronic Temperature Sensor

All Trerice Thermocouples and RTDs should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application.
The information contained in this catalog is only offered as a guide to assist in making the proper selection. Improper
application may cause failure of the sensor, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

To ensure minimum response time, Trerice Heat Transfer Paste should be applied to the sensing portion of the stem
before installation into a thermowell. 1 oz. tube: Item No. 107-0001

Style
Trerice Temperature Sensors are available in a variety of styles. The weather proofed screw cover style provides
an electrical conduit connection and can be used to house a transmitter (optional). For open system sensing,
a non-threaded style is offered. This design is provided with integrated leadwire and can be Teflon covered to
protect the stem and leadwire against corrosive environments. A standard plug with a mating jack may also be
furnished.

Stem (Sheath)
All Trerice Thermocouples and RTDs are furnished with a 316 stainless steel stem, with the internal wiring
packed in powdered ceramic. The screw head cover style is available in two stem types: welded and spring
loaded. The welded stem is suitable for use in liquid applications. The spring loaded stem is designed to
bottom out inside a thermowell, providing maximum heat sensitivity. Spring loaded stems are not pressure
tight and may allow process media to escape; therefore, they must always be installed in a thermowell.

Insertion (U) Length

The insertion (U) length of a thermocouple or RTD represents its depth into the process vessel or thermowell.
Trerice Thermocouples and RTDs are available in standard U-lengths from 2" to 24". Other lengths are available
upon special order; please consult factory.

Measuring (Hot) Junction

Trerice Thermocouples are available in Type J and Type K, and use ceramic insulation to provide an ungrounded
measuring junction. Other thermocouple types may be available, please consult factory.
Trerice RTDs are a platinum, 3-wire design, and are furnished with either 100Ω or 1000Ω resistance at 32°F
(0°C), and a temperature coefficient of 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C.

Connection (Termination)
Trerice Thermocouples are provided with terminal block (screw cover head), mating jack, or integrated leadwire
connections. The terminal block connection has no leadwire, therefore extension wire must be attached and
routed to the electronic measuring device. Thermocouple extension wire must be identical to the thermocouple
type, otherwise multiple measuring junctions will be made, causing inaccurate temperature readings.
Trerice RTDs are provided with a terminal block (screw cover head) or integrated leadwire connection. The
terminal block connection has no leadwire, therefore extension wire must be attached and routed to the indicator
or controller.

137
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Electronic Temperature Sensor
Connection Head Type • RTD or Thermocouple Element
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Thermocouple Specifications
or RTD
Models Sensor Type
Cast Aluminum,
TJD Type J T/C
Polypropylene or
Stainless Steel Head TKD Type K T/C
TDD 100Ω RTD
Weather Proof
TMD 1000Ω RTD
Welded or
Hot Junction: T/C: Ungrounded
Spring Loaded Stem
RTD: Platinum, 3-wire

Stem 316 stainless steel

1/4" diameter

Insulation Ceramic

Head Cast aluminum, polypropylene

or stainless steel

Process 1/2NPT welded or

Connection spring loaded

Conduit 3/4 NPT female

Connection

Approximate Shipping Weight

1.1 lbs [0.50 kg]
TJDZ04UWA shown

The Trerice Connection Head is available • Extension wire and

transmitter accessories
with both Type J and Type K Thermocouples, are also available. Please
as well as RTD sensors. The weatherproofed consult the Temperature
head provides a conduit connection and is Sensor Accessories
Section for details.
available in cast aluminum (screw cover),
polypropylene (flip cover) and stainless • For applications where
the process media may
steel (screw cover). The stem is either be corrosive or contained
welded directly to the 1/2 NPT threaded under pressure, the use of
a thermowell is required to
connection, or is spring loaded to provide
prevent damage to the sensor
maximum sensitivity. The spring loaded stem and facilitate its removal from
must always be installed in a thermowell. the process. To prevent leakage
of the process media, spring
loaded sensors must always be
installed in a thermowell.
(Refer to pages 155-161)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: TJD Z 04 U W A

Model Stem Style Stem Length Hot Junction Connection Head Material
TJD Type J T/C Z 316SS, 1/4 O.D. 02 21/2"Stem U Ungrounded (T/C) S Spring Loaded, A Aluminum
TKD Type K T/C 04 4" Stem D 3 Wire (RTD) 1/2 NPT P Polypropylene
TDD 100Ω RTD 06 6" Stem W Welded, S Stainless Steel
TMD 1000Ω RTD 09 9" Stem 1/2 NPT
12 12" Stem

Other stem lengths available: Specify in inches (24" maximum).

138
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Electronic Temperature Sensor
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Connection Head Type

ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

3.91
[99.4]

Ø3.30
[83.8]

3.40
[86.2]
1/2 NPT

STEM LENGTH

Ø.25
[6.4]

Sensor Specifications
Thermocouple
Type Color Code Positive Lead Negative Lead Temperature Range
J Black Iron* (Fe) Constantan (Cu-Ni) 32° to 1382°F (0° to 750°C)
[white] [red]
K Yellow Nickel-Chromium (Ni-Cr) Nickel-Aluminum* (Ni-Al) 32° to 2282°F (0° to 1250°C)
[yellow] [red]
*magnetic lead

RTD
Type Material Resistance Temperature Coefficient Temperature Range
D Platinum (Pt) 100Ω α = 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C -50° to 700°F (-45° to 370°C)
M Platinum (Pt) 1000Ω α = 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C -50° to 700°F (-45° to 370°C)

139
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Electronic Temperature Sensor
Integral Leadwire • RTD or Thermocouple Element
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Thermocouple Specifications
or RTD

Self-Contained Models Sensor Type

Design TJD Type J T/C
TKD Type K T/C
Plain or Teflon TDD 100Ω RTD
Covered Stem
TMD 1000Ω RTD

Hot Junction: T/C: Ungrounded

RTD: Platinum, 3-wire

Stem 316 stainless steel

1/4" diameter

Insulation Ceramic

Termination Integral leadwire with spring

relief or Teflon sheath
(450˚F / 230˚C maximum)

Leadwire T/C: Fiberglass

Jacketing RTD: Teflon

Approximate Shipping Weight

0.5 lbs [0.23 kg]

TJDZ06UR120 shown

For applications where

Trerice Integral Leadwire Sensors the process media may
are available with an RTD, or a Type J be corrosive or contained
or K Thermocouple. The stem transition under pressure, the use of
a thermowell is required to
includes a spring relief to prevent damage prevent damage to the
to the leadwire. A Teflon covered sensor sensor and facilitate its
and leadwire is offered for use with removal from the process.
(Refer to pages 155-161)
open tanks or corrosive process media
(the Teflon covered sensor does not
include a spring relief).

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: TDD Z 06 D T 024

Model Stem Style Stem Length Hot Junction Connection Style Leadwire Length
TJD Type J T/C Z 316SS, 1/4 O.D. 02 21/2" Stem U Ungrounded (T/C) R Integral Leadwire Specify Length
TKD Type K T/C 04 4" Stem D 3 Wire (RTD) with Relief Spring in inches
TDD 100Ω RTD 06 6" Stem T Integral Leadwire (i.e., 10 feet=120)
TMD 1000Ω RTD 09 9" Stem with Teflon Sheath
12 12" Stem

Other stem lengths available: Specify in inches (24" maximum).

140
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Electronic Temperature Sensor
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Integral Leadwire

ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

STEM
LENGTH
SPRING RELIEF
Ø.43
[11]

Ø.25
[6.4]

LEADWIRE
LENGTH

STEM LENGTH
(SENSITIVE AREA)

TEFLON SHEATH

Ø.31
[7.9]
LEADWIRE
LENGTH

Sensor Specifications
Thermocouple
Type Color Code Positive Lead Negative Lead Temperature Range
J Black Iron* (Fe) Constantan (Cu-Ni) 32° to 1382°F (0° to 750°C)
[white] [red]
K Yellow Nickel-Chromium (Ni-Cr) Nickel-Aluminum* (Ni-Al) 32° to 2282°F (0° to 1250°C)
[yellow] [red]
* Magnetic lead

RTD
Type Material Resistance Temperature Coefficient Temperature Range
D Platinum (Pt) 100Ω α = 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C -50° to 700°F (-45° to 370°C)
M Platinum (Pt) 1000Ω α = 0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C -50° to 700°F (-45° to 370°C)

Note: Teflon covered sensors

are limited to 450°F (232°C).

141
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Digital Temperature Indicator TRD20
Microprocessor Based
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

96 mm x 48 mm (1/8 DIN) Specifications

RTD, Thermocouple, Current &
Model
Voltage Inputs Available
TRD20
Analog Output or Interface Available
Display 4 digit, 14.3 mm red LED
Optional Alarm Sampling Cycle: 4x/second

Input Thermocouple: Type J, Type K

RTD: Platinum, 100Ω, 3-wire

D
Current: 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA switchable

E
Voltage: 0-10 mVDC, 0-50 mVDC,

U
0-100 mVDC switchable;
0-1 VDC, 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC switchable

NTIN Power Requirements

Supply Voltage:

O
100-240 VAC/50/60 Hz,

C
24 VAC/50/60 Hz, 24 VDC

S
Consumption:

DI
100-240 VAC: Approximately 6-8 VA
24 VAC: Approximately 8 VA
24 VDC: Approximately 8 W

A/D Conversion
Microprocessor

Accuracy ±0.25% + 1 digit of

The Trerice TRD20 Digital Indicator measuring range
is a superb choice when remote digital
indication is required. The 4 times per Ambient Temperature
Maximum: 122°F (50°C)
second sampling cycle provides accurate,
Minimum: 14°F (-10°C)
reliable monitoring and the large LED
display provides easy readability from Humidity Maximum: 90% RH
a distance. The TRD20 can be used with
any Trerice RTD, Thermocouple or Approximate Shipping Weight
Transmitter and can be ordered with
0.7 lbs [0.31 kg]
an RS-485, RS-422A or RS-232C
Communications Interface. Size is
96 mm x 48 mm (1/8 DIN).

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: TRD20 2 90 00 04 00

Model Input Power Supply Alarms Analog Output/Interface Sensor DC Power Supply*
TRD20 1 Thermocouple 90 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz 00 None 00 None 00 None
2 RTD 10 24 VAC 50/60 Hz 10 2 point 03 0 to 10 mVDC 24 24 VDC 50 mA
3 mVDC 02 24 VDC individual 04 4 to 20 mA
4 mA setting 06 0 to 10 VDC
5 VDC 15 RS-485
16 RS-422A
17 RS-232C
*N/A with 24 VAC or
24 VDC power supply

144
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Digital Temperature Indicator TRD20
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Microprocessor Based

ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

3.79
.40 3.93
[96.2]

D
[10.2] [99.8]

INUE 1.89
[48.0]

ONT
C
110/ AC
120 GND

IS
3.64 ± .02
[92.4 ± .4]

D PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

1.78 ± .01
[45.3 ± .3]
WIRING DIAGRAM

A B
B RTD

+ –

THERMOCOUPLE

Programmable Inputs and Ranges

Input Range
Code Type Code Fahrenheit Code Celsius
1J Type J Thermocouple A71 -148° to 1112°F A26 -100° to 600°C
1K Type K Thermocouple A79 -328° to 2192°F A74 -200° to 1200°C
A72 -148° to 1472°F A27 -100° to 800°C
2F 100 Ω RTD A78 -328° to 1112°F A31 -199.9° to 600.0°C
A61 32.0° to 212.0°F A02 0.00° to 99.99°C
32 0 to 10 mV
34 0 to 50 mV
36 0 to 100 mV
41 0 to 20 mA Scaling Range: -1999 to 9999
42 4 to 20 mA Span: 100 to 10,000
62 0 to 1 V
64 0 to 5 V
66 0 to 10 V

Input and Range Codes are not required for ordering, but are used for field programming.

145
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Digital Temperature Indicator TRD16
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

96 mm x 48 mm Specifications
(1/8 DIN)

Multi-inputs Model
and Multi-Ranges TRD16

Large 20mm
Display 4 digit, 20 mm red LED
Red LED Display
Sampling Cycle: 2x/second
2 Times per Second Input Multi (switchable between)
Sampling Code Thermocouple: B, R, S, K, E, J, T, N;
or RTD: Platinum, 100Ω, 3-wire
Voltage (mV, V): 0-10 mVDC,
0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 1-5 VDC
Current: 4-20 mA

Power Requirements
Supply Voltage:
100-240 VAC/50/60 Hz,
24 VAC/VDC (option)
Consumption:
11 VA (AC) Max
7 W (DC) Max

Accuracy ±0.3% + 1 digit of measuring range

Ambient Temperature
Maximum: 122°F (50°C)
Minimum: 14°F (-10°C)

The Trerice TRD16 Digital Indicator The TRD16 Digital Indicator Humidity Maximum: 90% RH
is a superb choice when remote digital is specifically designed to Non-condensing
indication is required. The 2 times interface with the TRS16
per second sampling cycle provides Selector Switch by means of Approximate Shipping Weight
accurate, reliable monitoring, and the an included snap bracket.
0.6 lbs [0.27 kg]
large LED display provides easy
readability. The TRD16 can be used
with any Trerice RTD or Thermocouple.
Size is 96 mm x 48 mm (1/8 DIN).

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: TRD16 8 90 0 4 0

Model Input Power Supply Alarm Analog Output Communication Function

TRD16 8 Multi (T/C, RTD mV, V) 90 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz 0 None 0 None 0 None
4 mA 08 24 VAC or 24 VDC 50/60 Hz 1 High/Low 3 0 to 10 mVDC 5 RS485
4 4 to 20 mA 7 RS232C
6 0 to 10 VDC

146
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Digital Temperature Indicator TRD20
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Microprocessor Based

ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

3.79
.40 3.93
[96.2]
[10.2] [99.8]

1.89
[48.0]

110/ AC
120 GND

3.64 ± .02
[92.4 ± .4]

WIRING DIAGRAM

1.78 ± .01
[45.3 ± .3]

PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

A B
B RTD

+ –

THERMOCOUPLE

Programmable Inputs and Ranges

Input Range
Code Type Code Fahrenheit Code Celsius
1J Type J Thermocouple A71 -148° to 1112°F A26 -100° to 600°C
1K Type K Thermocouple A79 -328° to 2192°F A74 -200° to 1200°C
A72 -148° to 1472°F A27 -100° to 800°C
2F 100 Ω RTD A78 -328° to 1112°F A31 -199.9° to 600.0°C
A61 32.0° to 212.0°F A02 0.00° to 99.99°C
32 0 to 10 mV
34 0 to 50 mV
36 0 to 100 mV
41 0 to 20 mA Scaling Range: -1999 to 9999
42 4 to 20 mA Span: 100 to 10,000
62 0 to 1 V
64 0 to 5 V
66 0 to 10 V

Input and Range Codes are not required for ordering, but are used for field programming.

145
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Digital Temperature Indicator TRD16
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

96 mm x 48 mm Specifications
(1/8 DIN)

Multi-inputs Model
and Multi-Ranges TRD16

Large 20mm
Display 4 digit, 20 mm red LED
Red LED Display
Sampling Cycle: 2x/second
2 Times per Second Input Multi (switchable between)
Sampling Code Thermocouple: B, R, S, K, E, J, T, N;
or RTD: Platinum, 100Ω, 3-wire
Voltage (mV, V): 0-10 mVDC,
0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 1-5 VDC
Current: 4-20 mA

Power Requirements
Supply Voltage:
100-240 VAC/50/60 Hz,
24 VAC/VDC (option)
Consumption:
11 VA (AC) Max
7 W (DC) Max

Accuracy ±0.3% + 1 digit of measuring range

Ambient Temperature
Maximum: 122°F (50°C)
Minimum: 14°F (-10°C)

The Trerice TRD16 Digital Indicator The TRD16 Digital Indicator Humidity Maximum: 90% RH
is a superb choice when remote digital is specifically designed to Non-condensing
indication is required. The 2 times interface with the TRS16
per second sampling cycle provides Selector Switch by means of Approximate Shipping Weight
accurate, reliable monitoring, and the an included snap bracket.
0.6 lbs [0.27 kg]
large LED display provides easy
readability. The TRD16 can be used
with any Trerice RTD or Thermocouple.
Size is 96 mm x 48 mm (1/8 DIN).

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: TRD16 8 90 0 4 0

Model Input Power Supply Alarm Analog Output Communication Function

TRD16 8 Multi (T/C, RTD mV, V) 90 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz 0 None 0 None 0 None
4 mA 08 24 VAC or 24 VDC 50/60 Hz 1 High/Low 3 0 to 10 mVDC 5 RS485
4 4 to 20 mA 7 RS232C
6 0 to 10 VDC

146
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Digital Temperature Indicator TRD16
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT

RTD

PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

Programmable Inputs and Ranges

Thermocouple Input Voltage Input
Code Type Range (°C) Range (°F) Code Type Range (°C) Range (°F)
01 B 0 ~1800 0 ~ 3300 71 0~10mV Initial value: Thermocouple
0.0~100.0 B, R, S, K, E, J, T, N:
02 R 0 ~1700 0 ~ 3100 81 0~ 5V
Scaling JIS/ANSI/IEC
03 S 0 ~1700 0 ~ 3100 82 1~ 5V
setting range: *1 Thermocouple U, L:
04 K -199.9 ~ 800.0 -300 ~ 1500 83 0~10V -1999~9999 DIN 43710
05 K 0 ~1200 0 ~ 2200 Span: *2 Thermocouple
06 E 0 ~ 700 0 ~ 1300 Current Input 10~5000 counts WRe5-26:
95 4~20mA* Made of Hoskins
07 J 0 ~ 600 0 ~ 1100
08 T -199.9 ~ 300.0 -300 ~ 600 *Uses supplied shunt resistor.
09 N 0 ~1300 0 ~ 2300
10 *1 U -199.9 ~ 300.0 -300 ~ 600
11 *1 L 0 ~ 600 0 ~ 1100
12 *2 WRe5-26 0 ~ 2300 0 ~ 4200
RTD Input
31 Pt100Ω -200 ~ 600 -300 ~ 1100
32 Pt100Ω -100.0 ~ 100.0 -150.0 ~ 200.0
Input and Range Codes are not required for ordering, but are used for field programming.

WARNING: The TRD16 Indicator is designed for the control of temperature, humidity and other physical values of general industrial
equipment. (It is not to be used for any purpose which regulates the prevention of serious effects on human life or safety.)
CAUTION: If the possibility of loss or damage to your system or property as a result of failure of any part of the process exists, proper
safety measures must be made before the instrument is put into use so as to prevent the occurrence of trouble.

147
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Indicator Selector Switch TRS16
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

96 mm x 48 mm
(1/8 DIN) Specifications

Two Wire Type Model

Switching Circuit
TRS16
Six-Point
Switching Input Thermocouple

Push Button Switching Method

Operation Push-button switching

Switching Points
Six (all switching points must
use identical sensors)

Switching Circuits
Two wire type

Contact Rating
Voltage: 30 V maximum, AC/DC
Current: 100 mA maximum
Resistance: 300 mΩ
(0.3 ohm) maximum/circuit

Ambient Temperature
Maximum: 122°F (50°C)
Minimum: 14°F (-10°C)

Humidity Maximum: 90% RH

Non-Condensing
The Trerice TRS16 Selector Switch The TRS16 Selector Switch
is the ideal accompaniment for the is specifically designed to Approximate Shipping Weight
Trerice TRD16 Digital Indicator. The interface with the TRD16 0.7 lbs [0.32 kg]
TRS16 allows economical measurement Digital Indicator by means
of multiple individual processes (using of an included snap bracket.
the same thermocouple type) while
requiring only one digital indicator.
The push buttons indicate which
process measurement is currently
displayed on the indicator. Size is
96 mm x 48 mm (1/8 DIN).

148
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Indicator Selector Switch TRS16
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT

PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS WIRING DIAGRAM

Typical Application

Up to six sensors (two leads each)

may share a common display.

WARNING: The TRD16 Indicator is designed for the control of temperature, humidity and other physical values of general industrial
equipment. (It is not to be used for any purpose which regulates the prevention of serious effects on human life or safety.)
CAUTION: If the possibility of loss or damage to your system or property as a result of failure of any part of the process exists, proper
safety measures must be made before the instrument is put into use so as to prevent the occurrence of trouble.

149
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
DESIGN & OPERATION

Description
A thermowell is a pressure tight receptacle designed to accept a temperature sensing element
THERMOWELLS

and provide a means to insert that element into a vessel or pipe.

STEM LENGTH

A
(BULB) LENGTH
BORE DIA.
P
EXTERNAL THREAD

SHANK DIA.
INTERNAL SHANK
THREAD

EXTENSION NECK

T
WRENCH LAGGING U
ALLOWANCE EXTENSION LENGTH

1” THREAD
ALLOWANCE

Principles of Operation
A thermowell acts as a barrier between a process medium and the sensing element of a temperature measuring
device. It protects against corrosive process media, media contained under pressure, or media flowing at a high
velocity. A thermowell also allows the sensing element to be removed from the application while maintaining a
closed system.

150
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Selecting a Thermowell

THERMOWELLS
Temperature Instrumentation and Control Products, including: Thermometers, Thermocouples, RTDs,
and Temperature Controllers.
All Trerice Thermowells should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application. The information
contained in this catalog is only offered as a guide to assist in making the proper selection. Improper application may cause
failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

To ensure minimum response time, Trerice Heat Transfer Paste should be applied to the sensing portion of the instrument
before installation into a thermowell. 1 oz. tube: Item No. 107-0001

Connection
Trerice Thermowells are available in a variety of process connection styles. Threaded connections in 1/2 , 3/4 and
1 NPT are the most widely specified. Socket weld, weld-in, raised face flanged, Van Stone flanged, and sanitary
(Tri-Clamp) connection styles are also available.
All Trerice Bimetal Thermowells are provided with a 1/2 NPSM instrument connection to allow for pressure relief
within the thermowell.

U-Length
The U-length (insertion length) of a thermowell indicates its insertion depth into a process vessel or piping system
and is measured from the tip of the thermowell to the underside of the threads. The U-length must equal or exceed
the length of the sensitive portion of the temperature instrument’s stem or bulb. Trerice Thermowells are available in
U-lengths from 2" to 72".

Material
The material chosen must be compatible with the process medium to which it is exposed. In applications of high
pressure or velocity, the material may be chosen for its strength or durability. Trerice offers thermowells in a variety of
materials, including: brass, carbon steel, stainless steel, Monel, Carpenter 20, Hastelloy B or C, Inconel 600, Incoloy
800, Nickel and Titanium. Other alloys or compounds may also be available, please consult factory.

Threaded, welded and Van Stone flanged thermowells are made from forgings or bar stock. Raised face flanged and
sanitary thermowells are of a two-piece welded construction.

Bore
The bore of each Trerice Thermowell is designed to fit the sensing element of a specific Trerice Temperature
Instrument.

Shank
Trerice Thermowells are available in stepped, tapered, and straight shank configurations. Stepped shank thermowells
are normally used on standard duty applications. Tapered shank thermowells are designed for use on heavy duty
applications. Straight shank thermowells are designed for use with instruments that have wide stem diameters or
short stem lengths.

Lagging Extension
Lagging extension thermowells are used on applications where insulation covers the vessel or piping system.
The extension length (T-length) is the measurement between the instrument connection and process connection
of the thermowell.

151
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
for Industrial Thermometers
• SX9 Solar
• AX9, BX9, CX9 Adjustable Angle Standard
• AX, BX, CX Rigid Stem
THERMOWELLS

• BX Plus
(A)
STEM
1.25 - 18 UNEF LENGTH
Ø.440
(P) [11]
EXTERNAL
THREAD

Ø.62
.50 U [16]
1.06
[13] [27] LENGTH

Lengths
Standard with Lagging Extension
(A) Stem Length U Length (T) U Length
with Lagging Extension
3 /2"
1
2.50 [64] 1.00 [25] 1.70 [43]
6" 5.00 [127] 2.50 [64] 2.50 [64]
8" 7.00 [178] 2.50 [64] 4.50 [114] (A)
STEM
12" 10.50 [267] 3.00 [76] 7.50 [191] LENGTH
Ø.440
1.25 - 18 UNEF [11]
(P)
EXTERNAL
Pressure Rating (psi) THREAD

Operating Temperature
Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F
Carbon Steel 610 550 430 350
304 Stainless Steel 630 570 460 380
316 Stainless Steel 650 600 570 500
.50 (T) 1.00 U Ø.62
Monel 540 480 440 400 [25] LENGTH
[13] LAGGING [16]
Brass 300 psi @ 150˚F, 250 @ 350˚F EXTENSION

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 3-4 F 2

Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Stem Length (T) Lagging Extension Material
3- Industrial 3 1/2 NPT* F 31/2" Stem** A 1" Extension (31/2" Stem only) 2 Brass
4 3/4 NPT J 6" Stem D 21/2" Extension (6" and longer Stem only)† 3 Steel
5 1 NPT L 8" Stem Omit if None 4 Monel
R 12" Stem†† 5 304SS
6 316SS
* Only available with 31/2" stem and 1" extension.
** 31/2" stem Straight Shank.
† 3” extension on 12” stem.
†† 12” stem requires 1 NPT external thread.

152
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
for Dial Thermometers All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Standard
(A)
BULB
LENGTH Ø.447
5/8 - 18 UNF
THERMOWELLS

[11]
(P)
EXTERNAL
THREAD

.31 U
[8] LENGTH Ø.62
[16]
.75
Lengths [19]
Standard with Lagging Extension
(A) Bulb Length U Length (T) U Length
2" 2.13 [54] – –
4" 3.88 [99] 2.00 [51] 2.13 [54]
with Lagging Extension
6" 5.75 [146] 2.00 [51] 3.88 [99]
8" 7.75 [197] 2.00 [51] 5.75 [146]
12" 11.75 [299] 3.00 [76] 7.50 [191] (A)
18" 17.75 [451] 3.00 [76] 15.75 [400] BULB
Ø.447
LENGTH
24" 23.75 [603] 3.00 [76] 21.75 [552] 5/8 - 18 UNF [11]
(P)
EXTERNAL
Pressure Rating (psi) per ASME Boiler Code, Section VIII, Part UG28 THREAD
Operating Temperature
Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F
Carbon Steel 2500 2240 2020 1640
304 Stainless Steel 2780 2280 2100 1700
316 Stainless Steel 2770 2660 2500 2300
Brass 1330 psi @ 150˚F, 1280 @ 350˚F .31 (T) U
1.00
[8] LAGGING [25] LENGTH Ø.62
EXTENSION
[16]

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 7-3 G 2

Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Bulb Length** (T) Lagging Extension Material
7- Dial 3 1/2 NPT D 2" Bulb C 2" Extension (4" and longer Bulb only) 2 Brass
4 3/4 NPT G 4" Bulb E 3" Extension (12" and longer Bulb only) 3 Steel
J 6" Bulb Omit if None 5 304SS
L 8" Bulb 6 316SS
R 12" Bulb*
Wa 18" Bulb*
Wk 24" Bulb*

*Not available with 1/2 NPT external thread. **Dial Thermowells with Bulb
Lengths over 6" are typically for
use with Adjustable Union or
Bendable Extension Connections.

154
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Threaded-Stepped Shank
Standard (21/2” – 6” )
(A)
STEM LENGTH
(P) Ø.260
EXTERNAL

THERMOWELLS
[7]
THREAD

1/2 NPSM

.40 Ø.44
U
[10] LENGTH [11]

.61
[15]

Standard (9 – 24” )
(A)
STEM LENGTH
Lengths
Ø.260
(P)
1/2 NPSM [7] Standard with Lagging Extension
EXTERNAL THREAD
(A) Stem Length U Length (T) U Length
21/2" 1.75 [44] – –
4" 2.50 [64] 0.60 [15] 1.90 [48]
6" 4.50 [114] 2.00 [51] 2.50 [64]
9" 7.50 [191] 3.00 [76] 4.50 [114]
Ø.50
.75 [13]
12" 10.50 [267] 3.00 [76] 7.50 [191]
1.00 U
[19] [25] LENGTH 15" 13.50 [343] 3.00 [76] 10.50 [267]
18" 16.50 [419] 3.00 [76] 13.50 [343]
24" 22.50 [572] 3.00 [76] 19.50 [495]
with Lagging Extension
(A) Pressure Rating (psi)
STEM LENGTH Operating Temperature
Ø.260
(P) [7] Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
1/2 NPSM EXTERNAL THREAD Carbon steel 5000 5000 4800 4600 3500 -
304 stainless steel 6550 6000 4860 4140 3510 3130
316 stainless steel 6540 6400 6000 5270 5180 4660
Monel 5530 4990 4660 4450 4450 -
Brass 3170 psi @ 150˚F, 2930 @ 350˚F

(T) U
.75 LAGGING 1.00 Ø.50
[19] LENGTH
EXTENSION [25] [13]

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and
application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 76-4 J 6

Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Stem Length (T) Lagging Extension Material
76- Bimetal/Sensor 3 1/2 NPT** D 21/2" Stem A 1" Extension (4" Stem only) 2 Brass
Stepped shank* 4 3/4 NPT G 4" Stem C 2" Extension (6" Stem only) 3 Steel
5 1 NPT** J 6" Stem E 3" Extension (9" and longer Stem only) 4 Monel
M 9" Stem Omit if None 5 304SS
R 12" Stem 6 316SS
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
* 21/2” - 6” stem straight shank.
** Not available with 21/2” stem length.

155
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Heavy Duty • Tapered Shank for High Pressure Applications

All dimensions are nominal.

Standard Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters

(A)
THERMOWELLS

STEM LENGTH

Ø.260
1/2 NPSM (P) [7]
EXTERNAL THREAD

Ø.62
.75 1.00 U [16]
[19] [25] LENGTH
Lengths
Standard with Lagging Extension
(A) Stem Length U Length (T) U Length with Lagging Extension
4" 2.50 [64] 1.00 [25] 1.50 [38]
6" 4.50 [114] 2.00 [51] 2.50 [64]
(A)
9" 7.50 [191] 3.00 [76] 4.50 [114] STEM LENGTH
12" 10.50 [267] 3.00 [76] 7.50 [191]
15" 13.50 [343] 3.00 [76] 10.50 [267] (P) Ø.260
18" 16.50 [419] 3.00 [76] 13.50 [343] 1/2 NPSM EXTERNAL THREAD [7]
24" 22.50 [572] 3.00 [76] 19.50 [495]

Pressure Rating (psi)

Operating Temperature
Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
.75 [19]
Brass 5950 5750 5450 5250 4000 - (T) Ø.62
WRENCH
1.00 U
Carbon steel 7800 7050 6300 5360 4350 4100 ALLOWANCE LAGGING LENGTH [16]
EXTENSION
[25]
304 stainless steel 7800 7800 7250 7100 6000 5800
316 stainless steel 7170 6670 6040 5770 5770 -
Brass 4140 psi @ 150˚F, 3790 @ 350˚F

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and
application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 90-4 G 4

Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Stem Length (T) Lagging Extension Material
90- Bimetal/Sensor 4 3/4NPT G 4" Stem C 2" Extension (6" Stem only) 2 Brass
Tapered Shank 5 1 NPT J 6" Stem E 3" Extension (9" and longer Stem only) 3 Steel
M 9" Stem Omit if None 4 Monel
R 12" Stem 5 304SS
V 15" Stem 6 316SS
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem

156
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Socket-Weld Style • Stepped or Heavy Duty Tapered Shank

THERMOWELLS
Stepped Shank 1/2 NPSM (A) Ø.260
STEM LENGTH [7]

(P)
PIPE SIZE

U
LENGTH Ø.50
[13]

Tapered Shank
(A)
1/2 NPSM STEM LENGTH Ø.260
[7]

(P)
PIPE SIZE

Ø.63
U [16]
LENGTH

Lengths Pressure Rating (psi)

(A) Stem Length U Length Operating Temperature
4" 2.50 [64] Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
6" 4.50 [114] Stepped Carbon Steel 5200 5000 4800 4600 3500 -
Shank 304 Stainless Steel 6550 6000 4860 4140 3510 3130
9" 7.50 [191] Other Dimensions
12" 10.50 [267] Nominal Actual 316 Stainless Steel 6540 6400 6000 5270 5180 4660
15" 13.50 [343] Pipe Size (P) Diameter Tapered Carbon Steel 5950 5750 5450 5250 4000 -
Shank 304 Stainless Steel 7800 7050 6300 5360 4350 4100
18" 16.50 [419] 3/4" 1.050 [23.67]
24" 22.50 [572] 1" 1.315 [33.40] 316 Stainless Steel 7800 7800 7250 7100 6700 5800

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and
application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 90-S5 M 6

Thermowell Style (P) Nominal Pipe Size (A) Stem Length Material
76- Bimetal/Sensor S4 3/4" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Stepped Shank S5 1" J 6" Stem 5 304SS
M 9" Stem 6 316SS
90- Bimetal/Sensor R 12" Stem
Tapered Shank V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem

157
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Weld-In Style
THERMOWELLS

All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters

Tapered Shank

(A)
1/2 NPSM STEM LENGTH

Ø.260
[7]

1.50
38]

Ø.63
[16]
U
LENGTH

Lengths Pressure Rating (psi) *

(A) Stem Length U Length Operating Temperature
4" 2.50 [64] Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
6" 4.50 [114] Carbon steel 5950 5750 5450 5250 4000 -
9" 7.50 [191] 304 stainless steel 7800 7050 6300 5360 4350 4100
316 stainless steel 7800 7800 7250 7100 6700 5800
12" 10.50 [267]
15" 13.50 [343] * Thermowell Pressure ratings for CRN differ from those shown above. Please
18" 16.50 [419] see CRN under Approvals in Technical Specifications of our website.
24" 22.50 [572]

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered. Improper
application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and application,
please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 90-W7 V 6

Thermowell Style Connection (A) Stem Length Material

90- Bimetal/Sensor W7 11/2" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Tapered Shank J 6" Stem 5 304SS
M 9" Stem 6 316SS
R 12" Stem
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem

158
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Flanged Style • Straight or Heavy Duty Tapered Shank

Straight Shank Tapered Shank

THERMOWELLS
(A)
(A)
STEM LENGTH
Ø.260 STEM LENGTH
FLANGE SIZE AND [7] FLANGE SIZE AND
RATING RATING
WELD AS REQUIRED
Ø.260
AS REQUIRED
WELD [7]
1/2 NPSM WELD
1/2 NPSM WELD

Ø.75 Ø.62
[19] [16]
U U
LENGTH LENGTH

Pressure Rating
Maximum pressure and temperature ratings are limited by the choice of
flange. Please see ANSI/ASME B16.5-2003 for more information.
Lengths
(A) Stem Length U Length
4" 2.00 [51]
6" 4.00 [102]
9" 7.00 [178]
12" 10.00 [254]
15" 13.00 [330]
18" 16.00 [406]
24" 22.00 [559]

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and
application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 78-81 J 6

Thermowell Type Flange Size and Rating (A) Stem Length Material
78- Bimetal/Sensor 51 1" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Straight Shank 71 11/2" 150# RFF J 6" Stem 4 Monel
81 2" M 9" Stem 5 304SS
90- Bimetal/Sensor 181 3" R 12" Stem 6 316SS
Tapered Shank V 15" Stem
53 1" Wa 18" Stem
73 11/2" 300# RFF Wk 24" Stem
83 2"
183 3"

56 1"
76 11/2" 600# RFF
86 2"
186 3"
Other Flange Sizes and Ratings
available; consult factory.

159
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Van Stone Style
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters..

Straight Shank
THERMOWELLS

(A)
STEM LENGTH
1/2 NPSM
Ø.260
[7]

(R)
RAISED (P)
FACE DIA. DIA.

Ø.75
[15]

U
LENGTH

Thermowell does not include

backing flange; when required,
a carbon steel backing flange
can be supplied. Consult factory.

Lengths Other Dimensions

(A) Stem Length U Length Nominal Actual Raised Face
Pipe Size (P) Diameter (R) Diameter
4" 2.00 [51]
1" 1.32 [33] 2.00 [51]
6" 4.00 [102]
11/2" 1.90 [48] 2.88 [73]
9" 7.00 [178]
12" 10.00 [254]
15" 13.00 [330]
Pressure Rating
18" 16.00 [406]
Maximum pressure and temperature ratings are limited by the choice of
24" 22.00 [559] flange. Please see ANSI/ASME B16.5-2003 for more information.

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and
application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 78-V7 R 6

Thermowell Style (P) Nominal Pipe Size (A) Stem Length Material
78- Bimetal/Sensor V5 1" G 4" Stem 3 Steel
Straight Shank V7 11/2" J 6" Stem 4 Monel
M 9" Stem 5 304SS
R 12" Stem 6 316SS
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem

160
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
All dimensions are nominal.
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
for Bimetal Thermometers & Temperature Sensors
Sanitary Style

Stepped

THERMOWELLS
1/2 NPSM (A)
STEM LENGTH
Ø.260
END CAP
WELD SIZE AS REQUIRED [7]

WELD

FINISH: 16-20 RA
ROUGHNESS AVERAGE 240 GRIT
Ø.50
[13]
U
LENGTH

Lengths
(A) Stem Length U Length Designed to meet 3A Dairy Certification
4" 2.50 [64] requirements.
6" 4.50 [114] Pressure ratings are dependent upon
9" 7.50 [191] the clamps, gaskets and ferrules used,
12" 10.50 [267] which are not supplied by Trerice.
15" 13.50 [343]
18" 16.50 [419]
24" 22.50 [572]

Alternative materials and accessories are also available. Please consult the Options and Accessories Section for details.
Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and
application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers and Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 76-T8 M 6

Thermowell Type End Cap Size (A) Stem Length Material

76- Bimetal/Sensor T7 11/2" G 4" Stem 5 304SS
Stepped Shank T8 2" J 6" Stem 6 316SS
T18 3" M 9" Stem
R 12" Stem
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem

161
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
Options & Accessories

Alternative Materials
Trerice offers a variety of alternative thermowell materials to ensure compatibility with special service applications.
Please order using the material code listed in the table below. Other alloys or compounds may also be available,
THERMOWELLS

please consult factory.

Code Material
7 Carpenter 20
8 Hastelloy B
9 Hastelloy C
10 Inconel 600
11 Incoloy 800
12 Nickel
13 Titanium

Protective Caps for Test Wells

A cap and lanyard is available to keep the thermowell bore clean when used in non permanent instrument installations.
Please order using the item numbers listed in the table below.

Thermowell Cap Material

Style Aluminum Brass Steel Stainless Steel
Industrial N/A 026-0032A N/A N/A
Econo N/A N/A 116-0193A N/A
Dial 026-0001A N/A N/A N/A
Bimetal or Sensor N/A 026-0034A N/A 026-0034.1A

Thermowell Conversion Kits

A Thermowell Conversion Kit permits the installation of a Trerice Bimetal Thermometer into an existing Industrial
Thermometer thermowell. The kit includes an aluminum stem spacer, a brass (400°F max.) or stainless steel (750°F max.)
1/2" NPT x 11/4-18 bushing, and a tube of heat transfer paste. Maximum operating temperature 750°F.

Description Item Number

Thermowell Adapter Kit; Industrial to Bimetal 001-0099A (400°F max.)
High Temperature Thermowell Adapter Kit; Industrial to Bimetal 001-0099AH (750°F max.)

Industrial Thermowell Bimetal Thermometer

(A) Length Stem Length Required
31/2" 4" Stem
6" 7" Stem (special order length)
8" 9" Stem

Heat Transfer Paste

To ensure minimum response time, Trerice Heat Transfer Paste should be applied to the sensing portion of the
instrument before installation into a thermowell.
Description Item Number
1 oz. Tube 107-0001

162
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Notes

THERMOWELLS

163
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
163
 Table of Contents
REGULATORS & CONTROL VALVES
The Control Loop 166-167
REGULATORS & CONTROL VALVES

The necessary components to provide basic, single-loop process control.

Temperature Regulators Design & Operation 168-173

Provide reliable
temperature control
91000 Series (91000, 91400 & 91600) 174-176
without the need
for an external Thermowells for 91000 Series 177
power source.
Thermal System Selection for 91000 Series 178-179
Valve Bodies for 91000 & 91400 180-187
Valve Bodies for 91600 188

91000XT Series Tank Thermostat 190

Thermowells for 91000XT 191

Pressure Regulators Design & Operation 192-195

Suitable for a variety
of pressure regulating 921 Series (High Capacity) 196
and pressure reducing
applications. 988 Series (Steam) 198
1002 Series (Water) 200

1100 Series Pipeline Strainer 202

Controllers Design & Operation 203-205

Electronic PID and TR890 Series Electronic PID Controller 206
Electric Contact
controllers providing L84000 Series Electric Contact Controller 208
single-loop control.
Thermal System Selection for L84000 210
Thermowells for L84000 212

164
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Table of Contents
REGULATORS & CONTROL VALVES
Controller Accessories Solenoid Valve 960 Series 214

REGULATORS & CONTROL VALVES

Products required for
the design and
I/P Transducer TA901 216
installation of a Air Filter/Regulator TA987 217
complete control loop.
Solid State Relay TA600 218
Enclosure TA302 219
Temperature Sensors RTD & Thermocouple 220
Thermowells for Temperature Sensors 221

Control Valves Design & Operation 222-227

Pneumatic and
Electric operated valves,
910 Series Compact Control Valve 228
available in a variety of 910 Valve Body • Bronze (Single Seat) 230
body materials including 910 Valve Body • Bronze (Double Seat) 231
Bronze, Cast Iron and 910 Valve Body • Cast Iron (Double Seat) 232
Stainless steel. Control 910 Valve Body • Cast Steel (Single Seat) 233
valves are the final 910 Valve Body • Stainless Steel (Single Seat) 234
element of a control 910T Valve Body • Bronze 235
loop.
910T 3-Way Valve • Bronze 236
910T 3-Way Valve • Cast Iron 237
910T 3-Way Valve • Stainless Steel 238
910EP Valve Body • Bronze (Equal Percentage) 239

940 Series Heavy-Duty Control Valve 240

940 Valve Body • Bronze (Single Seat) 242
940 Valve Body • Cast Iron (Single Seat) 243
940 Valve Body • Cast Iron (Double Seat) 244
940 Valve Body • Stainless Steel (Single Seat) 245
940 3-Way Valve • Bronze 246
940 3-Way Valve • Stainless Steel 247
940 3-Way Valve • Cast Iron 248

940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve 250

940E Valve Body • Bronze (Single Seat) 252
940E Valve Body • Cast Iron (Single Seat) 253
940E Valve Body • Cast Iron (Double Seat) 254
940E Valve Body • Stainless Steel (Single Seat) 255
940E 3-Way Valve • Bronze 256
940E 3-Way Valve • Cast Iron 258
940E 3-Way Valve • Stainless Steel 260
Technical Information 261-267

165
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Control Loop
Understanding a Control Loop
INTRODUCTION

1 Sense
Control Loop
Measure the current condition of the process using a
A control loop is a process management sensor, which can be an electronic (thermocouple, RTD or
system designed to maintain a process transmitter) or a mechanical device (thermal system).
variable at a desired set point. Each
step in the loop works in conjunction
2 Compare
with the others to manage the system. Evaluate the measurement of the current condition against the
Once the set point has been established, set point using an electronic or electric contact controller.
the control loop operates using a 3 Respond
four-step process. React to any error that may exist by generating a corrective
pneumatic or electric control signal.
4 Affect
Actuate a final control element (valve, heater or other
device) that will produce a change in the process variable.
The loop continually cycles through the steps, affecting the
process variable in order to maintain the desired set point.
Trerice is unique in its ability to provide all of the necessary
components to create a complete control loop.

166
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Control Loop

The following list are components required to create a basic control loop.

INTRODUCTION
All products can be found within this catalog.

Electro-Pneumatic Control Loop (PID)

Temperature Pressure
• Thermocouple or RTD Temperature Sensor Sense • 700Plus Series Industrial Transmitter Gauge
• Thermowell

• TR890 Series Electronic Controller Compare-Respond • TR890 Series Electronic Controller

• No. TA901 I/P Transducer • No. TA901 I/P Transducer
• No. TA987 Air Filter/Regulator • No. TA987 Air Filter/Regulator

• 910 or 940 Series Control Valve Affect • 910 or 940 Series Control Valve
• 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer • 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer

Electric Control Loop (PID)

Temperature Pressure
• Thermocouple or RTD Temperature Sensor Sense • 700Plus Series Industrial Transmitter Gauge
• Thermowell

• TR890 Series Electronic Controller Compare-Respond • TR890 Series Electronic Controller

• 940E Series Control Valve Affect • 940E Series Control Valve

• 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer • 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer

Electric Control Loop (On/Off)

Temperature
• L84000 Series Electric Contact Controller Sense-Compare-Respond
• Thermowell

• 960 Series Solenoid Valve Affect

• 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer

Self-Operating Regulation Loop (Proportional)

Temperature Pressure
• 91000 Series Temperature Regulator Sense-Compare-Respond-Affect • 921 Series Pressure Regulator
• Thermowell • 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer
• 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer

167
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Temperature Regulators
DESIGN & OPERATION
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

CAPILLARY TUBING

CONNECTION
DIAL THERMOMETER
(Model 91400 only)

BELLOWS

OVERRANGE
PROTECTION SPRING SENSING BULB

RANGE ADJUSTMENT SPRING

CAP

ADJUSTMENT SCREW
BUSHING
ADJUSTING BAR
YOKE
SET POINT SCALE
TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT SCREW JAM NUTS
PACKING NUT
TEFLON V-RING PACKING
BONNET NUT
VALVE STEM

STAINLESS STEEL SEATS

VALVE PLUG

VALVE BODY

Housing Assembly
The housing consists of a cap and yoke constructed from precision die cast aluminum. This assembly
ensures permanent alignment with the valve body, while protecting the bellows assembly. The yoke
includes a set point scale used to reference the setting of the temperature adjustment screw. The entire
housing is finished in a corrosion resistant, baked blue epoxy.

168
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
Description
The Self-Operating Temperature Regulator is a mechanically operated device designed to regulate system
temperature by modulating the flow of a heating or cooling fluid in response to temperature changes.

Principles of Operation
The Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature Regulator is a fully self-contained unit, requiring no external power
source (i.e., compressed air or electricity). Regulation takes place when the sensing element (bulb) of the
thermal system is exposed to changes in temperature. The thermal system is charged with a predeter-
mined amount of vapor fill, which, when heated, will cause a bellows within the unit’s actuator housing to
expand. As the bellows expands, it compresses a return spring while simultaneously moving the valve
stem downward to stroke the valve. When the process temperature decreases (or in the event of thermal
system failure), the return spring will move the valve stem upward to the “out” position. The choice of
valve action (stem In-To-Close or stem In-To-Open) will determine its system failure position.

Selecting a Temperature Regulator

Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature
The Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature Regulator is recommended for Regulators are NOT intended
controlling the flow on relatively stable systems, where small valve stroke for use in applications where
modulations will correct temperature drift. Where sudden or large load the media comes in direct
contact with the skin or body,
changes, or rapid temperature changes occur, a pneumatically or
such as showers, baths,
electrically powered Trerice Control Valve should be specified. Please lavatories or wash fountains.
consult the Control Valve Section of this catalog.

Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature Regulators should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application.
The information contained within this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper selection. Selection
of the proper temperature regulator is the sole responsibility of the user. Improper application may cause failure, resulting
in possible personal injury or property damage.

Actuator
The actuator consists of the following assemblies: housing, bellows and spring return, and thermal
system. Three actuator models are available:
• Model 91000 is non-indicating and direct acting.
• Model 91400 is equipped with an integral dial thermometer to indicate sensing bulb temperature
and is direct acting.
• Model 91600 (Fail-Safe) is non-indicating and direct acting. It is specifically designed to cause the
valve to move to the cooler position in case of thermal system failure.

Actuator: Direct Acting

Direct Acting actuators are designed to move the valve stem to the “in” position as the control signal (temperature) increases.

169
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Temperature Regulators
DESIGN & OPERATION
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Bellows and Spring Return Assembly

The accordion type bellows is corrosion resistant to provide accurate response for the life of the
regulator. An adjusting bar is provided to turn the brass temperature adjustment screw, which
compresses or expands the range adjustment spring, thereby setting the control point of the unit.

Thermal System Assembly

The thermal system (sensing bulb and capillary tubing) is available in copper (for best heat transfer)
or 316 stainless steel (for corrosive applications), and can be ordered with a variety of protective
coverings, including Teflon or stainless steel spiral armor. Capillary tubing lengths can be specified
from 8 to 52 feet.

Integral Dial Thermometer Sensing Bulb Installation:

The integral dial thermometer (Model 91400 only) displays the Care must be taken to ensure
that entire length of the sensing
temperature at the sensing bulb. This allows for easy adjustment of bulb is immersed into the
the temperature set point, as well as for continuous monitoring of the medium at the sensing location.
Partial immersion will result in
application, without the installation of an additional thermometer. The faulty control. When the sensing
thermometer has a 31/2" dialface and can be rotated and tilted for bulb is installed into a pipeline,
constant flow must be continued
maximum readability. through the line in order to
maintain an active thermal signal
to the bulb. Should a closed
Temperature Range valve cause stoppage of flow to
the bulb, a reduced bypass flow
Nominal ranges from 20°F (-10°C) through 440°F (225°C) are available. must be installed to maintain
The nominal range defines the entire temperature range of the unit. thermal signal.
The service conditions and the choice of valve style and action will
The sensing bulb is designed to
determine the actual operating range (recommended working span) of be installed in either a horizontal
the unit. The nominal range should be selected so the set point falls position or a vertical position
with the tip down. If the tip must
within the recommended working span for the specified valve style be installed upwards, please
and action. Models 91000 and 91400 include an overrange protection specify when when ordering, as
a special bulb construction is
spring, which allows the sensing bulb to be heated 100°F above the required.
upper limit of the unit’s nominal range for system cleaning or
temporary situations.

Accuracy
The Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature Regulator is a “set-and-forget” regulating device. Once the
proper control point setting has been achieved, the unit requires virtually no adjustments and very
little maintenance. Control point accuracy is dependent upon the sensing bulb location, load change
size and speed, and valve size. The sensing bulb must be installed in an area within the process that
is most representative of overall process conditions. Care should be taken not to locate the bulb in close
proximity to the valve, as the regulator might respond to temperature changes before the process has
had time to reach the control point. Where sudden or large load changes occur, a pneumatically
or electrically powered Trerice Control Valve should be specified. Please consult the Control Valve
Section of this catalog.

170
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
Accuracy (continued)

Valve sizing also plays a major part in regulator performance. A valve that is too small will not be able to
provide the desired capacity during peak load conditions, while a valve that is too large may overshoot the
control point and operate with the valve plug too close to the seat, resulting in undue wear of the plug and
seat. As part of a well-designed system, a properly sized valve (operating in the 60-90% open position) can
control to within 2° to 5°F.

Valve
Temperature Regulators
Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature Regulators are available with a wide variety of globe are not considered
shut-off valves. A
valves in various styles, materials, connections and sizes. pressure surge may
force a single seated
valve plug open. The
Style Trerice Temperature
Regulator is a balanced
Trerice Regulator Valves are offered in single seated, double seated and three-way equilibrium system at
designs. the set point and
provides no power to
tightly seat the valve
• Single Seated Valves are designed for applications where tighter shut off plug. A separate power
is required. However, this design is unbalanced and limited in the pressure driven or hand actuated
valve is required to
that it will shut-off against. The leakage rate is approximately 0.1% of the ensure tight shut-off
maximum capacity. when necessary.

• Double Seated Valves are nearly pressure balanced and, therefore, are able Trerice 3-Way Valve are
to close the valve plug against higher operating pressures. However, since not designed for use in
temperature fluctuations may cause expansion and contraction across the steam applications.

seats, tight shut-off is not always possible. The leakage rate is approximately
0.5% of the maximum capacity. Double seated valves have a faster flow
response and greater capacity than single seated valves, and are recom-
mended when tight shut-off is not required.

• 3-Way Valves are used for mixing two flows together, or for diverting a flow
to or around a device (bypass). In order to produce consistent flow quantity
for stable operation, the pressure drop across both flow paths (inlet to outlet)
must be nearly equal.
3-Way Valves are of the Sleeve Type (common port on the bottom). This
type is most commonly used for diverting applications, however due to its
design it can also be used for mixing applications. The Sleeve Type design
is constructed with an O-ring around the sleeve. This O-ring is suitable for
water or glycol type service, up to a maximum of 300˚F. A higher temperature
O-ring for use with other fluids, such as oil, or for temperatures up to 410˚F
is available. Consult factory.

Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature Regulators are NOT intended for use in applications where
the media comes in direct contact with the skin or body, such as showers, baths, lavatories
or wash fountains.

171
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Temperature Regulators
DESIGN & OPERATION
Action
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Trerice Single and Double Seated Valves are available as stem In-To-Close (Normally Open) for
heating applications, or stem In-To-Open (Normally Closed) for cooling applications. The action
of bronze bodied valves is field reversible. Trerice 3-Way Valves can be plumbed for either mixing
or diverting service.

Temperature Regulator Valve Action

Application Stem Action Normal (Fail*) Position
Heating In-To-Close Normally Open
Cooling In-To-Open Normally Closed
*91000 and 91400 only. 91600 is designed to fail in the cooler position.

Body Material and Connection

Trerice “Self-Op” Temperature Regulators are available with bronze, cast-iron, cast steel and stainless
steel valve bodies. Union, flanged and threaded connection styles are available.

Trim
Valve trim is composed of the stem and plug assembly, and the seats within the ports. Trerice single and
double seated bronze bodied valves employ a stainless steel, tapered plug for enhanced modulation, as
well as permanently brazed-in stainless steel seats for smooth performance throughout the life of the
valve. The valve plug is both top and bottom guided to ensure positive seating alignment. Trerice 3-Way
valves use a stainless steel sleeve and brass seating surface to change flow direction within the body.

Packing
Trerice valves feature a self-energizing Teflon V-Ring packing, which reduces leakage around the valve
stem. V-Ring packing is spring loaded to maintain proper compression and does not require manual
adjustment.

Size
The proper sizing of a regulating valve is one of the most important factors
in its selection. A valve that is too small will not be able to provide the
Valve Coefficient (Cv)
desired capacity during peak load conditions, while a valve that is too large
The rated valve coefficient
may overshoot the control point and operate with the valve plug too close to is used to describe the
the seat, resulting in undue wear of the plug and seat. The valve coefficient relative flow capacity
of the valve based on
(Cv) is mathematically determined through an evaluation of the system standard test conditions.
service conditions (operating pressures and flow). From this evaluation, Please refer to the Valve
Selection Section for
a valve body with the appropriate port size can be selected. Port sizes from detailed information.
1/8" through 6" and connection sizes from 1/2" through 6" are available.

Please consult the Valve Selection Section of this catalog.

172
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
Temperature Regulator Valve Availability
Size
Body Material Connection Style 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4" 5" 6"
Bronze Iron Unions Single ✓* ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Double ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Cast-Iron Class 125 Flanged Double ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓
Cast-Steel Threaded Single ✓* ✓*
Stainless Steel Threaded Single ✓* ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
*Reduced port sizes are available.

100
Percent of Maximum Flow

80

60 Plug Design
Modified Linear

40

20

0 20 40 60 80 100
Percent of Stem Travel

Thermowell
For applications in which the process media may be corrosive or contained To ensure minimum response
under pressure, the use of a thermowell is required to prevent damage to the time, Trerice Heat Transfer
sensing bulb. A thermowell will also facilitate the removal of the sensing bulb Paste should be applied to the
sensing portion of the bulb
and thermal system from the operating process. Thermowells are available in before installation.
a variety of connection styles, materials and lengths.
1 oz. tube: Item No. 107-0001

Pipeline Strainer
A Trerice Series 1100 Pipeline Strainer should always be installed upstream of a Trerice Regulator.
This Y-Type strainer employs a stainless steel screen to remove debris from the line, which will prevent
jamming of the valve and extend its life. See “Pressure Regulator Section.”

173
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 91000 Series Temperature Regulator
The “Self-Op” (Self-Operated Temperature Regulator)
Self-Operating Design
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Indicating, Non Indicating or

Safety Models Available
Heavy Duty Die Cast Aluminum Housing

Indicating Dial Thermal System: / " thru 6" Valve Sizes

1 2

(Model 91400 Capillary &

only) Sensing Bulb
Fully Enclosed Bellows
Internal Overrange protection

The 91000 Series (Models 91000, 91400 &

91600) Self-Operating Temperature Regulator
is the preferred choice of original equipment
manufacturers, mechanical contractors and
specifying engineers. These regulators require no
external power source and are ideal for regulating
the temperature of tanks, process streams and
various types of industrial equipment. The Actutator
is noted for its rugged die-cast aluminum housing,
fully enclosed bellows assembly and internal over
range protection.
Valve bodies for the 91000 are offered in single-
Actuator seated, double-seated and 3-way designs and are
available in Bronze, Cast-Iron, Cast-Steel and
Stainless Steel construction.
The Model 91000 (without indicating dial)
features a lower profile and should be specified
where space constraints may be an issue.
The Model 91400 (with indicating dial) will allow
the operator to verify the process temperature and
to aid in temperature adjustment.
The Model 91600 Fail-Safe Actuator is designed
to cause the valve to fail in the safe control
position (open in a cooling application, closed in
a heating application) should accidental damage
to the thermal system occur, resulting in loss of
the pressure charge.
For optimal performance, the service conditions
(medium, flow, temperature, inlet and outlet pressures)
Valve of the application must be considered when selecting
Body a valve. Please refer to the Valve Selection Section of
this catalog. For applications where the process
media may be corrosive or contained under pressure,
the use of a thermowell is required to prevent damage
to the regulator bulb and facilitate its removal from
the process. Improper application may cause failure
of the valve, resulting in possible personal injury or
91400 shown property damage.

For replacement or service parts please see

Accessories and Replacement Parts in the Regulators
and Control Valves section of the list price sheet.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 91400 R06 08 B01 W01 - A26

Models Range Capillary Length Thermal System Thermowell* Valve Body Selection
91000 Non-Indicating Refer to 08 8 Feet Refer to Thermal W01 - Brass For 91000/91400 Models
91400 Indicating Dial Standard 12 12 Feet System Selection W02 - Steel (refer to pages 180-187)
91600 Fail Safe Ranges 16 16 Feet Chart W04 - 316SS For 91600 Models (refer to page 188)
(page 176) 20 20 Feet (pages 178-179) (Omit if not (Omit this selection if purchasing Actuator only)
required)
* Thermowell sized to fit Other Capillary Lengths available: Specify in 4 Foot increments (52' maximum)
bulb as specified.

174
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 91000 Series
Temperature Regulator
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Specifications

TEMPERATURE REGULATORS
Actuator Models
91000
91000 (Non-Indicating)
91400 (Indicating Dial) Non-Indicating
91600 (Fail-Safe)
Actuator
Power Requirements
Fully self-contained –
no external power required
Dial Thermometer
31/2" dial, stainless steel case,
swivel and angle adjustment
(Model 91400 only) 9.00
[228]
Housing Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder
coated blue finish

Set Point Integral to housing

Scale
Bellows High pressure brass, corrosion
resistant, tin plated finish

Adjustment Screw
Brass Ø3.63
[92]
Adjustment Screw Bushing
Lubricant impregnated
sintered bronze

Range Adjustment Spring

91400
Cadmium Plated
Indicating Ø3.67
[93]
Overrange Protection
Upper range limit +100°F for Actuator
temporary situations
(not available for Model 91600)

Approximate Shipping Weight

Actuator 4.92
[125]
91000: 6.0 lbs [2.70 kg]
91400: 6.6 lbs [2.97 kg]
91600: 9.5 lbs [4.32 kg]
Valve
See Valve Selection tables

91600 7.00
[178]

Fail-Safe
Actuator 9.00
[228]

8.75
[222]

Ø3.63
[92]

175
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Temperature Ranges
The “Self-Op” Temperature Regulator (91000, 91400, & 91600 Models)
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Standard Ranges
91000 & 91400 Actuators
Recommended Working Span
Single Seat, In-To-Close Valves
Double Seat, In-To-Close Valves
Double Seat, In-To-Open Valves Single Seat Dial Thermometer Range
Range Code Nominal Range All 3-Way Valves In-To-Open Valves (Model 91400 only)
R01* 20° to 70°F & -10° to 20°C 40° to 65°F & 5° to 20°C N/A 30° to 115°F & C
R02* 40° to 90°F & 5° to 30°C 65° to 85°F & 20° to 30°C N/A 50° to 140°F & C
R03 30° to 115°F & 0° to 45°C 85° to 110°F & 30° to 45°C 50° to 80°F & 10° to 25°C 30° to 115°F & C
R04 50° to 140°F & 10° to 60°C 110° to 135°F & 45° to 60°C 80° to 105°F & 25° to 45°C 50° to 140°F & C
R05 75° to 165°F & 25° to 70°C 135° to 160°F & 60° to 70°C 105° to 130°F & 40° to 50°C 75° to 165°F & C
R06 105° to 195°F & 40° to 90°C 160° to 190°F & 70° to 90°C 130° to 155°F & 50° to 65°C 105° to 195°F & C
R07 125° to 215°F & 55° to 100°C 190° to 210°F & 90° to 100°C 155° to 180°F & 65° to 80°C 125° to 215°F & C
R09 155° to 250°F & 70° to 120°C 210° to 245°F & 100° to 120°C 180° to 215°F & 80° to 100°C 155° to 250°F & C
R10 200° to 280°F & 95° to 135°C 245° to 275°F & 120° to 135°C 215° to 245°F & 100° to 120°C 200° to 280°F & C
R11 225° to 315°F &110° to 155°C 275° to 310°F & 135° to 155°C 245° to 280°F & 120° to 140°C 225° to 315°F & C
R12 255° to 370°F &125° to 185°C 305° to 365°F & 155° to 185°C 275° to 335°F & 135° to 165°C 255° to 370°F & C
R13 295° to 420°F &145° to 215°C 365° to 415°F & 185° to 215°C 335° to 385°F & 165° to 195°C 295° to 420°F & C
R14 310° to 440°F &155° to 225°C 415° to 435°F & 215° to 225°C 385° to 405°F & 195° to 205°C 310° to 440°F & C
*Not recommended for single seated valves.

The recommended working span typically falls within the upper third of the nominal range. Single Seat In-To-Close, all
Double Seat, and all 3-Way valves have a recommended working span in this part of the nominal range. However, due to
differing thrust requirements, Single Seat In-To-Open valves have a recommended working span in the middle one-third
of the nominal range.

Standard Ranges
91600 Fail-Safe Actuators
Range Nominal Range
Code and Recommended Working Span
R81 40° to 65°F & 5° to 20°C
R82 55° to 80°F & 15° to 25°C
R83 65° to 90°F & 20° to 30°C
R84 80° to 110°F & 25° to 40°C
R85 90° to 115°F & 30° to 45°C
R86 110° to 140°F & 40° to 60°C
R89 140° to 175°F & 60° to 80°C
R90 170° to 195°F & 80° to 90°C
R91 190° to 210°F & 85° to 100°C
R92 205° to 225°F & 95° to 105°C
R93 215° to 250°F & 100° to 120°C
R94 230° to 265°F & 110° to 130°C
R95 245° to 280°F & 120° to 135°C
R96 270° to 300°F & 135° to 150°C

176
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
for Temperature Regulator (91000, 91400, & 91600 Models)
If Thermowells are to be purchased as a separate item, or if a Special Thermowell is required, please refer to this page. If a complete

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
Temperature Regulator is purchased, the proper Thermowell to match the sensing bulb ordered will be supplied.
Please note sensing bulb size is affected by capillary length. Indicate WO1 for Brass, W02 for Steel or W04 for 316SS.

Thermowell to fit Standard Bulb All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Threaded Flanged
(A)
BULB LENGTH
(A)
1.25-18 UNEF (P) BULB LENGTH
EXTERNAL THREAD
1.25-18 UNEF (P) FLANGE SIZE AND
THD. RATING AS REQUIRED
Ø1.10 [28]
Ø1.10 [28]
WRENCH
ALLOWANCE
U
1" LENGTH
THREAD
U
LENGTH
ALLOWANCE

Pressure Rating (psi) Lengths

Maximum pressure and temperature
Operating Temperature (A) BULB LENGTH U Length ratings are limited by the choice of
Material 70°F 300°F 500°F 13" 12.25 [311] flange. Please see ANSI/ASME
Carbon Steel 850 850 680 16" 15.25 [387] B16.5-2003 for more information.
316 Stainless Steel 850 780 730 20" 19.25 [489]
Brass 480 psi @ 150˚F, 400 @ 350˚F 24" 23.25 [591]

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 53-6S6

Thermowell Style (P) External Connection (A) Bulb Length Material

53 - Temperature Regulator 6 11/4 NPT S 13" Bulb 2 Brass (500 psi max.)
71 11/2" 150# RFF * Se 16" Bulb 3 Steel (500 psi max.)
81 2" 150# RFF * We 20" Bulb 6 316SS (1000 psi max.)
181 3" 150# RFF * Wk 24" Bulb
* Not available in Brass.
Other connections and lengths may be available, consult factory.

Thermowell to fit Special “Small” Bulb

Lengths
(A)
BULB LENGTH (A) Bulb Length Thermowell U Length
1.25-18 UNEF (P) 9" 8.25 [210]
EXTERNAL THREAD 12" 11.25 [286]

Ø0.90 [23] Pressure Rating (psi)

Operating Temperature
WRENCH Material 70°F 300°F 500°F
ALLOWANCE
Carbon Steel 850 850 680
U
1" LENGTH 316 Stainless Steel 850 780 730
THREAD
ALLOWANCE Brass 480 psi @ 150˚F, 400 @ 350˚F

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 53-5M2

Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Bulb Length Material

53 - Temperature Regulator 5 1 NPT M 9" Bulb 2 Brass (500 psi max.)
R 12" Bulb 3 Steel (500 psi max.)
6 316SS (1000 psi max.)

Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

177
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermal System Selection
Temperature Regulator (91000, 91400, & 91600 Models)
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Connection Style Capillary

Bulb and Capillary Style Order Code & Material Bulb Material Tubing Material
Union Connection
B01 Brass Copper Copper
Union Hub
CONNECTING
TUBING HUB H

U D
B10 Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
A Union Hub
CONNECTION
NUT

Adjustable Union Connection B02 Brass Copper Copper

Union Hub
CONNECTING
TUBING Adjustable over entire capillary length
U D

B04 Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel

A
Union Hub
ADJUSTABLE UNION
HUB H Adjustable over entire capillary length

Plain Bulb B05 None Copper Copper

CONNECTING
TUBING

X D
B06 None Stainless Steel Stainless Steel

Teflon Covered Bulb B08 None Copper with Copper with

Teflon Covering Teflon Covering
CONNECTING
TUBING
SEALED
END 450°F (232°C) Maximum Temperature
X
B07 None Stainless Steel with Stainless Steel with
Teflon Covering Teflon Covering
D
TEFLON COVER
OVERALL 450°F (232°C) Maximum Temperature

Union Connection with Spiral Armor B15 Brass Copper Copper with Stainless
Union Hub Steel Spiral Armor
ARMORED
CONNECTING
TUBING HUB H
D
U
B16 Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel with
Union Hub Stainless Steel Spiral Armor
A
CONNECTION
NUT

Bulb Pressure Limits: Copper = 250 psi, Stainless Steel = 500 psi

178
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Bulb Dimensions & Minimum Insertion Lengths
Standard Bulb Special “Small” Bulb

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
91000 / 91400 91600 91000 / 91400 91600
Capillary Length Capillary Length
Dim. 8 to 16 Feet 20 Feet 24 to 36 Feet 40 to 52 Feet 8 Feet* Order Code All All

A 13" 16" 20" 24" 16" SB01 9" 12"

U 12.25" 15.25" 19.25" 23.25" 15.25" 8.25" 11.25"
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 3/4" 3/4"

H 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT

A 13" 16" 20" 24" 16" SB10 9" 12"

U 12.25" 15.25" 19.25" 23.25" 15.25" 8.25" 11.25"
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 3/4" 3/4"

H 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT

A 13" 16" 20" 24" 16"

U 12.25" 15.25" 19.25" 23.25" 15.25"
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1"
H 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT

A 13" 16" 20" 24" 16"

Note: This bulb is available for
U 12.25" 15.25" 19.25" 23.25" 15.25" applications where space considerations
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" exist, and may only be used when the
H 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT temperature of the actuator housing will
always remain lower than that of the
sensing bulb. If the temperature of
X 13" 16" 20" 24" 16" the actuator housing rises above the
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" sensing bulb temperature, the unit will
not operate properly. The temperature of
the actuator housing is dependent upon
both the surrounding environment and
X 13" 16" 20" 24" 16" the temperature of the flow medium
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" and may easily reach 150°F on steam
service.
This bulb is only available on union
connected thermal systems.
X 15" 18" 22" 26" 18"
D 1.16" 1.16" 1.16" 1.16" 1.16" Always use the Standard Bulb unless
special requirements exist and full
details of the application are known,
consult factory.

X 15" 18" 22" 26" 18"

D 1.16" 1.16" 1.16" 1.16" 1.16"

A 13" 16" 20" 24" 16" SB15 9" 12"

U 12.25" 15.25" 19.25" 23.25" 15.25" 8.25" 11.25"
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 3/4" 3/4"

H 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT

A 13" 16" 20" 24" 16" SB16 9" 12"

U 12.25" 15.25" 19.25" 23.25" 15.25" 8.25" 11.25"
D 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 3/4" 3/4"

H 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 1 NPT 3/4 NPT 3/4 NPT

*On Model 91600, Minimum Insertion Length increases by 1" for each additional 4 ft. capillary increment.

179
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators) BRONZE
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

for Heating for Cooling

C
C C
C

B
B
BB

FLOW
FLOW

A
A
A A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

Valve Body Number Size Maximum
In-To-Close In-To-Open Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Connection (NPT) Nominal Port
Heating Cooling Cv (psid) A B C Shipping Wt.
A02 A03 1/2 1/8" 0.17 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A05 A06 1/2 3/16" 0.35 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A08 A09 1/2 1/4" 0.7 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A11 A12 1/2 3/8" 1.4 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A14 A15 1/2 1/2" 2.8 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A19 A22 3/4 3/4" 5.6 140 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 4.9 lbs [2.21 kg]
A26 A30 1 1" 8.4 80 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.0 lbs [2.70 kg]
A36 A41 11/4 11/4" 15 50 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 9.7 lbs [4.37 kg]
A47 A52 11/2 11/2" 21 35 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.8 lbs [4.86 kg]
A58 A63 2 2" 33 20 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 16.3 lbs [7.34 kg]

180
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
BRONZE (for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Double Seat • 3/4" – 2 "

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open
for Heating for Cooling

CC
C
C

BB
B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A
A
A
A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

Valve Body Number Size Maximum
In-To-Close In-To-Open Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Heating Cooling Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv (psid) A B C Shipping Wt.
A21 A24 3/4 3/4" 8 250 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.0 lbs [2.25 kg]
A29 A33 1 1" 12 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.1 lbs [2.75 kg]
A39 A44 11/4 11/4" 21 250 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.1 lbs [4.55 kg]
A50 A55 11/2 11/2" 30 250 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A61 A66 2 2" 47 250 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 17.0 lbs [7.65 kg]

181
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators) CAST IRON
Double Seat • 2 1/2" – 6 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

IDNC_reviii.eps
for Heating for Cooling

C
C
CC

BB
B
B

FLOW FLOW

A AA

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Modified linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (149˚C)

Valve Body Selection

Valve Body Number Size Maximum
In-To-Close In-To-Open Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Connection Nominal Port
Heating Cooling Cv (psid) A B C Shipping Wt.
B73 B74 21/2" 21/2" 69 65 7.8 [198] 4.8 [122] 5.4 [137] 45 lbs [20 kg]
B78 B79 3" 3" 90 50 9.0 [229] 5.0 [127] 5.6 [142] 70 lbs [32 kg]
B83 B84 4" 4" 196 40 11.4 [290] 6.3 [160] 6.5 [165] 100 lbs [45 kg]
B88 B89 5" 5" 248 30 12.0 [305] 6.9 [175] 7.3 [185] 155 lbs [70 kg]
B93 B94 6" 6" 340 25 14.1 [358] 7.5 [191] 8.0 [203] 180 lbs [82 kg]

182
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
CAST STEEL (for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Single Seat • 3/4" – 1 "

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open
for Heating for Cooling

C CC

BB
B

FLOW
FLOW

A AA

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-Steel Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

Valve Body Number Size Maximum
In-To-Close In-To-Open Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Heating Cooling Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv (psid) A B C Shipping Wt.
C01 — 3/4 1/8" 0.17 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C02 — 3/4 3/16" 0.35 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C03 — 3/4 1/4" 0.7 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C04 — 3/4 3/8" 1.4 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C05 C15 3/4 1/2" 2.8 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C06 C16 3/4 3/4" 5.6 140 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C51 — 1 1/8" 0.17 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C52 — 1 3/16" 0.35 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C53 — 1 1/4" 0.7 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C54 — 1 3/8" 1.4 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C55 C65 1 1/2" 2.8 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C56 C66 1 3/4" 5.6 140 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C57 C67 1 1" 8.4 80 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]

183
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators) STAINLESS STEEL
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

for Heating for Cooling

C C
C

B B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A A
A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
316 stainless steel Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

Valve Body Number Size Maximum
In-To-Close In-To-Open Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Connection (NPT) Nominal Port
Heating Cooling Cv (psid) A B C Shipping Wt.
D02 D03 1/2 1/8" 0.34 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D05 D06 1/2 3/16" 0.76 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D08 D09 1/2 1/4" 1.5 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D11 D12 1/2 3/8" 3.4 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D14 D15 1/2 1/2" 6.0 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D19 D22 3/4 3/4" 8.6 140 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D26 D30 1 1" 14 60 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D47 D52 11/2 11/2" 27 25 6.1 [155] 3.5 [89] 4.0 [102] 15.5 lbs [7.05 kg]
D58 D63 2 2" 33 15 6.5 [165] 3.9 [99] 4.2 [107] 19.0 lbs [8.64 kg]

184
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
BRONZE (for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3-WAY • 1/2" – 2 "

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
for Mixing or Diverting
MIXING FLOW DIAGRAM
DIVERTING FLOW DIAGRAM

STEM @ 0% IN STEM @ 0% IN

G
STEM @ 50% IN G
STEM @ 50% IN
UPPER
UPPER
PORT
PORT
(C)
LOWER
LOWER (C)
PORT
PORT
(B)
(B)

F
F

STEM @ 100% IN STEM @ 100% IN

COMMON PORT (A)

COMMON PORT (A)

E
E

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Bronze Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Size Maximum
Valve Body Number Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv (psid) E F G Shipping Wt.
A18 1/2 1/2" 2.8 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 2.9 lbs [1.31 kg]
A25 3/4 3/4" 5.6 250 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 4.7 lbs [2.12 kg]
A34 1 1" 8.4 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.7 lbs [2.57 kg]
A45 11/4 11/4" 15 250 7.2 [183] 2.8 [71] 2.6 [66] 9.5 lbs [4.28 kg]
A56 11/2 11/2" 21 250 7.7 [196] 3.5 [89] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A67 2 2" 33 250 8.6 [218] 4.1 [104] 3.1 [79] 16.7 lbs [7.55 kg]

185
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators) CAST IRON
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3-WAY • 2 1/2" – 4 "
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

for Mixing or Diverting

DIVERTING FLOW DIAGRAM
MIXING FLOW DIAGRAM

STEM @ 0% IN STEM @ 0% IN

G
G
UPPER
UPPER PORT LOWER
PORT LOWER
(C)
(C) PORT
PORT
(B)
(B) STEM @ 50% IN
STEM @ 50% IN

FF
STEM @ 100% IN
STEM @ 100% IN

COMMON PORT
COMMON PORT (A) (A)

E
E

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-Iron Bronze Modified linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Size Maximum
Valve Body Number Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Connection Nominal Port
Cv (psid) E F G Shipping Wt.
B75 21/2" 21/2" 68 125 9.0 [229] 7.1 [180] 5.2 [132] 62 lbs [28 kg]
B80 3" 3" 85 125 10.0 [254] 8.0 [203] 6.0 [152] 80 lbs [36 kg]
B85 4" 4" 160 125 13.0 [330] 10.0 [254] 6.9 [175] 140 lbs [64 kg]

186
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
STAINLESS STEEL (for 91000 & 91400 Temperature Regulators)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3-WAY • 1/2" – 2 "

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
for Mixing or Diverting
DIVERTING FLOW DIAGRAM
MIXING FLOW DIAGRAM

STEM @ 0% IN STEM @ 0% IN

STEM @ 50% IN
STEM @ 50% IN
G

UPPER LOWER
PORT PORT
(C) (B)

STEM @ 100% IN
STEM @ 100% IN

COMMON PORT (A)

E

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
316 stainless steel Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Size Maximum
Valve Body Number Capacity Close-Off Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Connection (NPT) Nominal Port
Cv (psid) E F G Shipping Wt.
D18 1/2 1/2" 6 300 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 7.5 lbs [3.41 kg]
D25 3/4 3/4" 8 300 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 7.5 lbs [3.41 kg]
D34 1 1" 11 300 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 7.5 lbs [3.18 kg]
D56 11/2 11/2" 20 200 6.1 [155] 3.4 [86] 4.0 [102] 15.0 lbs [6.82 kg]
D67 2 2" 30 100 6.5 [165] 3.8 [97] 4.2 [107] 18.5 lbs [8.41 kg]

187
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 91600 Fail Safe Temperature Regulators) BRONZE
Double Seat • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Stem In-to-Close Stem In-to-Open

for Heating for Cooling
Single Seat Single Seat

C
C
C

B
B
B

FLOW FLOW

A
AA

Stem In-to-Close Stem In-to-Open

for Heating for Cooling
Double Seat Double Seat

C
C

C C

B
B

B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A
A A

A
Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

Valve Body Number Size Max. Close-Off
In-To-Close In-To-Open No. of Effective** Pressure Dimensions Approximate
Heating Cooling Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Seats Cv (psid) A B C Shipping Wt.
A02 A03 1/2 * 1/8" 1 0.12 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A05 A06 1/2 * 3/16" 1 0.25 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A08 A09 1/2 * 1/4" 1 0.5 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A11 A12 1/2 * 3/8" 1 1.0 150 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A14 A15 1/2 * 1/2" 1 2.0 100 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A21 A24 3/4 3/4" 2 5.6 250 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.0 lbs [2.25 kg]
A29 A33 1 1" 2 8.4 200 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.1 lbs [2.75 kg]
A39 A44 11/4 11/4" 2 15 175 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.1 lbs [4.55 kg]
A50 A55 11/2 11/2" 2 21 150 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A61 A66 2 2" 2 33 100 7.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 17.0 lbs [7.65 kg]
* 1/2” Single Seat, **The 91600 Safety Actuator has a reduced valve stroke, resulting in a reduced effective Cv as shown.

188
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Notes

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

189
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 91000XT Series Tank Thermostat
for Oil Field Heaters, Treaters & Separators
T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Specifications
Model
91000XT

Power Requirements
Fully self-contained –
no external power required

Housing Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder

coated blue finish

Set Point Integral to housing

Scale
Bellows High pressure brass, corrosion
resistant, tin plated finish

Adjustment Screw
Brass

Adjustment Screw Bushing

Lubricant impregnated
Self-Operating Design
sintered bronze
Heavy Duty Die Cast
Aluminum Housing Range Adjustment Spring
Cadmium plated
3/4 & 1 NPT Valve Sizes
Overrange Protection
Soft Seated Valve for Tight Shut-Off
Upper range limit +100°F for
91000XT shown Fully Enclosed Bellows temporary situations
Thermal System
Bulb: Copper, .80" x 8", with
The 91000XT Tank Thermostat is Warning: This valve may only be 3/4 NPT union connection for

specifically designed to control the installed in outdoor applications. thermowell

The Teflon v-ring packing will
temperature of heaters, treaters and Capillary: Copper, available in
allow fugitive emissions to
separators within the petroleum industry. escape. Improper application
10' or 20' lengths
It is entirely self-contained, requires no may cause failure of the valve, Thermowell Steel, 1 NPT connection
external power source, and is the most resulting in possible personal
widely preferred unit of its kind. When injury or property damage. Valve Single seat, normally open
installed in a treater, the normally open Body: Cast-iron
For applications where the
valve will automatically close off the flow process media may be corrosive Trim: Stainless steel plug assembly
of gas as temperature increases, thereby or contained under pressure, with soft seating Viton o-ring, iron seat
regulating temperature within the treater. the use of a thermowell is Port Size: 1/2"
The Trerice 91000XT is ruggedly required to prevent damage to Connection: 3/4 NPT or
constructed with a heavy duty, die cast the sensing bulb and facilitate 1 NPT threaded ends
its removal from the process.
aluminum actuator housing and fully
enclosed bellows assembly. Its single For replacement or service parts Approximate Shipping Weight
seated, cast-iron valve body is fitted please see Accessories and 10.3 lbs [4.68 kg]
with a stainless steel plug assembly Replacement Parts in the
and soft seating Viton o-ring to provide Regulators and Control Valves
tight shut-off. section of the list price sheet.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 91000XT X01 10 W02-X75

Model Range Capillary Length Thermowell Valve Size

91000XT See Standard 10 10 Feet W02 Steel Thermowell X75 3/4 NPT
Ranges 20 20 Feet (Omit if not required) X10 1 NPT

190
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 91000XT Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Tank Thermostat
Thermostat Thermowell

T E M P E R AT U R E R E G U L ATO R S
(A)
3.63 BULB LENGTH
[92]

1.25-18 UNEF (P)

EXTERNAL THREAD
1 NPT

1.06 [27]

8.93
[227] WRENCH
ALLOWANCE U
12.20 INSERTION LENGTH
[310] 1.00 8" BULB = 8.38 [213]
[25] 20" BULB = 20.38 [518]
THREAD
ALLOWANCE

Pressure Rating (psi)

10.7 8.00
[271.8] [203] Operating Temperature
Material 70°F 300°F 500°F
Carbon Steel 780 780 600

HOW TO ORDER
Thermowell Style (P) External Thread Bulb Length Material
SOFT SEATING Ø.80
VITON O-RING
[20]
53 Tank Thermostat 5 1 NPT L 8" Bulb 3 Steel
We 20" Bulb*
3/4 NPT = 5.9 [150]
1 NPT = 6.2 [157] * For ranges X07 and X08 only.

Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature
and pressure limitations must be considered. Improper application may cause failure of
the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

If Thermowells are to be purchased as a separate item, or if a Special Thermowell is required, please refer to this page.
If a complete Temperature Regulator is purchased, the proper Thermowell to match the sensing bulb ordered will be supplied.

Standard Ranges
Range Code Nominal Range Recommended Working Span Bulb Length (A)
X13 85° to 115°F & 30° to 45°C 85° to 115°F & 30° to 45°C 8"
X11 80° to 140°F & 25° to 60°C 110° to 140°F & 45° to 60°C 8"
X15 130° to 160°F & 50° to 70°C 130° to 160°F & 50° to 70°C 8"
X01 110° to 190°F & 45° to 90°C 160° to 190°F & 70° to 90°C 8"
X03 125° to 215°F & 55° to 100°C 180° to 210°F & 80° to 100°C 8"
X12 200° to 280°F & 95° to 135°C 250° to 280°F & 120° to 140°C 8"
X10 225° to 315°F & 110° to 155°C 280° to 310°F & 135° to 155°C 8"
X16 310° to 365°F & 155° to 185°C 310° to 365°F & 155° to 185°C 8"
X14 295° to 420°F & 145° to 215°C 360° to 420°F & 180° to 215°C 8"
X08* 45° to 115°F & 10° to 45°C 85° to 115°F & 30° to 45°C 20"
X07* 65° to 140°F & 20° to 60°C 110° to 140°F & 45° to 60°C 20"
*Except for Range Codes X07 and X08, the actuator housing and capillary tubing must always be exposed to a temperature lower
than the required control point for proper thermostat operation.

Valve Capacities
Gas (Specific Gravity = 0.6)
Inlet Pressure (PSIG) 5 10 20 30 40 50
Outlet Pressure (PSIG) 4 2 0 8 5 0 15 10 5 25 20 10 30 20 15 40 30 25
Capacity (scfh) 970 1585 1935 1450 2140 2700 2685 3480 3870 3100 4120 5030 4650 6000 6200 5320 6870 7250

191
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Pressure Regulators
DESIGN & OPERATION
P R E S S U R E R E G U L AT O R S

One-Piece Design Description

A Pressure Regulator is a mechanical device designed
to regulate system flow pressure in response to upstream
or downstream pressure changes.

Principles of Operation
Trerice Pressure Regulators are available in two basic
configurations: a one-piece design with an integrated
actuation system, or a two-piece design comprised of
individual components (actuator and globe valve), which
are factory assembled into a complete regulator.

One-Piece Pressure Regulators (Series 988, 1002)

have an internal diaphragm that is attached to a valve plug.
The diaphragm is balanced between the downward force
of an adjustment spring and the upward force of the
reduced downstream pressure within the regulator. As
the downstream pressure decreases, the adjustment
spring pushes down on the diaphragm, which in turn
opens the valve. Conversely, as downstream pressure
Two-Piece Design increases, the diaphragm is forced upward, overcoming
the force of the spring and closing the valve.

Two-Piece Pressure Regulators (921 Series) employ a

user-supplied pressure line connecting the actuator to the
point of regulation within the pipeline or process. The process
pressure will depress a diaphragm within the actuator housing
and the subsequent movement of the diaphragm will push
an attached valve stem to the “in” position. Choice of a stem
In-To-Close or stem In-To-Open globe valve will determine if
the assembled pressure regulator is for reducing downstream
pressure (ITC or normally open) or relieving upstream pressure
(ITO or normally closed). This unit features spring-opposed
actuation: when the controlled pressure decreases, the
adjustment spring will push the diaphragm upward, which
will in turn move the valve stem back to the “out” position.

192
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 P R E S S U R E R E G U L AT O R S
Selecting a Pressure Regulator
• Trerice 921 Series Pressure Regulators provide a quick response to large system load changes,
while maintaining precise flow regulation. The 921 Series is capable of both downstream pressure
reduction and back pressure relief. Valve sizes from 1/2" through 6" port are available.

• Trerice 988 Series Pressure Regulators are designed for steam service and recommended for
saturated and superheated steam applications. Valve sizes from 1/2" through 2" port are available.

• Trerice 1002 Series Pressure Regulators are designed for high volume water service applications.
Valve sizes from 1/2" through 21/2" port are available.

All Trerice Pressure Regulators should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application.
The information contained within this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper selection.
Selection of the proper pressure regulator is the sole responsibility of the user. Improper application may cause
failure, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

Trerice Pressure Regulators are NOT intended for use in applications where the media comes in
direct contact with the skin or body, such as showers, baths, lavatories or wash fountains.

Pressure Range and Set Point

Each Trerice Pressure Regulator is designed to operate efficiently within a specified operating range. The
regulator, when properly specified, will modulate pressure flow at the set point desired within the selected
pressure range. The set point can be modified using the range adjustment screw provided on the unit.

Pressure Regulator Valve Availability

Size
Series Body Material Connection 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4" 5" 6"
921 Bronze Iron Unions ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Cast-Iron Class 125 Flanged ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
988 Cast-Iron Threaded ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1002 Bronze Threaded ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Cast-Iron Threaded ✓
*Reduced port sizes are available.

193
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Pressure Regulators
DESIGN & OPERATION
P R E S S U R E R E G U L AT O R S

Valve
Trerice Two-Piece Pressure Regulators are available with a wide variety of globe valve
designs, materials, connections and sizes.

Style
Trerice Pressure Regulator Valve Bodies are available in single seated and double seated designs.

• Single Seated Valves are an excellent choice when a higher degree of shut-off is
required. However, this design is unbalanced and limited in the pressure that it will
shut off against. The leakage rate is approximately 0.1% of the maximum capacity.

• Double Seated Valves are nearly pressure balanced and, therefore, are able to close the
valve plug against higher operating pressures. However, since temperature fluctuations may
cause expansion and contraction across the seats, tight shut-off is not always possible. The
leakage rate is approximately 0.5% of the maximum capacity. Double seated valves have a
faster flow response and greater capacity than single seated valves, and are recommended
when tight shut-off is not required.

The Trerice Pressure Regulator is a balanced equilibrium system at the set point and provides no power to tightly
seat the valve plug. The valve is not considered a shut-off valve. Large pressure surges may force a single seated
valve plug open. A power driven or hand actuated valve is required to ensure tight shut-off when necessary.

Action
Trerice 921 Series Pressure Regulators can be specified for use in either pressure reducing or back
pressure relief applications. All other Trerice Pressure Regulators are designed for pressure reducing
applications only.

Pressure Regulator Valve Action

Application Stem Action Normal (Fail) Position
Pressure Reducing In-To-Close Normally Open
Back Pressure Relief In-To-Open Normally Closed

194
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 P R E S S U R E R E G U L AT O R S
Body Material and Construction
Trerice Pressure Regulators are available with bronze or cast-iron valve bodies. Union and flanged
connection styles are available.

Trim
Valve trim is composed of the stem and plug assembly, and the seats within the ports. Trerice single and
double seated, bronze valve bodies employ a stainless steel, tapered plug for enhanced modulation,
as well as permanently brazed-in stainless steel seats for smooth performance throughout the life of
the valve. The valve plug is both top and bottom guided to ensure positive seating alignment.

Packing
Trerice valves feature a self-energizing Teflon V-Ring packing, which reduces leakage around the
valve stem. V-Ring packing is spring loaded to maintain proper compression and does not require
manual adjustment.

Size
The proper sizing of a regulating valve is one of the most important factors in its selection. A valve that is
too small will not be able to provide the desired capacity during peak load conditions, while a valve that is
too large may overshoot the control point and operate with the valve plug too close to the seat, resulting
in undue wear of the plug and seat. The valve coefficient (Cv) is mathematically determined through an
evaluation of the system service conditions (operating pressures and flow). From this evaluation, a valve
body with the appropriate port size can be selected. Port sizes from 1/4" through 6" and connection sizes
from 1/2" through 6" are available. Please consult the Valve Selection Section of this catalog.

Pipeline Strainer
A Trerice Series 1100 Pipeline Strainer should always be installed upstream of a Trerice Regulator.
This Y-Type strainer employs a stainless steel screen to remove debris from the line, which will prevent
jamming of the valve and extend its life.

195
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 921 Series Pressure Regulator
Pressure Reducing or Back Pressure Relief Valve
P R E S S U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Self-Contained Design
Specifications
Spring-loaded Actuator Models
Diaphragm Actuated 921PRV (Pressure Reducing Valve)
921BPR (Back Pressure Relief)
Cast Ductile Iron
Housing & Yoke Housing Cast ductile iron, black finish
1/2" – 6" Valve Sizes Pressure Cast iron
Plate
Diaphragm Nylon reinforced Neoprene
Material
Regulated Pressures
2–100 psi

Maximum PRV Inlet Pressure

1/2"- 2": 200 psi
21/2" - 6": 125 psi*

Maximum BPR Set Pressure

100 psi

Pressure Connection
1/4 NPT

Adjustment Nut
921 shown Steel

Adjustment Screw
The Trerice 921Series Pressure Regulator For optimal performance, the Brass
is fully self-contained and requires no service conditions (medium,
external power source. This regulator flow, temperature, inlet and Adjustment Spring
requires that a user- supplied pressure outlet pressures) of the applica- Cadmium plated steel
sensing line be connected from the tion must be considered when
controlled point to the diaphragm selecting a valve. Please refer Body Material
to the Valve Selection Section of 1/2"–2":Bronze
actuator. Pressure in this line acts upon
the diaphragm to develop the necessary
this catalog. Improper application 21/2"–6": Cast iron
may cause failure of the valve,
thrust to stroke the valve, thereby resulting in possible personal Trim Material Stainless steel
maintaining the system at the desired injury or property damage.
condition. Trim Style Quick-opening
For replacement or service parts
• For pressure reducing applications, please see Accessories and Connection
the pressure sensing line is mounted 1/2"-2":
Replacement Parts in the Threaded,
downstream, and the valve closes as Regulators and Control Valves malleable Iron union ends
this sensed pressure increases. section of the list price sheet. 21/2"–6": Class 125 Flanged
Reduced outlet pressure not to be
less than 10% of inlet pressure. Pressure & Temperature Rating
1/2"-2": 250 psi @ 410˚ F (210˚ C)
• For back pressure relief applications,
the sensing line is mounted upstream, 21/2"–6": 125 psi @ 350˚ F (175˚ C)
and the valve opens as the sensed
pressure increases.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 921PRV-A55-075060

Model Valve Inlet Pressure Outlet Pressure

921PRV- (Pressure Reducing Valve) See Available Specify Upstream Specify Downstream
921BPR- (Back Pressure Relief) Valves Pressure in psig Pressure in psig
(i.e., 75 psig = 075) (i.e., 60 psig = 060)
Omit if 921BPR
*200 psi inlet available with Class 250 flanged valve body. Consult Factory.

196
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 921 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Pressure Regulator
Pressure Reducing (PRV) Back Pressure Relief (BPR)
1/2" Valve 1/2" Valve

P R E S S U R E R E G U L ATO R S
C
C

C
C

B
B

B
B

FLOW FLOW

A A

AA

(A)
1/4 NPT 3/4"
3/4" – 2" Valve – 2" Valve

C
C

C
C
13.28
[337.5]

B
B

B
B

FLOW

FLOW
IDNC_reviii.eps
A

A
AA

2 1/2" – 6" Valve Actuator (A) Dimension 2 1/2" – 6" Valve

A 6.1 [155]
B 7.0 [178]
C 8.1 [206]
C
C
D 9.0 [229]
C
C
E 11.0 [279]
Note: Actuator size and
internal spring are determined
by the inlet and outlet pressure B
B requirements and will be
B
specified by the factory at
the time of order. FLOW

FLOW

A
A
Valve Selection
(PRV) Pressure (BPR) Back Size Nominal Number of Capacity Maximum** Inlet Dimensions Approximate
Reducing Pressure Relief Connection Port Seats Cv* (psig) A B C Shipping Wt.
A14 A15 1/2 NPT 1/2" 1 2.8 200 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A21 A24 3/4 NPT 3/4" 2 8 200 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.0 lbs [2.25 kg]
A29 A33 1 NPT 1" 2 12 200 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.1 lbs [2.75 kg]
A39 A44 11/4 NPT 11/4" 2 21 200 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.1 lbs [4.55 kg]
A50 A55 11/2 NPT 11/2" 2 30 200 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A61 A66 2 NPT 2" 2 47 200 7.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 17.0 lbs [7.65 kg]
B73 B74 21/2" 21/2" 2 78 125 7.8 [198] 4.8 [122] 5.4 [137] 45 lbs [20 kg]
B78 B79 3" 3" 2 110 125 9.0 [229] 5.0 [127] 5.6 [142] 70 lbs [32 kg]
B83 B84 4" 4" 2 220 125 11.4 [290] 6.3 [160] 6.5 [165] 100 lbs [45 kg]
B88 B89 5" 5" 2 275 125 12.0 [305] 6.9 [175] 7.3 [185] 155 lbs [70 kg]
B93 B94 6" 6" 2 378 125 14.1 [358] 7.5 [191] 8.0 [203] 180 lbs [82 kg]
*The valve selected should have a Cv approximately two times that required by the service conditions. This will allow the valve to operate
in approximately the 50% open position. ** Maximum BPR set pressure 100 psi.

197
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 988 Series Pressure Regulator
for Steam Service
P R E S S U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Cast-Iron Construction Specifications

Stainless Steel Seat
& Disc Model
988
1/2" – 2" Sizes
Body Cast-Iron
Sensitivity Adjuster
Diaphragm Laminated bronze
Trim Valve Disc: Stainless steel
Seat: Stainless steel

Strainer Stainless steel

Maximum Inlet Pressure

200 psi

Operating Temperature
Maximum: 387˚F (197˚C)

988 shown

The Trerice 988 Series Pressure For optimal performance,

Regulator, designed for steam service, the service conditions
(medium, flow, temperature,
provides a sensitive response to inlet and outlet pressures)
reduced pressure changes and delivers of the application must be
the fullest possible volume without considered when selecting a
an appreciable reduced pressure valve. Please refer to the Valve
Selection Section of this catalog.
drop. The 988 includes a spring-loaded Improper application may cause
diaphragm that can be externally failure of the valve, resulting
adjusted by the operator to provide a in possible personal injury or
property damage.
uniform outlet pressure. This regulator
is intended for use in testing fixtures,
autoclaves, steam tables, vulcanizers,
sterilizers and other process applica-
tions. It features a “sensitivity adjuster,”
which can be used to eliminate any
vibrating or chattering caused by
critical flow requirements.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 988 O8 B

Model Connection Size (NPT) Reduced Pressure Range

988 04 1/2 NPT A 3 to 15 psi
1/2
- 11/4 NPT
06 3/4 NPT B 10 to 30 psi
08 1 NPT C 30 to 140 psi Connection Size only.
10 11/4 NPT

12 11/2 NPT D 5 to 40 psi 11/2 & 2 NPT

16 2 NPT E 30 to 100 psi Connection Size only.

198
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 988 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
Pressure Regulator

P R E S S U R E R E G U L ATO R S
D

Size Approximate
B MAX. (NPT) A B C D Shipping Weight
1/ 2 4.7 [119] 7.0 [178] 1.9 [48] 6.0 [152] 11 lbs [5.0 kg]
3/ 4 4.7 [119] 7.0 [178] 1.9 [48] 6.0 [152] 11 lbs [5.0 kg]
1 5.6 [142] 7.5 [191] 2.2 [56] 7.5 [191] 20 lbs [9.1 kg]
1 1/ 4 5.6 [142] 7.5 [191] 2.2 [56] 7.5 [191] 20 lbs [9.1 kg]
1 1/ 2 6.6 [168] 11.3 [287] 2.8 [71] 9.0 [229] 40 lbs [18 kg]
2 6.6 [168] 11.3 [287] 2.8 [71] 9.0 [229] 40 lbs [18 kg]

C Steam in Pounds Per Hour (pph)

Inlet Reduced Valve Size (NPT)
Pressure (psig) Pressure (psig) 1/ 2 3/ 4 1 1 1/ 4 1 1/ 2 2
10 5 27 94 133 146 208 240
20 10 40 142 200 220 312 360
A
30 20 48 168 237 261 370 428
40 30 54 191 270 297 420 486
20 67 237 335 368 522 603
50 40 60 210 297 327 464 535
30 76 270 381 420 595 686
60 50 65 230 324 356 505 583
40 84 298 421 463 656 758
70 60 70 246 348 382 542 626
50 92 325 458 504 714 825
80 70 74 262 370 407 577 667
60 98 348 492 541 766 885
90 70 104 370 523 575 815 942
50 129 458 646 711 1008 1164
100 80 110 392 554 610 864 998
60 139 493 696 766 1085 1252
120 100 122 431 608 670 948 1095
80 156 554 782 860 1219 1408
140 100 172 610 862 948 1342 1550
80 194 686 968 1065 1509 1743
160 100 211 748 1056 1162 1645 1900
90 218 772 1090 1198 1698 1961
180 100 244 862 1218 1340 1898 2192
200 100 270 955 1349 1484 2102 2428

199
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 1002 Series Pressure Regulator
for Water Service
P R E S S U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Bronze or Cast-Iron Specifications

Construction
Model
Stainless Steel Seat
1002
1/2" – 21/2" Sizes
Body 1/2"to 2": Bronze
21/2": Cast-Iron

Diaphragm Nitril
Trim Valve Disc: Nitril
Seat: Stainless steel

Maximum Inlet Pressure

300 psi

Operating Temperature
Maximum: 160˚ F (71˚C)

1002 shown

The Trerice 1002 Series Pressure For optimal performance, the

service conditions (medium,
Regulator is a high capacity pressure flow, temperature, inlet and
reducing valve for water service. outlet pressures) of the application
The 1002 has a broad seat opening must be considered when selecting
a valve. Please refer to the Valve
and is capable of supplying large Selection Section of this catalog.
volumes at reduced pressures. Improper application may cause
This regulator is intended for use in failure of the valve, resulting in
possible personal injury or
a variety of commercial, institutional property damage.
and industrial applications. It features
a bronze or cast-iron body and a
stainless steel seat.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 1002 12 B

Model Connection Size Reduced Pressure Range

(NPT)
1002 04 1/2 A 10 to 35 psi
06 3/4 B 25 to 75 psi
08 1 C High Pressure Range
10 11/4 50 to 145 psi (1/2, 3/4, 1 NPT only)
12 11/2 50 to 120 psi (11/4 NPT only)
16 2 50 to 95 psi (11/2, 2, 21/2 NPT only)
20 21/2

200
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 1002 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
Pressure Regulator

P R E S S U R E R E G U L ATO R S
B MAX.

Approximate
Size (NPT) A B C Shipping Weight
1/ 2 4.3 [109] 6.3 [160] 2.0 [51] 5.3 lbs [2.41 kg]
3/ 4 4.3 [109] 6.3 [160] 2.0 [51] 5.3 lbs [2.41 kg]
1 4.8 [122] 6.5 [165] 2.1 [53] 7.9 lbs [3.59 kg]
1 1/ 4 5.0 [127] 6.8 [173] 2.8 [71] 9.6 lbs [4.36 kg]
1 1/ 2 6.8 [173] 9.9 [251] 2.8 [71] 20 lbs [9.1 kg]
2 8.0 [203] 10.8 [274] 3.3 [84] 33 lbs [15 kg]
2 1/ 2 9.0 [229] 10.8 [274] 3.3 [84] 35 lbs [16 kg]

Valve Capacities
Water in Gallons per Minute (GPM)
Pressure Valve Size (NPT)
Drop (psig) 1/ 2 3/ 4 1 1 1/ 4 1 1/ 2 2 2 1/ 2
1 2 3 3 4 5 8 12
2 4 5 5 6 13 20 24
3 5 7 8 10 22 31 39
4 7 9 10 15 30 42 50
5 9 11 13 17 38 50 60
6 10 13 15 20 48 61 70
8 13 18 20 34 65 84 91
10 15 20 25 45 78 100 108
12 18 24 30 57 90 116 122
14 20 28 35 67 102 132 138
16 21 31 39 73 113 142 149
18 22 34 45 81 122 155 163
20 23 37 48 88 132 161 171

201
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer
Cast-Iron Specifications
P R E S S U R E R E G U L ATO R S

Construction
Model
Stainless Steel
Seat 1100

Y-Type Design
Body Cast-Iron
3/ 8" – 6 " Sizes
Connection 3/8" to 2": Threaded
21/2 to 6": Cast 125 Flanged

1100 shown Screen Strainless Steel, 1/64" perforations

Cleanout Cover
The Trerice 1100 Series Pipeline Strainer is designed to be Threaded Connection: Threaded
installed upstream of regulators, valves, or other similar equipment. Flanged Connection: Bolted
This Y-Type Strainer removes debris from the line, thereby providing
protection and extending the life of the regulator or valve. The Maximum Inlet Pressure & Temperature
Steam
1100 Series has a generously proportioned, cast-iron body and a
Threaded:
1/ " perforated, stainless steel screen. A blow-out valve should
64 250 psi @ 406˚ F (208˚ C)
be installed so that the screen may be cleaned periodically.
Class 125 Flanged:
125 psi @ 450˚F (232˚C)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Water/Oil/Gas
A Threaded:
400 psi @ 150˚F (66˚C)

Class 125 Flanged:

200 psi @ 100˚F (38˚C)

Item Number Size A B Approximate Shipping Wt. HOW TO ORDER

3/ 8 Sample Order Number: 1103
1103 NPT 3.18 [81] 2.06 [52] 1.6 lbs [0.73 kg]
1104 1/ 2 NPT 3.18 [81] 2.06 [52] 1.6 lbs [0.73 kg]
1106 3/ 4 NPT 3.75 [95] 2.44 [61] 2.4 lbs [1.09 kg]
1108 1 NPT 4.00 [102] 2.63 [66] 3.0 lbs [1.36 kg]
1110 1 1/ 4 NPT 5.00 [127] 3.38 [85] 5.2 lbs [2.36 kg]
1112 1 1/ 2 NPT 5.75 [146] 3.88 [98] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
1116 2 NPT 7.00 [177] 4.75 [121] 13 lbs [5.9 kg]
1120 2 1/ 2 Flange 10.00 [254] 6.50 [165] 28 lbs [12.7 kg]
1124 3 Flange 10.13 [257] 7.00 [178] 34 lbs [15.5 kg]
1132 4 Flange 12.13 [308] 8.25 [210] 60 lbs [27 kg]
1140 5 Flange 15.63 [397] 11.25 [286] 95 lbs [43 kg]
1148 6 Flange 18.50 [470] 13.50 [343] 133 lbs [60 kg]

202
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Controllers
DESIGN & OPERATION
Description
A controller is a comparative device that receives an input signal from a measured process variable,
compares this value with that of a predetermined control point value (set point), and determines the

CONTROLLERS
appropriate amount of output signal required by the final control element to provide corrective action
within a control loop. Trerice offers two different types of controllers:
• An Electronic PID Controller uses electrical signals and digital algorithms to perform its receptive,
comparative and corrective functions.
• An Electric Contact Controller is a mechanical device designed to measure temperature and transmit a
corrective electrical signal to the final control element by the activation of one or more electrical switches.

Principles of Operation (Electronic PID Controller)

An electronic sensor (thermocouple, RTD or transmitter) installed at the measurement location
continuously sends an input signal to the controller. At set intervals the controller compares this
signal to a predefined set point. If the input signal deviates from the set point, the controller sends a
corrective output signal to the control element. This electric signal must be converted to a pneumatic
signal when used with an air operated valve, such as a Trerice Series 910 or 940 Control Valve. The
conversion can be made using a Trerice TA901 I/P Transducer, which converts a 4 to 20 mA electric
signal to a 3 to 15 psi air signal.

Features (Electronic PID Controller)

An electronic controller is best suited for applications where large load changes are encountered
and/or fast response changes are required. Trerice Electronic Controllers have full auto tuning and
PID capabilities, and offer a host of available options, including user selectable inputs and ranges,
outputs, setback functions, and alarms.
PID Control is a feature of most Trerice Electronic Controllers. PID combines the proportional,
integral and derivative functions into a single unit.

• Proportional (P) — Proportional control reacts to the size of the deviation from set point when
sending a corrective signal. The size of the corrective signal can be adjusted in relation to the
size of the error by changing the width of the proportional band. A narrow proportional band will
cause a large corrective action in relation to a given amount of error, while a wider proportional
band will cause a smaller corrective action in relation to the same amount of error.

• Integral (I) — Integral control reacts to the length of time that the deviation from set point exists
when sending a corrective signal. The longer the error exists, the greater the corrective signal.

• Derivative (D) — Derivative control reacts to the speed in which the deviation is changing. The
corrective signal will be proportional to the rate of change within the process.

Auto-Tuning
Auto-tuning will automatically select the optimum values for P, I and D, thus eliminating the need for
the user to calculate and program these values at system startup. This feature can be overridden
when so desired. On some models, the control element can be manually operated.

203
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Controllers
DESIGN & OPERATION
Selecting an Electronic PID Controller
All Trerice Electronic Controllers are designed to control the temperature or pressure of general industrial equipment
and should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application. The information contained within
CONTROLLERS

this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper selection. Selection of the proper controller is the
sole responsibility of the user. Improper application may cause process failure, resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage.

Case Size
Case Size selection is determined by both available and designed space, and controller
features.Trerice Electronic Controllers are available in the following panel sizes: 96 x 96 mm
(1/4 DIN), 72 x 72 mm, 48 x 96 mm (1/8 DIN), and 48 x 48 mm (1/16 DIN). The depth of the unit
varies with the model selected.

Input
The Input is the measurement signal received by the controller from the sensor. A variety of
input types are available, including thermocouple, RTD, voltage and current.

Control Output
The Control Output is the corrective signal transmitted from the controller to the control
element. Various control output types are available, including contact, voltage, current and
solid state relay driver.

Analog Output
The Analog Output is an optional secondary signal that transmits the measurement signal from the
controller to a remote data acquisition device, such as a recorder, personal computer or display unit.

Alarms
Most models can be ordered with alarms, event outputs, or heater break alarms, which signal an
external device to perform a specific task at a predetermined set point.

Setback Function
This feature, optionally available on some models, is designed to provide energy savings in applications
where the process is idled at regular intervals through the connection of an external timer or switch.

204
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Principles of Operation (Electric Contact Controller)
The Trerice Electric Contact Controller operates through a coordination of its thermal sensing system and
temperature indicating arm with internal linkage, which activates a preset electrical switch upon contact. The
thermal system, installed within the process application, senses change in the measured variable and relays

CONTROLLERS
this information (input signal) to the controller through an expansion or contraction of the system fill. The
temperature indicating arm moves around the dialface in response to the change in process temperature until
such time as the internal linkage touches the preset electric switch. This contact sends a corrective electrical
signal, which activates or deactivates external On/Off devices, such as solenoid valves or electric heaters.
The subsequent control of these devices will result in an increase or decrease of the application temperature,
thereby returning the process to the desired condition.
All Trerice Electric Contact Controllers are designed to control the temperature of general industrial equipment and
should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application. The information contained within this
catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper selection. Selection of the proper controller is the sole
responsibility of the user. Improper application may cause process failure, resulting in possible personal injury or
property damage.

Selecting an Electric Contact Controller

Control Function
Trerice Electric Contact Controllers are designed specifically for On/Off control. Processes which are
characterized by stable load conditions can be controlled using On/Off control with a solenoid valve,
electric heater or other electrically operated device.
• On/Off (I/0) – On/Off control recognizes only that a deviation exists. Any deviation between the set point
and measured process variable will produce a full corrective signal.

Switching Point and Temperature Range

Trerice Electric Contact Controllers can be ordered with up to four switches per unit. The switches can be
adjusted to any point within the temperature range of the controller. Multiple switch units are particularly useful
for operating an alarm or other safety device, in addition to the main control element. A switching point indica-
tor (set via an external knob) and a temperature indicator are read against the range plate. Temperature ranges
from -100°F through 700°F are available.

Actuation System
The Trerice Electric Contact Controller is supplied with a liquid thermal actuation system. This actuation is
desirable when controlling within ambient and cross ambient conditions. It is also suitable for low temperature
demands. It is furnished with a small sensing bulb and a linear scale. These controllers can be specified with
various capillary and sensing bulb materials, coverings and connections, to meet the requirements of any
application. Consult factory for capillary systems in excess of 20 feet in length.
Thermowell
For applications in which the process media may be corrosive or contained under pressure, the use of a
thermowell is required to prevent damage to the sensing bulb. A thermowell will also facilitate the removal of
the sensing bulb from the operating process. Thermowells are available in a variety of lengths, connections
and materials.

CAUTION: Temperature indication Where: S = thermometer range span in °F

error will be introduced whenever the L = capillary length in feet
T = capillary temperature variation from 75°F
capillary tubing is exposed to ambient Error = 0.000018 x S x L x T
temperatures above or below 75°F. The
Example: S = 210 (30 to 240°F)
following formula MUST be considered L = 20
when specifying liquid actuation: T = 10 (85°F)
Error = 0.000018 x 210 x 20 x 10 = 3.4°

205
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 TR890 Series Electronic PID Controller
Features PID and Auto-Tuning
Specifications
Models TR891: 48 x 48 mm (1/16 DIN)
TR892: 72 x 72 mm
TR893: 96 x 96 mm (1/4 DIN)
CONTROLLERS

TR894: 96 x 48 mm (1/8 DIN)

Control Control Mode: Auto-Tuning PID
Action: Reverse acting (field switchable to direct acting)

Proportional Off, 0.1-999.9% Full Scale

Band Integral Time: Off, 1-6000 sec.
Derivative Time: Off, 1-3600 sec.
TR893 shown
Accuracy + 0.3%

Multiple Sizes Display Process Value: 4 Digit, 20 mm red LED

Set Value: 4 digit, 10.2 mm green LED
+ 0.3% Accuracy
Sampling Cycle: 0.25 seconds
Keyboard Inputs Multi (switchable between)
Programmable
Thermocouple: B, R, S, K, E, J T, N, PL II, Wre5-26 {U,L (DIN 43710)
Reverse or Direct Acting RTD: Platinum 100Ω, 3 Wire
Manual Output Override mV: (scalable) -10-10, 0-10, 0-20, 0-50, 10-50, 0-100 mV DC
Current: (scalable) 4-20, 0-20 mA
Voltage: -1-1, 0-1, 0-2, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10 VDC
The Trerice TR890 Series Control Current: 4-20 mA (load
Electronic PID Controller Output Resistance: 600Ω maximum)
is designed for use on Contact: Proportional cycle,
applications where large 1-120 sec. (capacity: 240 VAC 2A resistive / 1.2A inductive)
load changes are expected, SSR Drive Voltage: Proportional cycle 1-120 sec.
or the need for extreme (output rating: 12±1.5 VDC / 30 mA maximum)
accuracy and fast response Voltage: 0-10 VDC
Load Current 2mA max
time exists. With full
auto-tune capabilities and a Power Supply Voltage: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz or 24V AC/DC 50/60 Hz
large selection of available Requirements Consumption: 100-240 VAC 15VA
inputs, the TR890 Series is 24VDC 8W
ideally suited for use with 24VAC 9VA
a Trerice Control Valve. Data Storage Nonvolatile EEPROM memory

Use of a Trerice No. TA987 Case Material Polyphenylene Oxide (PPO)

Air Filter/Regulator is
Ambient Temp. 14°F (-10°C) to 122°F (50°C)
recommended for filtering
and regulating the pressure Humidity Maximum: 90% RH, non condensing
of plant compressed air and
Event Outputs
delivering clean, dry air at
(Contact Capacity 240 VAC 1A/resistive load)
the proper pressure to
pneumatic control devices. Dual Event Outputs (High and/or Low Alarms)
Single Event Output + Heater Break Alarm includes CT30A sensor
Approximate Shipping Weight Single Event Output + Heater Break Alarm includes CT50A sensor
TR891: 0.4 lbs [0.17 kg]
Options:
TR892: 0.6 lbs [0.28 kg] Analog Output 0-10mV DC (output resistance 10Ω )
TR893: 0.7 lbs [0.33 kg] Analog Output 4-20mA DC (load resistance 300Ω max )
TR894: 0.5 lbs [0.24 kg] Analog Output 0-10V DC (load current 2mA max )

Digital Input (switch) including:

Setback Function setting range of -1999 - 5000, standby or DA/RA Selection
Operated by either non-voltage contact or open collector
input rated at approx. 5V DC/1mA max.

206
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 TR890 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Electronic PID Controller
W C D

CONTROLLERS
H B

PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: TR893 8 A C 90 1 00

Model Input Control Output Power Supply Event Output Options

TR891 8 Multi A 4-20 mA 90 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz 0 None 00 None
TR892 4 mA C On/Off Contact 08 24 VAC/VDC 50/60 Hz 1 Dual Event 30 Analog Output (0-10 mVDC)
TR893 6 VDC D SSR Driver (high and/or low) 40 Analog Output (4-20 mA)
TR894 E 0-10 VDC Event Outputs 2 Single Event 60 Analog Output (0-10 VDC)
2 or 3 require (high or low) and 08 Digital Input (switch)
Control Outputs heater break CT30A 38 Digital Input (switch) with
C or D 3 Single Event 0-10 mVDC* Analog Output
(high or low) and 48 Digital Input (switch)
heater break CT50A with 4-20 mA* Analog Output
68 Digital Input (switch) with
0-10 VDC* Analog Output

*Not available with Model TR891

Model A B C D H W
TR891 1.77 [45] 1.77 [45] 0.43 [11] 3.94 [100] 1.89 [48] 1.89 [48]
TR892 2.68 [68] 2.68 [68] 0.43 [11] 3.94 [100] 2.83 [72] 2.83 [72]
TR893 3.63 [92] 3.63 [92] 0.43 [11] 3.94 [100] 3.78 [96] 3.78 [96]
TR894 1.77 [45] 3.63 [92] 0.43 [11] 3.94 [100] 3.78 [96] 3.78 [96]

Programmable Ranges
Thermocouple Inputs RTD Inputs Current & Voltage Inputs
T/C Range Fahrenheit Range Celsius Range Fahrenheit Range Celsius Range Range
Type Code Range Code Range Code Range Code Range Code (User-scalable Readout)
B * 15 0° to 3300°F 01 0° to 1800°C 47 -300° to 1100°F 31 -200° to 600°C 71 -10-10 mV
E 21 0° to 1300°F 07 0° to 700°C 48 -150.0° to 200.0°F 32 -100.0° to 100.0°C 72 0-10 mV
J 22 0° to 1100°F 08 0° to 600°C 49 -150° to 600°F 33 -100.0° to 300.0°C 73 0-20 mV
K 18 -150° to 750°F 04 -100.0° to 400.0°C 50 -50.0° to 120.0°F 34 -50.0° to 50.0°C 74 0-50 mV
K 19 0° to 1500°F 05 0° to 800°C 51 0.0° to 120.0°F 35 0.0° to 50.0°C 75 10-50 mV
K 20 0° to 2200°F 06 0° to 1200°C 52 0.0° to 200.0°F 36 0.0° to 100.0°C 76 0-100 mV
L 28 0° to 1100°F 14 0° to 600°C 53 0.0° to 400.0°F 37 0.0° to 200.0°C 81 -1-1 V
N 24 0° to 2300°F 10 0° to 1300°C 54 0° to 1000°F 38 0.0° to 500.0°C 82 0-1 V
PL II 25 0° to 2300°F 11 0° to 1300°C 83 0-2 V
R 16 0° to 3100°F 02 0° to 1700°C 84 0-5 V
S 17 0° to 3100°F 03 0° to 1700°C 85 1-5 V
T 23 -300° to 400°F 09 -199.9° to 200.0°C 86 0-10 V
U 24 -300° to 400°F 13 -199.9° to 200°C 94 0-20 mA
WRe5-26 26 0° to 4200°F 12 0° to 2300°C 95 4-20 mA
Range Codes are not required for ordering, but are used for field programming.
*750°F (400°C) falls below the accuracy range
207
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 L84000 Series Electric Contact Controller
LLERS

On/Off Control Specifications

Multiple Switches Models
Available
L84000 (1 switch)
RS

Heavy Duty L84100 (2 switch)

CRCOOLNLTERO

Contact Switches L84200 (3 switch)

L84300 (4 switch)
Simple Mechanical
Operation Control On/Off, via electric contact switch

Dial Size 6"

Movement Stainless Steel and Brass

NIT

Case Blue ABS plastic, panel mounted

ON

Cover Blue ABS plastic, close cell

RO

rubber gasketed
E L E C TC

Window Acrylic

Pointer Brass

Switch Ratings
L84000, L84100:
10 A @ 125/250 VAC,
0.25 A @ 120 VDC
L84000 shown L84200, L84300:
5 A @ 250 VAC,
5 A res./3 A ind. @ 28 VDC
The Trerice L84000 Series Electric For applications where
the process media may
Contact Controller is designed for be corrosive or contained Dialface Aluminum, white background
applications that require the opening under pressure, the use of with black graduations and markings
and closing of electric solenoid a thermowell is required to
Accuracy + One Scale Division
prevent damage to the
valves, heaters, and other electrical controller and facilitate its
Approximate Shipping Weight
devices. It is a rugged and versatile removal from the process.
9.0 lbs [4.09 kg]
controller, capable of producing (Refer to page 212)

“On/Off” control over a wide range

of temperatures from -100°F to
700°F. This controller includes a
setting adjustment knob and one or
more SPDT electric contact switches.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: L 84100 145 B10 10 W02

Actuation Model Specific Range Thermal System Capillary Length Thermowell

L Liquid 84000 1 Switch Refer to Standard Refer to Thermal 05 5 Feet W02 Brass
84100 2 Switch Ranges System Selection 10 10 Feet W05 304 SS 1/2 NPT
84200 3 Switch (page 209) (pages 210-211) 15 15 Feet W06 316 SS
84300 4 Switch 20 20 Feet
W12 Brass
20 Feet Maximum W15 304 SS 3/4 NPT
W16 316 SS

208
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 L84000 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
Electric Contact Controller

3.37
[85.6]
1.25
[31.8]

CONTROLLERS
7.50
[190.5] .82
Ø.19 [4.8] 4 [20.7]
HOLES

2.50 8.69
[63.5] [220.7]

4.05
[102.9]
.92 [23.3]

1.64
[41.7] 1.41
[35.8]
4.07
[103.3]
8.13
[206.6]

5.25
[133.4]
2.63
6.00 [66.7]
[152.4]
3.00
[76.2]

7.90 7.62
DRILL FOR [200.7] [193.5]
5.38 3.54
[136.7] NO. 8 SCREW 3.68
2.15 4 HOLES [93.4] [89.8]
[54.7]

3.63
[92.1] DRILL FOR NO. 8 SCREW
4 HOLES
.38 [9.7] 7.25
SURFACE MOUNTING WITHOUT BRACKETS MAXIMUM PANEL [184.2]
THICKNESS

FLUSH PANEL MOUNTING WITHOUT BRACKETS

Standard Ranges
Fahrenheit Ranges Celsius Ranges Fahrenheit & Celsius Ranges
Range Range Range
Code Range Code Range Code Range
105 -100° to 100°F 225 -70° to 40°C 325 -30° to 170°F & -35° to 75°C
125 -30° to 170°F 245 -35° to 75°C 345 50° to 350°F & 10° to 175°C
145 0° to 200°F 265 0° to 115°C 355 50° to 700°F & 10° to 370°C
165 30° to 240°F 295 10° to 175°C
175 50° to 350°F 305 10° to 370°C
195 50° to 700°F
215 200° to 400°F

209
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermal System Selection
for L84000 Series Electronic Contact Controller
CONTROLLERS

Order Connection Style Bulb Capillary

Bulb and Capillary Style Code & Material Material Tubing Material

Union Connection B01* Brass, Copper Copper with Bronze

1/ 2
NPT Braided Armor

1/2 NPT HUB B10 Stainless Steel, Stainless Stainless

CONNECTING 1/ 2 NPT Steel Steel
TUBING U
7/16"
B15* Brass, Copper Copper with Bronze Braid
1/ 2
NPT and Stainless Steel Spiral Armor

SPLIT BULB
NUT B16 Stainless Steel, Stainless Stainless Steel with
1/ 2 NPT Steel Stainless Steel Spiral Armor

Adjustable Union Connection B02* Brass, Copper Copper with Bronze

1/ 2
NPT Braided Armor

1/2 NPT HUB

U 7/16"

B04** Stainless Steel, Stainless Stainless

1/ 2 NPT Steel Steel
BULB
CONNECTING
TUBING ADJ.
UNION FITTING

Plain Bulb B05* None Copper Copper with Bronze

Braided Armor
CONNECTING
TUBING X 7/16"

B06 None Stainless Stainless

BULB Steel Steel

Teflon Covered Bulb B08* None Copper with Copper with

Teflon Covering Teflon Covering

CONNECTING SEALED
X END
TUBING

B07* None Stainless Steel Stainless Steel

BULB 5/16" with with
TEFLON COVER Teflon Covering Teflon Covering
OVERALL

*Not available with Temperature Ranges over 450°F (232°C).

**Ranges over 450°F (232°C), one-time adjustment only.

210
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermal System Selection
for L84000 Series Electronic Contact Controller
Minimum Bulb Insertion Length
(U/X)
Liquid Actuated
Temperature Range

CONTROLLERS
-100° to 100°F -30° to 170°F 50° to 350°F 50° to 700°F
0° to 200°F
30° to 240°F
200° to 400°C

37/8" 53/8" 37/8" N/A

(Use 6" thermowell) (Use 6" thermowell)

37/8" 53/8" 37/8" 15/8"

(Use 6" thermowell) (Use 6" thermowell)

37/8" 53/8" 37/8" N/A

(Use 6" thermowell) (Use 6" thermowell)

37/8" 53/8" 37/8" 15/8"

(Use 6" thermowell) (Use 6" thermowell)

37/8" 53/8" 37/8" N/A

Adjustable up to 24"

37/8" 53/8" 37/8" 15/8"

Adjustable up to 24"

4" 51/2" 4" N/A

4" 51/2" 4" 111/16"

N/A 22" 15" N/A

N/A 22" 15" N/A

211
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Thermowells
for L84000 Electric Contact Controllers All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

If Thermowells are to be purchased as a separate item, or if a Special Thermowell is required, please refer to this page. If a complete
Electric Contact Controller is purchased, the proper Thermowell to match the sensing bulb ordered will be supplied. Please note sensing
bulb size is affected by temperature range.
Indicate WO2 for 1/2 NPT Brass, W05 for 1/2 NPT 304 SS or W06 for 1/2 NPT 316SS.
Indicate W12 for 3/4 NPT Brass, W15 for 3/4 NPT 304 SS or W16 for 3/4 NPT 316SS.
CONTROLLERS

Standard with Lagging Extension

(A)
BULB LENGTH (A)
BULB LENGTH
Ø.447 [11]
Ø.447 [11]
5/8 -18 UNF (P)
EXTERNAL THREAD 5/8 -18 UNF (P)
EXTERNAL THREAD

U
.31 [8] LENGTH Ø.58 [15] (T) U
LAGGING 1.00
.31 [8] [25] LENGTH Ø.56 [14]
EXTENSION
.75 [19]

Lengths Pressure Rating (psi) per ASME Boiler Code, Section VIII, Part UG28
Standard Lagging Operating Temperature
(A) U (T) U Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F
Bulb Length Length Lagging Extension Length Carbon Steel 2500 2240 2020 1640
2" 2.13 [54] — — 304 Stainless Steel 2780 2280 2100 1700
4" 3.88 [99] 1.50 [38] 2.13 [54] 316 Stainless Steel 2770 2660 2500 2300
6" 5.75 [146] 1.50 [38] 3.88 [99] Brass 1330 psi @ 150˚F, 1280 @ 350˚F
8" 7.75 [197] 1.50 [38] 5.75 [146]
12" 11.75 [299] 1.50 [38] 7.50 [191]
18" 17.75 [451] 1.50 [38] 15.75 [400]
24" 23.75 [603] 1.50 [38] 21.75 [552]

Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be
considered. Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 7-3 G 2

Thermowell Style (P) External Thread Bulb Length** (T) Lagging Extension Material
7- Controller 3 1/2 NPT D 2" Bulb C 11/2" Extension (4" and longer Stem only) 2 Brass
4 3/4 NPT G 4" Bulb Omit if None 5 304SS
J 6" Bulb 6 316SS
L 8" Bulb
R 12" Bulb*
Wa 18" Bulb*
Wk 24" Bulb*

**Controller Thermowells with Bulb Lengths

*Not available with 1/2 NPT external thread. over 6" are typically for use with Adjustable
Union or Bendable Extension Connections.

212
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Notes

CONTROLLERS

213
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Solenoid Valve
960 Series
The Trerice 960 Series Solenoid Valve is particularly suited for
C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S

1/ 8"
through 3"
use with electric contact controllers. This packless, self-contained valve
Valve Sizes
is designed to operate on a minimum of current and can be used for air,
2-Way steam, water, oil other liquids that are not corrosive to brass. The valve
Single Seat or
is opened and closed by a balancing piston and is controlled by a small
3-Way
pilot valve. The Series 960 should always be mounted to a horizontal
Piston Pilot pipeline with the coil in an upright position.
Operated
For optimal performance, the service conditions of the application
Threaded Ends must be considered when selecting a solenoid valve. Improper
application may cause failure of the valve, resulting in possible
personal injury or property damage.

How to Order
960WA44 shown Please order using the Item Number listed.

Specifications
Minimum Maximum Item Approximate
Model Type Coil Service ΔP Temperature Number Pipe Size Cv Shipping Weight
960WB General service, 120 Vac/60 Hz, Water, air, 5 PSI 220°F 960WB44 3/8 NPT 2.9 3.0 lbs [1.36 kg]
normally closed, 3/8- 2 NPT: oil (<400 SSU), (104°C) 960WB55 1/2 NPT 3.6 3.0 lbs [1.36 kg]
bronze body, NEMA 4X 125 PSI max. 960WB66 3/4 NPT 6.8 4.0 lbs [1.82 kg]
Viton seat screw 21/2 - 3 NPT: 960WB77 1 NPT 11.5 5.0 lbs [2.27 kg]
NEMA 1 960WB88 11/4 NPT 18 7.0 lbs [3.18 kg]
960WB99 11/2 NPT 26 9.0 lbs [4.09 kg]
960WB10 2 NPT 48 14 lbs [6.36 kg]
960WB11 21/2 NPT 75 22 lbs [10.0 kg]
960WB13 3 NPT 100 35 lbs [15.9 kg]
960SB High temperature, 120 Vac/60 Hz, Steam, 5 PSI 356°F 960SB44 3/8 NPT 2.9 3.0 lbs [1.36 kg]
normally closed, 3/8 - 2 NPT: water, air, (180°C) 960SB55 1/2 NPT 3.6 3.0 lbs [1.36 kg]
bronze body, NEMA 4X oil (<400 SSU), 960SB66 3/4 NPT 6.8 4.0 lbs [1.82 kg]
Teflon seat screw 21/2 - 3 NPT: 125 PSI max. 960SB77 1 NPT 11.5 5.0 lbs [2.27 kg]
NEMA 1 960SB88 11/4 NPT 18 7.0 lbs [3.18 kg]
960SB99 11/2 NPT 26 9.0 lbs [4.09 kg]
960SB10 2 NPT 48 14 lbs [6.36 kg]
960SB11 21/2 NPT 75 22 lbs [10.0 kg]
960SB13 3 NPT 100 35 lbs [15.9 kg]
960WA General service, 120 Vac/60 Hz, Water, air, 10 PSI 300°F 960WA44 3/8 NPT 2.9 4.0 lbs [1.82 kg]
normally open, NEMA 1 oil (<400 SSU), (149°C) 960WA55 1/2 NPT 3.6 4.0 lbs [1.82 kg]
bronze body, 300 PSI max. 960WA66 3/4 NPT 6.8 5.0 lbs [2.27 kg]
Teflon seat screw 960WA77 1 NPT 11.5 6.0 lbs [2.73 kg]
960WA88 11/4 NPT 18 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
960WA99 11/2 NPT 26 10 lbs [4.55 kg]
960WA10 2 NPT 48 15 lbs [6.82 kg]
960WA11 21/2 NPT 75 22 lbs [10.0 kg]
960WA13 3 NPT 100 35 lbs [15.9 kg]
960SA High temperature, 120 Vac/60 Hz, Steam, 5 PSI 450°F 960SA44 3/8 NPT 2.9 4.0 lbs [1.82 kg]
normally open, NEMA 1 water, air, (232°C) 960SA55 1/2 NPT 3.6 4.0 lbs [1.82 kg]
bronze body, oil (<400 SSU), 960SA66 3/4 NPT 6.8 5.0 lbs [2.27 kg]
Teflon seat screw 150 PSI max. 960SA77 1 NPT 11.5 6.0 lbs [2.73 kg]
960SA88 11/4 NPT 18 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
960SA99 11/2 NPT 26 10 lbs [4.55 kg]
960SA10 2 NPT 48 15 lbs [6.82 kg]
960SA11 21/2 NPT 75 22 lbs [10.0 kg]
960SA13 3 NPT 100 35 lbs [15.9 kg]
960WU General service, 120 Vac/60 Hz, Water, air, N/A 180°F 960WU1Z 1/8 NPT .12 1.5 lbs [0.68 kg]
3-way, brass body NEMA 1 oil (<300 SSU), (82°C) 960WU3Z 1/4 NPT .12 2.0 lbs [0.91 kg]
50 PSI max.

214
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Solenoid Valve
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
960 Series

C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S
Item A B C
Number Style in. mm in. mm in. mm
B 960WB44 S 5.12 130 4.25 108 2.75 70
A 960WB55 S 5.12 130 4.25 108 2.75 70
960WB66 S 5.50 140 4.50 114 3.25 83
960WB77 S 5.75 146 4.56 116 3.81 97
960WB88 S 6.50 165 5.06 129 4.25 108
960WB99 S 7.06 179 5.38 137 4.88 124
960WB10 S 8.00 203 5.88 149 5.88 149
960WB11 R 9.81 249 7.94 202 7.00 178
C 960WB13 R 10.88 276 8.06 205 8.25 210

960SB44 S 5.12 130 4.25 108 2.75 70

960SB55 S 5.12 130 4.25 108 2.75 70
960SB66 S 5.50 140 4.50 114 3.25 83
STYLE “S”
960SB77 S 5.75 146 4.56 116 3.81 97
960SB88 S 6.50 165 5.06 129 4.25 108
960SB99 S 7.06 179 5.38 137 4.88 124
960SB10 S 8.00 203 5.88 149 5.88 149
960SB11 R 9.81 249 7.94 202 7.00 178
960SB13 R 10.88 276 8.06 205 8.25 210

960WA44 R 7.44 189 6.56 167 2.75 70

960WA55 R 7.44 189 6.56 167 2.75 70
960WA66 R 7.88 200 6.88 175 3.25 83
960WA77 R 8.12 206 6.94 176 3.81 97
STYLE “R” 960WA88 R 8.69 221 7.31 186 4.25 108
960WA99 R 9.44 240 7.75 197 4.88 124
960WA10 R 10.56 268 8.44 214 5.88 149
960WA11 R 10.81 275 8.38 213 7.00 178
960WA13 R 11.56 294 8.56 217 8.25 210

960SA44 R 7.44 189 6.56 167 2.75 70

960SA55 R 7.44 189 6.56 167 2.75 70
960SA66 R 7.88 200 6.88 175 3.25 83
960SA77 R 8.12 206 6.94 176 3.81 97
960SA88 R 8.69 221 7.31 186 4.25 108
STYLE “T” 960SA99 R 9.44 240 7.75 197 4.88 124
960SA10 R 10.56 268 8.44 214 5.88 149
960SA11 R 10.81 275 8.38 213 7.00 178
960SA13 R 11.56 294 8.56 217 8.25 210

960WU1Z T 3.16 80 2.19 56 1.19 30

960WU3Z T 3.16 80 2.19 56 1.19 30

215
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 I/P Transducer
TA901 • Electropneumatic
C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S

4 to 20 mA
The Trerice TA901 Electropneumatic (I/P) Transducer
Input converts a milliamp current signal to a linearly proportional pneumatic
output pressure. This transducer is designed for control applications that
3 to 15 PSI
Output require a high degree of reliability and repeatability. The TA901 is used
in the control operation of valve actuators and pneumatic valve positioners
Intrinsically Safe
in the petrochemical, HVAC, energy management, textile, paper,
Zero and Span and food and drug industries.
Adjustments
The TA901 I/P Transducer is tested and approved by Factory Mutual as
Intrinsically Safe Class I, II and III, Division I, Groups C, D, E, F and G when
installed in accordance with the Installation, Operation and Maintenance
Instructions. It should be installed in a vertical position in a vibration-free area.
TA901 shown The Trerice TA987 Air Filter/Regulator is recommended for filtering and
regulating the pressure of plant compressed air and delivering clean,
dry air at the proper pressure to pneumatic control devices.
Specifications
Model Air Requirements Mounting Intrinsic Safety
TA901 Clean, oil-free, dry air filtered Pipe, panel or bracket in a Tested and approved by
Input to 40 microns vibration-free area. Field Factory Mutual as Intrinsically
4-20 mA adjustment will be required if Safe Class I, II and III, Division
Minimum Supply Pressure:
mounted in a nonvertical position I, Groups C, D, E, F and G
3 psig
Output when installed in accordance
1-17 psig Per ANSI/FCI 87-2 Maximum Supply Pressure: Adjustment with Installation, Operation and
(can be calibrated to provide 100 psig Adjustable zero and span Maintenance Instructions
1-9 psig or 9-17 psig)
Sensitivity: <±0.1% of span Ambient Temperature
Accuracy
Volume Booster per psig -20°F (-30°C) to 140°F (60°C)
Terminal Based Linearity:
Built-in volume booster allows <±0.75% of span
Air Consumption: 0.03 SCFH
flow capacity up to 20 SCFM Approximate Shipping
typical Repeatability: <0.5% of span
Connections Weight
Flow Rate: 4.5 SCFM at Hysteresis: <1.0% of span 2.1 lbs [0.94 kg]
Pneumatic: 1/4 NPT 25 psig supply Response Time: <0.25 sec. @
Electric: 1/2 NPT 3-15 psig
Relief Capacity: 2.0 SCFM at
5 PSIG above 20 psig setpoint

HOW TO ORDER
Please order using Item Number TA901
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
MOUNTING BRACKET

.55 [14.0]
1.10
[27.9]
2.88 .55
[73.1] 1.09 2.18 [55.4]
[14.0] [27.7] MAX. SQUARE

1.25 [31.8]
1/2
NPT
Ø.21 [5.4]

4.24 Ø1.13
[107.7] [28.7]
1.43 1.50
[36.2] [38.1]

.55 [14.0]

10-32 UNF-2A X .38 DEEP 1.50

MOUNTING HOLES [38.1]
1/4 NPT
18 GA. WIRE LEADS
18" LONG
BLACK-POSITIVE / WHITE-NEGATIVE

216
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Air Filter/Regulator
TA987

C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S
Cast Aluminum The Trerice TA987 Air Filter/Regulator is recommended for filtering
Housing and regulating the pressure of plant compressed air to deliver clean, dry
Removable Nylon air at the proper pressure to pneumatic control devices. Supply air enters
Mesh Filter the inlet port, passes through the filtering element, and exits through the
Low Air
reducing valve to the outlet port. The filtering element removes particles as
Consumption small as 40 microns. A drip well is provided for the accumulation of oil
and water and a drain cock is included to allow purging of the unit.
Drip Well
The filtering element is readily accessible for cleaning by removal of the
drip well bowl.

The maximum allowable supply pressure to TA987 Air Filter/Regulator

is 250 psig. Improper application may cause failure of the regulator,
resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

Specifications
Model Air Requirements (cont.) Filter Mounting
TA987 Flow Rate: 20 SCFM at 100 Removes particles 40 microns Side, pipe, panel or
psig supply/20 psig output or greater through body
Air Requirements Relief Capacity: 0.1 SCFM at
Maximum Supply Pressure: 5 psig above setpoint Port Size Ambient Temperature
250 psig 1/4 NPT -20°F (-30°C) to 160°F (71°C)
Effect of Supply Pressure
Output Range: Variation: <0.2 psig for 25 psig
0 to 30 psig, adjustable Housing Approximate Shipping
Cast aluminum Weight
Sensitivity: 0.036 psig 1.9 lbs [0.86 kg]
Air Consumption: <6 SCFH

All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

.31 [7.9] SQUARE 2.06

[52.3]
1.44
[36.6]

10-24 UNC
2 HOLES
VENT
GAUGE
PORT

2.10 2.14
[53.3] [54.4] 7.25
OUT [184.2]
.05 [1.2] .75
[19.1] 1/4-20 UNC
TO CL .44 [11.1] DEEP
OF
2 HOLES
GAUGE
PORT Ø.36 [9.1]
Ø.44 THRU 2 HOLES
[11.2]

1.25
2.75 [31.8]
[69.9]
2.25
3.19 [57.2]
[81.0]
3.19
[81.0]

217
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Solid State Relay
TA600 Series • AC Output
Specifications
C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S

UL Listed Models
Arc Free Switching TA610: 10 A output
TA625: 25 A output
Opto-Isolated TA640: 40 A output
Input Circuits
Case Epoxy molded with aluminum
Compatible with baseplate
DTL and TTL Logic
Connection Screw terminals
Input Voltage: 3-32 VDC
Impedance: 1000Ω minimum
Must turn on: 3.0 VDC
Must turn off: 1.0 VDC
TA625 shown Isolation signal to load: 7000 VDC
Isolation signal to base: 2500 VDC
The Trerice TA600 Series Solid State Relay Capacitance signal to load: 15 pt
has no moving parts, rendering it impervious Output Voltage: 20~300 Vrms
to shock and vibration, and giving it Typical turn-on voltage: 5 Vrms
a virtually infinite life. Response time: 0.5 cycle max.
OFF state DV/DT: 200 V/m sec
OFF state leakage current: 15 mA
Max. non-repetitive single cycle surge
HOW TO ORDER current: 400 A
Cycle surge current: 400 A
Please order using Item Number TA610 , TA625 or TA640 IT for fusing (T=8.3 ms): 400 AS
Peak inverse voltage: 600 Vpk

Ambient Temperature
-20˚F (-30˚C) to 140˚F (60˚C)

Approximate Shipping Weight

All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters. 0.2 lbs [0.09 kg]

MOUNTING HOLE
.175 [4.4]

2.25
[57.2]

1.75
[44.5]

.86
[21.8]

218
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Enclosure
TA302

C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S
Polycarbonate Specifications
Construction Model
Aluminum
Mounting Panel TA302

Termination Size 14.3" x 12.4" x 6.1"

Compartment (363 x 316 x 156 mm)
NEMA 12
Protection Application
Fits all electronic controls and
indicating devices

Mounting
The Trerice TA302 Enclosure is ideal for Surface
mounting a Trerice Electronic Controller or Digital
Indicator. The enclosure is constructed from rugged, Body and Cover
impact-resistant polycarbonate and furnished with Polycarbonate enclosure body
and transparent cover
an anodized aluminum front mounting panel. It can
accommodate all Trerice Electronic Control and Hinges
Indicating devices. Polyamide, removable for left or
right side mounting

Knockouts
2 x 0.85" and 2 x 1.09"

Front Panel
Anodized aluminum

Protection
NEMA 12

Ambient Temperature
175°F (80°C) maximum

Approximate Shipping Weight

5.5 lbs [2.50 kg]

All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

B
E
C
D

A B C D E
14.3 [363] 9.2 [234] 12.4 [316] 3.0 [78] 6.1 [156]

219
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Electronic Temperature Sensor
Connection Head Type • RTD or Thermocouple
The Trerice Connection Head
C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S

Thermocouple Specifications
or RTD is available with both Type J
and Type K Thermocouples, Sensors Description
Cast Aluminum as well as RTD sensors. The
Polypropylene weather proof head provides TJD Type J T/C
or Stainless a conduit connection and is TKD Type K T/C
Steel Head available in cast aluminum TDD 100Ω RTD
Weather Proof (screw cover), polypropylene TMD 1000Ω RTD
(flip cover) and stainless steel
Welded or (screw cover). The stem is
Hot Junction
Spring Loaded either welded directly to the
Stem 1/2 NPT threaded connection,
T/C: Ungrounded
RTD: Platinum, 3-Wire
or is spring-loaded to provide
maximum sensitivity. The spring- Stem 316 stainless steel
loaded stem must always be 1/4" diameter
installed in a thermowell.
Insulation Ceramic
Extension wire and transmitter
TJDZ04UWA shown accessories are also available. Head Cast aluminum, polypropylene,
Please consult the Temperature stainless steel
Sensor Accessories Section for
3.91 details. Process Connection
[99.4] 1/2 NPT welded or spring-loaded
For applications where the
process media may be Conduit Connection
Ø3.30 corrosive or contained under 3/4 NPT Female
[83.8] pressure, the use of a
thermowell is required to
prevent damage to the sensor Approximate Shipping Weight
and facilitate its removal from 1.1 lbs [0.50 kg]
the process. To prevent leakage
of the process media, spring
loaded sensors must always be
3.40 installed in a thermowell.
[86.2]
1/2 NPT
Sensor Specifications
Thermocouple
Type Color Code Positive Lead Negative Lead Temperature Range
STEM
J Black Iron* (Fe) Constantan (Cu-Ni) 32° to 1382°F
LENGTH [white] [red] (0° to 750°C)
K Yellow Nickel-Chromium (Ni-Cr) Nickel-Aluminum* (Ni-Al) 32° to 2282°F
[yellow] [red] (0° to 1250°C)
*magnetic lead

RTD
Ø.25
Type Material Resistance @ 0°C Temperature Coefficient Temperature Range
[6.4]
D Platinum (Pt) 100Ω a = 0.00385Ω/Ω/°C -50° to 700°F
All dimensions are nominal. (-45° to 400°C)
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters. M Platinum (Pt) 1000Ω a = 0.00385Ω/Ω/°C -50° to 700°F
(-45° to 400°C)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: TJD Z 04 U W A

Sensor Stem Style Stem Length Hot Junction Connection Head Material
TJD Type J T/C Z 316SS, 1/4 O.D. 02 21/2" Stem U Ungrounded (T/C) S Spring Loaded, A Aluminum
TKD Type K T/C 04 4" Stem D 3 Wire (RTD) 1/ 2 NPT P Polypropylene
TDD 100Ω RTD 06 6" Stem W Welded, S Stainless Steel
TMD 1000Ω RTD 09 9" Stem 1/ 2 NPT
12 12" Stem
Other Lengths: Specify in inches (24" maximum)
Other sensor styles available. Please consult the Trerice Temperature Section.

220
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
All dimensions are nominal.
Thermowells
Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters. for RTD & Thermocouple Temperature Sensors
Standard Standard

C O N T RO L L E R AC C E S S O R I E S
2 1/2"- 6"
(A)
(A) STEM LENGTH
STEM LENGTH

(P) Ø.260 [7]

(P)
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL Ø.260 [7]
THREAD 1/2 NPSM THREAD

1/2 NPSM

U Ø.44 [11]
.40 [10] LENGTH U
1.00 Ø.50 [13]
.75 [19] LENGTH
[25]
.61 [15]

with Lagging Extension

(A)
STEM LENGTH
(P)
1/2 NPSM EXTERNAL THREAD Ø.260 [7]

Ø.50 [13]
(T) U
.75 [19] LAGGING 1.00
[25] LENGTH
EXTENSION

Lengths
Standard Lagging Pressure Rating (PSI)
(A) U (T) U Operating Temperature
Stem Length Length Lagging Extension Length Material 70°F 200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F 1000°F
21/2" 1.75 [44] — — Carbon steel 5000 5000 4800 4600 3500 -
4" 2.50 [64] 1.00 [25] 1.50 [38] 304 stainless steel 6550 6000 4860 4140 3510 3130
6" 4.50 [114] 2.00 [51] 2.50 [64] 316 stainless steel 6540 6400 6000 5270 5180 4660
9" 7.50 [191] 3.00 [76] 4.50 [114] Monel 5530 4990 4660 4450 4450 -
12" 10.50 [267] 3.00 [76] 7.50 [191] Brass 3170 psi @ 150˚F, 2930 @ 350˚F
15" 13.50 [343] 3.00 [76] 10.50 [267]
18" 16.50 [419] 3.00 [76] 13.50 [343]
24" 22.50 [572] 3.00 [76] 19.50 [495]

Selection of the proper thermowell is the sole responsibility of the user. Temperature and pressure limitations must be considered.
Improper application may cause failure of the thermowell, resulting in possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use
and application, please refer to the Thermowells For Thermometers And Electrical Temperature Sensors Standard ASME B40.9.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 76-4J6

Thermowell Style (P) External Thread (A) Stem Length (T) Lagging Extension Material
76- Sensor, Stepped Shank 3 1/2 NPT* D 21/2" Stem A 1" Extension (4" Stem only) 2 Brass
(21/2" - 6" Stem 4 3/4 NPT G 4" Stem C 2" Extension (6" Stem only) 3 Steel
Straight Shank) 5 1 NPT* J 6" Stem E 3" Extension (9" and longer Stem only) 4 Monel
M 9" Stem Omit if None 5 304SS
R 12" Stem 6 316SS
V 15" Stem
Wa 18" Stem
Wk 24" Stem
*Not available with 21/2" Stem Length
Other thermowell styles available. Please consult pages 155-161 of the Trerice Temperature Section.

221
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Control Valves
DESIGN & OPERATION

Description
C O N T R O L VA LV E S

A control valve is a device capable of modulating flow at varying degrees between minimal flow and
full capacity in response to a signal from an external control device. The control valve, often referred
to as “the final control element,” is a critical part of any control loop, as it performs the physical
work and is the element that directly affects the process.

Principles of Operation
A control valve is comprised of an actuator mounted to a valve. The valve modulates flow through
movement of a valve plug in relation to the port(s) located within the valve body. The valve plug is
attached to a valve stem, which, in turn, is connected to the actuator. The actuator, which can be
pneumatically or electrically operated, directs the movement of the stem as dictated by the external
control device.
Pneumatic/Diaphragm Actuated
Trerice Pneumatic Actuators are direct acting and utilize an air signal from an external control
device to create a modulating control action. The force of the air signal is received into the
actuator through a top port and distributed across the full area of the actuator’s diaphragm. The
diaphragm presses down on the diaphragm plate and spring return assembly, which then moves
the valve stem and plug assembly downward to stroke the valve. This actuator will move to a
stem-out position in the event of air signal failure. The choice of valve action (stem-In-To-Close or
stem-In-To-Open) will determine its signal failure position.
Electric Actuated
Trerice Electric Actuators are motor driven devices that utilize an electrical input signal to
generate a motor shaft rotation. This rotation is, in turn, translated by the unit’s linkage into
a linear motion, which drives the valve stem and plug assembly for flow modulation. In case
of electric signal failure, these actuators can be specified to fail in the stem-out, stem-in,
or last position.

Selecting a Control Valve

Selection of a control valve is primarily dependent upon on the service conditions and load
characteristics of the application.

Actuator
• 910 Series (Pneumatic) – The Trerice 910 Series Control Valve is designed for accurate
performance within light industrial, HVAC and commercial process applications. The 910
Series is characterized by its direct acting, compact pneumatic diaphragm actuator.
• 940 Series (Pneumatic) – The Trerice 940 Series Control Valve is designed for high
performance in industrial, demanding HVAC and commercial process applications. It is
furnished with a direct acting, heavy duty pneumatic diaphragm actuator and can be
equipped with a positioner for increased shut-off pressure capabilities.

222
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 ADJUSTING BAR

AIR PRESSURE CONNECTION

C O N T R O L VA LV E S
RETURN SPRING

ACTUATOR HOUSING
DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM PLATE
RANGE ADJUSTMENT SPRING
YOKE
SPRING ADJUSTMENT SCREW
JAM NUTS
SET POINT SCALE

PACKING NUT
TEFLON V-RING PACKING
BONNET NUT

VALVE STEM

O-RING

VALVE SLEEVE
VALVE BODY

• 940E Series (Electric) – The Trerice 940E Series Control Valve is

Actuator: Direct Acting
designed for high performance in industrial, demanding HVAC and
Direct Acting actuators are designed
commercial process applications. It features a direct acting electric to move the valve stem to the
motor and linkage actuator, which can be used where an “in” position as the control signal
air supply is not available. (pneumatic pressure or electrical
signal) increases.

All Trerice Control Valves should be carefully selected to meet the

demands of the particular application. The information contained
within this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the
proper selection. Selection of the proper control valve is the sole
responsibility of the user. Improper application may cause failure,
resulting in possible personal injury or property damage.

223
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Control Valves
DESIGN & OPERATION
Control Valve Comparison
Consideration 910 910T 910EP 940 940E
Actuation Pneumatic Pneumatic Pneumatic Pneumatic Electric
C O N T R O L VA LV E S

Control Action On/Off Proportional Proportional Proportional Proportional

Input Signal 15 psi 3-15 psi 3-15 psi 3-15 psi 4-20 mA / 0-10 VDC
Application Standard Duty Standard Duty Standard Duty Heavy Duty Heavy Duty
Price Economical Moderate Moderate Premium Premium
Response Time Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent Average
Available with Positioner No No No Yes Not Required
Shut-Off Pressure* ≤ 250 psig ≤ 250 psig ≤ 250 psig ≤ 720 psig ≤ 400 psig
Valve Sizes 1/2" thru 4" 1/8" thru 4" 1/2" thru 2" 1/2" thru 8" 1/2" thru 8"
Valve Styles Single Seat Double Seat** Single Seat Single Seat Single Seat
Double Seat 3-Way Double Seat Double Seat
3-Way 3-Way
Valve Materials Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze
Cast-Iron Cast-Iron Cast-Iron Cast-Iron
Cast-Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel
Trim Styles Modified Linear Modified Linear Equal Percentage Equal Percentage Equal Percentage
Modified Linear Modified Linear
* Allowable pressure is dependent upon body material, connection and temperature of the process fluid.
Please consult the Valve Pressure Ratings table.
** Single Seat - 1/2"

Valve
Trerice Control Valves are available with a wide variety of valve bodies in various styles, materials,
connections and sizes.
A control valve is not considered a shut-off valve. A pressure surge may force a single seated valve plug open.
The Trerice Control Valve is a balanced equilibrium system and provides no power to tightly seat the valve plug.
A separate power driven or hand actuated valve is required to ensure tight shut-off when necessary.

Style
Trerice Control Valve Bodies are available in single seated, double seated and 3-way designs.
• Single Seated Valves are an excellent choice when a higher degree of shut-off is required. However, this
design is unbalanced and limited in the pressure that it will shut off against. The leakage rate is approximately
0.1% of the maximum capacity.
• Double Seated Valves are nearly pressure balanced and, therefore, are able to close the valve plug against
higher operating pressures. However, since temperature fluctuations may cause expansion and contraction
across the seats, tight shut-off is not always possible. The leakage rate is approximately 0.5% of the
maximum capacity. Double seated valves have a faster flow response and greater capacity than single
seated valves and are recommended when tight shut-off is not required.
• 3-Way Valves are used for mixing two flows together, or for diverting a flow to or around a device (bypass).
In order to produce consistent flow quantity for stable operation, the pressure drop across both flow paths
(inlet to outlet) must be nearly equal.
3-Way Valves for 910 Series are exclusively of the Sleeve Type. 3-Way Valves for 940 Series are available in
two styles: Plug Type (common port on the side) and Sleeve Type (common port on the bottom). The Plug
Type is exclusively for use on mixing applications. The Sleeve Type is most commonly used for diverting
applications, however due to its design it can also be used for mixing applications. The Sleeve Type design
is constructed with an O-ring around the sleeve. The O-ring is suitable for water or glycol type service, up
to a maximum of 300°F. A higher temperature viton O-ring for use with other fluids, such as oil, or for
temperatures up to 410°F is available. Consult factory.

224
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Action
Trerice Single and Double Seated Valves are available as stem In-To-Close (Normally Open), or stem

C O N T R O L VA LV E S
In-To-Open (Normally Closed) for various application requirements. The action of 910 Series, bronze-bodied
valves is field reversible. Trerice 3-Way Valves can be specified for either mixing or diverting service.
Trerice Control Valves are NOT intended for use in applications where the media comes in direct
contact with the skin or body, such as showers, baths, lavatories or wash fountains.

Control Valve Action

Stem Action Normal (Fail*) Position
In-To-Close Normally Open
In-To-Open Normally Closed
* The electric motor actuator of the 940E Series can be specified to move
the valve to stem in, stem out, or last position in case of electrical failure.

Body Material and Connection

Trerice Control Valves are available with bronze, cast-iron, cast steel and stainless steel valve bodies.
Union, flanged and threaded connection styles are available.
Valve Pressure Ratings (psig)
Operating Temperature
100°F 150°F 175°F 200°F 225°F 250°F 275°F 300°F 350°F 400°F
Body Material Connection (38°C) (66°C) (80°C) (93°C) (108°C) (121°C) (135°C) (149°C) (176°C) (204°C)
Bronze Iron Unions 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Bronze Threaded 400 400 392 385 375 365 350 335 300 —
Cast-Iron Threaded 400 400 385 370 355 340 325 310 280 250
Cast-Iron Class 125 Flanged 175 175 170 165 157 150 145 140 125 —
Cast-Iron Class 250 Flanged 400 400 385 370 355 340 325 310 280 250
Cast-Steel Threaded 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Stainless Steel Threaded 720 670 645 620 605 590 575 560 537 515

Trim
Valve trim is comprised of the stem and plug assembly, and the seats within the ports. 910 Series Control
Valves employ either a quick-opening or equal percentage stainless steel valve plug and permanently
brazed-in stainless steel seats for smooth performance throughout the life of the valve. The valve plug is
both top and bottom guided to ensure positive seating alignment. Series 940 and 940E Two-Way Control
Valves are furnished with an equal percentage plug design. A quick-opening plug design is ideally suited
for use with an “On/Off” Controller, while an equal percentage design is typically used with a
“Proportional” or “PID” Controller.
Trerice 3-Way Valves use a skirt-guided stainless steel sleeve and brass seating surface to change flow
direction in a linear manner within the body.

225
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Control Valves
DESIGN & OPERATION
Plug Design Availability
Plug Design
Series Style Modified Linear Equal Percentage
C O N T R O L VA LV E S

910 2-Way x x
3-Way x
940 / 940E 2-Way x
3-Way x

Inherent Flow Characteristics

100
Percent of Maximum Flow

80

60 Plug Design
Modified Linear
Equal Percentage
40

20

0 20 40 60 80 100
Percent of Stem Travel

Packing
Trerice valves feature a self-energizing Teflon V-Ring packing, which reduces leakage around the
valve stem. V-Ring packing is spring loaded to maintain proper compression and does not require
manual adjustment.

Size
The proper sizing of a control valve is one of the most important factors in its selection. A valve that is too
small will not be able to provide the desired capacity during peak load conditions, while a valve that is too
large may overshoot the control point and operate with the valve plug too close to the seat, resulting in
undue wear of the plug and seat. The valve coefficient (Cv) is mathematically determined through an evalu-
ation of the system operating pressures. From this factor, a valve body with the appropriate port size
can be selected. Port Sizes from 1/8" through 8" and Connection Sizes from 1/2" through 8" are available.
Please consult the Valve Selection Section of this catalog.
Valve Coefficient (Cv)
The rated valve coefficient is used to describe the relative flow capacity of the valve based on standard
test conditions. Please refer to the Valve Selection Section for detailed information.

226
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Control Valve Availability
910 Series Size

C O N T R O L VA LV E S
Body Material Connection Style 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 8"
Bronze Iron Unions Single ✓* ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Double ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Cast-Iron Class 125 Flanged Double ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓
Cast-Steel Threaded Single ✓* ✓*
Stainless Steel Threaded Single ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
940 / 940E Series Size
Body Material Connection Style 1/2" 3/4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4" 5" 6" 8"
Bronze Threaded Single ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Cast-Iron Threaded Double ✓ ✓
Cast-Iron Class 125 Flanged Single ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓** ✓**
Double ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓**
Cast-Iron Class 125 Flanged Single ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Double ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓**
Stainless Steel Threaded Single ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
3-Way ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
*Reduced port sizes are available. **Not available on 940E Series.

Positioner
Trerice Valve Positioners (pneumatic and electropneumatic) are mechanical devices designed to provide
enhanced control, stability, and shut-off capability in extreme flow applications. The positioner, which is
mounted to the valve’s yoke assembly and linked to the valve stem, receives a signal from an external control
source, compares the control signal to the actual position of the valve plug, and then sends a corrected
signal to the valve’s actuator, thereby positioning the valve plug for optimum flow modulation.

Air Filter/Regulator
The Trerice No. TA987 Air Filter/Regulator is recommended for filtering and regulating the pressure of plant
compressed air, while delivering clean, dry air at the proper pressure to pneumatic control devices.
Clean, filtered supply air is required by all pneumatic control systems and control devices.

Pipeline Strainer
A Trerice Series 1100 Pipeline Strainer should always be installed upstream of a Trerice Control Valve.
This Y-Type strainer employs a stainless steel screen and will remove debris from the line, which will
prevent jamming of the valve and extend its life.

227
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 910 Series Compact Control Valve
Diaphragm Actuated
7", 9", & 12" Actuator Sizes
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

Heavy Duty Die CastHousing

1/ 2" – 6 " Valve Sizes

Actuator
The Trerice 910 Series Pneumatic
Control Valve offers high quality
at an economical price, incorporating
many features found only on more
expensive units. Models are available
to provide the proper flow response
required by the application.
The 910A, 910B & 910C are
used for On/Off control applications,
providing a quick-opening flow response
when used with single or double
seated valves.
The 910TB is used for proportional
or PID control applications, providing
a throttling flow response when used
with double seated or 3-way valves.
Valve The 910EPA & 910EPC is used for
Body proportional or PID control applications,
providing an equal percentage flow
response when used with single
seated valves.

For optimal performance, the service

conditions (medium, flow, temperature,
inlet and outlet pressures) of the
application must be considered when
selecting a valve. Please refer to the
Valve Selection Section of this catalog.
Consult the Valve Selection tables
for the capabilities of a particular
910B shown valve/actuator assembly. Improper
application may cause failure of the
valve, resulting in possible personal
injury or property damage.

For replacement or service parts please

see Accessories and Replacement Parts
in the Regulators and Control Valves
section of the list price sheet.

228
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 910 Series
Compact Control Valve
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
Specifications
Actuator Diaphragm Control Input
Model Size Action Signal A

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
910A 7" On/Off 15 psi
910B 10" On/Off 15 psi
1/8 NPT
910C 12" On/Off 15 psi
910TB 10" Throttling* 3-15 psi
910EPA 7" Equal 3-15 psi
Percentage
910EPC 12" Equal 3-15 psi
Percentage
*Includes 3-Way

Housing
Die cast aluminum, epoxy powder
coated blue finish B

Setting Scale
Integral to housing
Adjustment Screw
Brass
Adjustment Screw Bushing
Lubricant impregnated sintered bronze
Range Adjustment Spring
Cadmium plated

Pressure Plate
Aluminum
Actuator Number A B Approx. Shipping Weight
Diaphragm 910A 7.0 [178] 9.8 [249] 6.6 lbs [2.97 kg]
Nylon reinforced EDPM
910B 9.3 [236] 9.8 [249] 8.5 lbs [3.83 kg]
Air Pressure to Diaphragm 910C 11.4 [290] 9.8 [249] 12.0 lbs [5.41 kg]
30 psig maximum 910TB 9.3 [236] 9.8 [249] 9.6 lbs [4.32 kg]
Air Pressure Connection 910EPA 7.0 [178] 9.8 [249] 7.6 lbs [3.42 kg]
1/8 NPT Female 910EPC 11.4 [290] 9.8 [249] 13.1 lbs [5.90 kg]
Operating Temperature
Ambient:
-40°F (-40°C) to 180°F (82°C)
Process Flow:
-40°F (-40°C) to 410°F (210°C)

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 910TB - A56

1. Determine the Actuator Model ( 910A, 910B, 910C, 910TB,

Actuator Model (Control Action) Valve Body Number 910EPA or 910EPC) required. Note: Refer to the maximum
close-off pressure columns in the Valve Body Selection tables
910A
to determine the Actuator size required by your application.
910B On/Off Refer to pages 230–234
910C 2. Determine the Valve Size, style and material required
by the application. Note: Consult the Valve Selection Table
910TB Throttling Refer to pages 235–238 to determine the required Valve Body Number.

910EPA
Equal Percentage Refer to page 239
910EPC

229
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 910A, 910B & 910C Control Valves) BRONZE
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

(normally open) (normally closed)
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

C
C
C
C

B
B BB

FLOW
FLOW

A
A AA

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
A14 1/2 1/2" 2.8 250 x x 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A19 3/4 3/4" 5.6 250 x x 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 4.9 lbs [2.21 kg]
A26 1 1" 8.4 200 250 x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.0 lbs [2.70 kg]
A36 11/4 11/4" 15 100 250 x 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 9.7 lbs [4.37 kg]
A47 11/2 11/2" 21 50 150 250 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.8 lbs [4.86 kg]
A58 2 2" 33 25 50 250 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 16.3 lbs [7.34 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
A15 1/2 1/2" 2.8 250 x x 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A22 3/4 3/4" 5.6 250 x x 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 4.9 lbs [2.21 kg]
A30 1 1" 8.4 200 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.0 lbs [2.70 kg]
A41 11/4 11/4" 15 150 x x 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 9.7 lbs [4.37 kg]
A52 11/2 11/2" 21 100 x x 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.8 lbs [4.86 kg]
A63 2 2" 33 50 x x 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 16.3 lbs [7.34 kg]

230
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
BRONZE (for 910A, 910B & 910C Control Valves)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
Double Seat • 3/4" – 2 "

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

(normally open) (normally closed)

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
CC
C
C

BB
B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A
A
A
A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
A21 3/4 3/4" 8 250 x x 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.0 lbs [2.25 kg]
A29 1 1" 12 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.1 lbs [2.75 kg]
A39 11/4 11/4" 21 250 x x 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.1 lbs [4.55 kg]
A50 11/2 11/2" 30 250 x x 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A61 2 2" 47 200 x x 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 17.0 lbs [7.65 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
A24 3/4 3/4" 8 250 x x 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.0 lbs [2.25 kg]
A33 1 1" 12 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.1 lbs [2.75 kg]
A44 11/4 11/4" 21 250 x x 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.1 lbs [4.55 kg]
A55 11/2 11/2" 30 250 x x 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A66 2 2" 47 200 x x 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 17.0 lbs [7.65 kg]

231
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 910A, 910B & 910C Control Valves) CAST IRON
Double Seat • 2 1/2" – 4 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

IDNC_reviii.eps
Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open
(normally open) (normally closed)
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

C
C
CC

BB
B
B

FLOW FLOW

A AA

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Modified linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (176°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
B73 21/2" 21/2" 69 125 x x 7.8 [198] 4.8 [122] 5.4 [137] 45 lbs [20 kg]
B78 3" 3" 90 125 x x 9.0 [229] 5.0 [127] 5.6 [142] 70 lbs [32 kg]
B83 4" 4" 196 125 x x 11.4 [290] 6.3 [160] 6.5 [165] 100 lbs [45 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
B74 21/2" 21/2" 69 125 x x 7.8 [198] 4.8 [122] 5.4 [137] 45 lbs [20 kg]
B79 3" 3" 90 125 x x 9.0 [229] 5.0 [127] 5.6 [142] 70 lbs [32 kg]
B84 4" 4" 196 125 x x 11.4 [290] 6.3 [160] 6.5 [165] 100 lbs [45 kg]

232
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
CAST STEEL (for 910A, 910B & 910C Control Valves)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Single Seat • 1/2" – 1 "

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

(normally open) (normally closed)

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
C CC

B BB

FLOW
FLOW

A AA

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-steel Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
C05 3/4 1/2" 2.8 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C06 3/4 3/4" 5.6 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C55 1 1/2" 2.8 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C56 1 3/4" 5.6 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C57 1 1" 8.4 200 250 x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
C15 3/4 1/2" 2.8 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C16 3/4 3/4" 5.6 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C65 1 1/2" 2.8 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C66 1 3/4" 5.6 250 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]
C67 1 1" 8.4 200 x x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 9.2 lbs [4.18 kg]

233
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 910A, 910B & 910C Control Valves) STAINLESS STEEL
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

(normally open) (normally closed)
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

C
C C
C

B
B B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A A
A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Stainless steel Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
D14 1/2 1/2" 6 250 x x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D19 3/4 3/4" 8.6 220 250 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D26 1 1" 14 140 250 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D47 11/2 11/2" 27 40 120 250 6.1 [155] 3.5 [89] 4.0 [102] 15.5 lbs [7.05 kg]
D58 2 2" 33 25 45 225 6.5 [165] 3.9 [99] 4.2 [107] 19.0 lbs [8.64 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910A 910B 910C A B C Shipping Wt.
D15 1/2 1/2" 6 250 x x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D22 3/4 3/4" 8.6 250 x x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D30 1 1" 14 155 x x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 8.0 lbs [3.64 kg]
D52 11/2 11/2" 27 80 x x 6.1 [155] 3.5 [89] 4.0 [102] 15.5 lbs [7.05 kg]
D63 2 2" 33 40 x x 6.5 [165] 3.9 [99] 4.2 [107] 19.0 lbs [8.64 kg]

234
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
BRONZE (for 910TB Control Valve)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters
Single or Double Seat • 1/2" – 2 "
Stem In-to-Close Stem In-to-Open
(normally open) (normally closed)
Single Seat Single Seat

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
C
C
CC

B
B
BB

FLOW
FLOW

A
A
A
A

Stem In-to-Close Stem In-to-Open

(normally open) (normally closed)
Double Seat Double Seat

CC

CC

BB

BB

FLOW

FLOW
A
A
AA

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

Valve Body Number Size Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
ITC ITO Connection Nominal Actuator Dimensions
Normally Normally Number of Approximate
Open Closed (NPT) Port Seats Cv 910TB A B C Shipping Wt.
A02 A03 1/2 1/8" 1 0.17 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A05 A06 1/2 3/16" 1 0.35 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A08 A09 1/2 1/4" 1 0.7 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A11 A12 1/2 3/8" 1 1.4 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A14 A15 1/2 1/2" 1 2.8 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
A21 A24 3/4 3/4" 2 8 250 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.0 lbs [2.25 kg]
A29 A33 1 1" 2 12 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.1 lbs [2.75 kg]
A39 A44 11/4 11/4" 2 21 250 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.1 lbs [4.55 kg]
A50 A55 11/2 11/2" 2 30 250 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A61 A66 2 2" 2 47 250 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 17.0 lbs [7.65 kg]

235
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 910TB Control Valve) BRONZE
3-WAY • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

for Mixing or Diverting

C O N T RO L VA LV E S

MIXING DIVERTING
FLOW DIAGRAM FLOW DIAGRAM

AIR AIR

G
AIR AIR

LOWER
PORT UPPER
PORT
(B)
(C)

AIR AIR

COMMON
PORT
(A)

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Bronze Modified linear Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Mixing or Diverting Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910TB E F G Shipping Wt.
A18 1/2 1/2" 2.8 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 2.9 lbs [1.31 kg]
A25 3/4 3/4" 5.6 250 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 4.7 lbs [2.12 kg]
A34 1 1" 8.4 250 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 5.7 lbs [2.57 kg]
A45 11/4 11/4" 15 250 7.2 [183] 2.8 [71] 2.6 [66] 9.5 lbs [4.28 kg]
A56 11/2 11/2" 21 250 7.7 [196] 3.5 [89] 2.6 [66] 11.1 lbs [5.00 kg]
A67 2 2" 33 250 8.6 [218] 4.1 [104] 3.1 [79] 16.7 lbs [7.55 kg]

236
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
CAST IRON (for 910TB Control Valve)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3-WAY • 2 1/2" – 4 "

for Mixing or Diverting

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
MIXING DIVERTING
FLOW DIAGRAM FLOW DIAGRAM

AIR AIR

G
G
LOWER
LOWER
PORT
PORT
(B)
(B)
AIR AIR
UPPER
PORT
(C)

FF

AIR
AIR

COMMON PORT (A)

EE
COMMON
PORT
(A)

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-Iron Bronze Modified linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Mixing or Diverting Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910TB E F G Shipping Wt.
B75 21/2" 21/2" 69 125 9.0 [229] 7.1 [180] 5.2 [132] 62 lbs [28 kg]
B80 3" 3" 90 125 10.0 [254] 8.0 [203] 6.0 [152] 80 lbs [36 kg]
B85 4" 4" 196 125 13.0 [330] 10.0 [254] 6.9 [175] 140 lbs [64 kg]

237
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 910TB Control Valve) STAINLESS STEEL
3-WAY • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

for Mixing or Diverting

MIXING DIVERTING
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

FLOW DIAGRAM FLOW DIAGRAM

AIR AIR

G AIR
AIR

UPPER LOWER PORT

PORT (B)
(C)

AIR AIR

E
COMMON
PORT
(A)

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Stainless steel Stainless steel Modified linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Mixing or Diverting Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910TB E F G Shipping Wt.
D18 1/2 1/2" 6 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 7.5 lbs [3.41 kg]
D25 3/4 3/4" 8 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 7.5 lbs [3.41 kg]
D34 1 1" 10 250 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 3.4 [86] 7.5 lbs [3.41 kg]
D56 11/2 11/2" 20 250 6.1 [155] 3.4 [86] 4.0 [102] 15.0 lbs [6.82 kg]
D67 2 2" 40 250 6.5 [165] 3.8 [97] 4.2 [107] 18.5 lbs [8.41 kg]

238
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
BRONZE (for 910EPA & 910EPC Control Valve)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 "

Stem In-To-Close Stem In-To-Open

(normally open) (normally closed)

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
CC C
C

BB B
B

FLOW FLOW

A
A
A A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Equal percentage Threaded, malleable iron union ends 250 PSI @ 410°F (210°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910EPA 910EPC A B C Shipping Wt.
E14 1/2 1/2" 2.8 x 250 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
E19 3/4 3/4" 5.6 x 250 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 4.9 lbs [2.21 kg]
E26 1 1" 8.4 x 200 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.0 lbs [2.70 kg]
E36 11/4 11/4" 15 x 150 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 9.7 lbs [4.37 kg]
E47 11/2 11/2" 21 x 100 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.8 lbs [4.86 kg]
E58 2 2" 33 x 50 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 16.3 lbs [7.34 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 910EPA 910EPC A B C Shipping Wt.
E15 1/2 1/2" 2.8 250 x 4.8 [122] 1.8 [46] 1.8 [46] 3.0 lbs [1.35 kg]
E22 3/4 3/4" 5.6 250 x 5.6 [142] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 4.9 lbs [2.21 kg]
E30 1 1" 8.4 200 x 6.0 [152] 2.3 [58] 2.3 [58] 6.0 lbs [2.70 kg]
E41 11/4 11/4" 15 150 x 7.2 [183] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 9.7 lbs [4.37 kg]
E52 11/2 11/2" 21 100 x 7.7 [196] 2.6 [66] 2.6 [66] 10.8 lbs [4.86 kg]
E63 2 2" 33 50 x 8.6 [218] 3.1 [79] 3.1 [79] 16.3 lbs [7.34 kg]

239
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve
Diaphragm Actuated
14" & 17"
Actuator Sizes
Heavy Duty Die Cast
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

Housing and Yoke

1/ 2" – 8 " Valve Sizes

The Trerice 940 Series

Pneumatic Control Valve offers
extreme quality and maximum
valve performance. The Series
940 is available in a variety of
Actuator 2-way and 3-way valve styles
(shown with
optional for industrial, demanding
positioner) HVAC and commercial process
applications. The 940 Actuator
can be furnished with a 14" or
17" diaphragm and includes a
rugged, die cast aluminum
diaphragm chamber.
For optimal performance, the
service conditions (medium,
flow, temperature, inlet and outlet
pressures) of the application must
be considered when selecting a
valve. Please refer to the Valve
Selection Section of this catalog.
Consult the Valve Selection tables
for the capabilities of a particular
valve/actuator assembly. A
positioner may be required to
Valve maximize the shut-off capability
Body of the valve. Improper application
may cause failure of the valve,
resulting in possible personal injury
or property damage.

For replacement or service parts

please see Accessories and
Replacement Parts in the Regulators
and Control Valves section of the
list price sheet.

940B shown
HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 940B-K84-760P

Actuator Models Valve Body Number Positioner Model

940B Refer to pages 242–249 760P Pneumatic
940C 760E Electropneumatic
Omit if None

1. Determine the valve size, style and material required by the application.
2. Consult the Valve Selection table to determine the required Valve Model.
3. Refer to the maximum close-off pressure columns to determine the Actuator
(with or without positioner) needed to provide the close-off pressure required by
your application.
4. Specify the Actuator Model.
5. Specify the Valve Body Number.
6. Specify the Positioner Model (if required).
240
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 940 Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Heavy Duty Control Valve

Valve & Actuator 940B = 13.88 [352.55]

940C = 16.75 [425.5]
Specifications

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
1/4 NPT
Actuator Models Diaphragm Size
940B 14"
940C 17"

Construction
Aluminum yoke and diaphragm
chamber, acrylic enamel finish

Pressure Plate
Aluminum

Diaphragm Material 940B = 20.00 [508]

940C = 27.00 [685.8]
Nylon reinforced Buna-N

Input Signal
3-15 psi
Air Pressure to Diaphragm
30 psig maximum
940B = 8.94 [227.1]
Air Pressure Connection 940C = 11.03 [280.2]
1/4 NPT Female

Operating Temperature
2.25 [57.2]
Ambient:
-40°F (-40°C) to 180°F (82°C)
Process Flow:
-40°F (-40°C) to 410°F (210°C)

Approximate Shipping Weight

The Trerice TA987 Air Filter/Regulator is recommended
940B: 45 lbs [20 kg] for filtering and regulating the pressure of plant
940C: 86 lbs [39 kg] compressed air and delivering clean, dry air at the
proper pressure to pneumatic control devices.

Positioner Specifications
Models Air Requirements Connections Ambient Temperature
760P (Pneumatic) Clean, oil-free, dry air Pneumatic: 1/4 NPT -40°F (-40°C) to 185°F (85°C)
760E (Electropneumatic)
Maximum Supply Pressure: Gauge: 1/8 NPT
30 psig Weight
Action Electrical: 3/4 NPT 10 lbs [4.55 kg]
Direct Air Consumption: Exhaust: 1/4 NPT
0.28 SCFH (760P),
Input Signal Ranges 0.38 SCFH (760E), typical Enclosure
760P: 3 to 15 psig Flow Rate: 9.0 SCFM NEMA 4X, IP65
760E: 4 to 20 mA

241
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve) BRONZE
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Stem In-to-Close (normally open) Stem In-to-Open (normally closed)

C O N T RO L VA LV E S

C
C C
C

B
B B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A A
A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Equal percentage Threaded 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner A B C Shipping Wt.
J14 1/2 1/2" 4.9 400 400 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J19 3/4 3/4" 7.2 400 400 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J26 1 1" 10.0 291 400 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J36 11/4 11/4" 22.2 123 327 5.8 [147] 3.3 [84] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
J47 11/2 11/2" 24 123 327 5.8 [147] 3.3 [84] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
J58 2 2" 40 73 200 6.5 [165] 3.6 [91] 3.8 [97] 25 lbs [11.3 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner A B C Shipping Wt.
J15 1/2 1/2" 4.9 245 400 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J22 3/4 3/4" 7.2 245 400 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J30 1 1" 10.0 140 400 4.9 [124] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J41 11/4 11/4" 22.2 55 259 5.8 [147] 3.3 [84] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
J52 11/2 11/2" 24 55 259 5.8 [147] 3.3 [84] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
J63 2 2" 40 30 157 6.5 [165] 3.6 [91] 3.8 [97] 25 lbs [11.3 kg]

242
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
CAST IRON (for 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Single Seat • 2 1/2" – 8 "

Stem In-to-Close (normally open) Stem In-to-Open (normally closed)

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
C
C C
C

BB B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A A
A

Class 125 Class 250

Size A B C A B C
21/2" 9.0 [229] 4.9 [124] 5.5 [140] 9.6 [244] 4.9 [124] 5.5 [140]
3" 10.0 [254] 5.5 [140] 6.9 [175] 10.8 [274] 5.5 [140] 6.9 [175]
4" 13.0 [330] 6.4 [163] 7.1 [180] 13.6 [345] 6.4 [163] 7.1 [180]
5" 15.8 [401] 5.8 [147] 7.8 [198] 16.6 [422] 5.8 [147] 7.8 [198]
6" 17.8 [452] 6.5 [165] 8.4 [213] 18.6 [472] 6.5 [165] 8.4 [213]
8" 16.3 [414] 8.1 [206] 8.6 [218] 16.3 [414] 8.1 [206] 8.6 [218]
Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Equal percentage Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (176°C)
Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Actuator Approximate
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner 940C 940C w/Positioner Shipping Wt.
K71 L71 21/2" 65 50 142 91 231 50 lbs [23 kg]
K76 L76 3" 90 33 96 61 158 95 lbs [43 kg]
K81 L81 4" 170 16 52 32 87 130 lbs [59 kg]
K86 L86 5" 280 9 31 19 54 150 lbs [68 kg]
K91 L91 6" 360 5 21 12 36 175 lbs [79 kg]
K96 L96 8" 450 x x 11 35 300 lbs [136 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Number Actuator Approximate
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner 940C 940C w/Positioner Shipping Wt.
K72 L72 21/2" 65 x 111 44 185 50 lbs [23 kg]
K77 L77 3" 90 x 75 28 126 95 lbs [43 kg]
K82 L82 4" 170 x 40 13 68 130 lbs [59 kg]
K87 L87 5" 280 x 24 7 42 150 lbs [68 kg]
K92 L92 6" 360 x 15 4 28 175 lbs [79 kg]
K97 L97 8" 450 x x 3 27 300 lbs [136kg]

243
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve) CAST IRON
Double Seat • 1 1/2" – 8 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
IDNC_reviii.eps

Stem In-to-Close (normally open) Stem In-to-Open (normally closed)

C O N T RO L VA LV E S

C
C
C
C

B
B
B

FLOW
FLOW

A A
A

125 PSI 250 PSI Note: Drawing depicts

Size A B C A B C flanged connections;
1
1 /2" x x x 7.4 [188] 3.8 [97] 4.5 [114] 11/2” & 2” valves have
2" x x x 7.4 [188] 3.8 [97] 4.5 [114] threaded connections.
21/2" 7.8 [198] 4.1 [105] 4.9 [124] 8.4 [213] 4.1 [105] 4.9 [124]
3" 9.0 [229] 4.4 [112] 5.1 [130] 9.8 [249] 4.4 [112] 5.1 [130]
4" 11.4 [290] 5.0 [127] 6.6 [168] 12.0 [305] 5.0 [127] 6.6 [168]
5" 12.0 [305] 6.8 [173] 7.6 [193] 12.9 [328] 6.8 [173] 7.6 [193]
6" 14.1 [358] 7.5 [191] 8.5 [216] 14.5 [368] 7.5 [191] 8.5 [216]
8" 16.3 [414] 8.8 [224] 9.6 [244] 16.3 [414] 8.8 [224] 9.6 [244]

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Equal percentage 11/2"-2": Threaded 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)
21/2"-8": Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (176°C)
21/2"-8": Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)
Valve Body Selection
In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Actuator Approximate
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner Shipping Wt.
x L50 11/2" 30 400 400 20 lbs [9 kg]
x L61 2" 42 400 400 20 lbs [9 kg]
K73 L73 21/2" 70 400 400 45 lbs [20 kg]
K78 L78 3" 100 400 400 70 lbs [32 kg]
K83 L83 4" 200 400 400 100 lbs [45 kg]
K88 L88 5" 260 302 400 155 lbs [70 kg]
K93 L93 6" 350 233 400 180 lbs [82 kg]
K98 L98 8" 680 123 400 310 lbs [141 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Number Actuator Approximate
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner Shipping Wt.
x L55 11/2" 30 400 400 20 lbs [9 kg]
x L66 2" 42 400 400 20 lbs [9 kg]
K74 L74 21/2" 70 326 400 45 lbs [20 kg]
K79 L79 3" 100 243 400 70 lbs [32 kg]
K84 L84 4" 200 140 400 100 lbs [45 kg]
K89 L89 5" 260 87 400 155 lbs [70 kg]
K94 L94 6" 350 50 400 180 lbs [82 kg]
K99 L99 8" 680 x 386 310 lbs [141 kg]

244
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
STAINLESS STEEL (for 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 "
Stem In-to-Close (normally open) Stem In-to-Open (normally closed)

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
C
C C
C

B BB

FLOW
FLOW

A AA

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Stainless steel Stainless steel Equal percentage Threaded 515 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close (Normally Open) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner A B C Shipping Wt.
M14 1/2 1/2" 4.9 450 720 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M19 3/4 3/4" 7.2 450 720 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M26 1 1" 10.0 255 707 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M47 11/2 11/2" 24 100 304 6.1 [155] 3.5 [89] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
M58 2 2" 40 54 181 6.5 [165] 3.9 [99] 3.8 [97] 25 lbs [11.3 kg]

In-To-Open (Normally Closed) Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner A B C Shipping Wt.
M15 1/2 1/2" 4.9 200 720 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M22 3/4 3/4" 7.2 200 720 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M30 1 1" 10 105 557 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M52 11/2 11/2" 24 32 236 6.1 [155] 3.5 [89] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
M63 2 2" 40 12 138 6.5 [165] 3.9 [99] 3.8 [97] 25 lbs [11.3 kg]

245
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve) BRONZE
3-WAY • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Mixing MIXING Diverting DIVERTING

FLOW DIAGRAM FLOW DIAGRAM
SIGNAL SIGNAL
SIGNAL
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

AIR

G
G SIGNAL
G
UPPER AIR
ORT COMMON
COM UPPER
PORT P
PORT (A) PORT LOWER
(C) (C) PORT
(B)
FF
F

E
E
E SIGNAL
LOWER
LOWER
(B)
PORT
AIR
PORT COMMON
(B) PORT
(A)

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Action Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Mixing Bronze Stainless steel Linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)
Diverting Bronze Bronze Linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Selection
Mixing Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner E F G Shipping Wt.
N18 1/2 1/2" 6.3 140 291 4.9 [124] 2.8 [71] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
N25 3/4 3/4" 8.2 140 291 4.9 [124] 2.8 [71] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
N34 1 1" 10 140 291 4.9 [124] 2.8 [71] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
N56 11/2 11/2" 20 55 123 5.8 [147] 3.8 [97] 3.5 [89] 15.5 lbs [7.05 kg]
N67 2 2" 40 30 73 6.5 [165] 4.0 [102] 3.8 [97] 20.0 lbs [9.10 kg]

Diverting Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)

Valve Body Size Actuator Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner E F G Shipping Wt.
J34 1 1" 12 125 125 4.9 [124] 3.5 [89] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
J56 11/2 11/2" 22 125 125 5.8 [147] 3.8 [97] 3.5 [89] 16.5 lbs [7.5 kg]
J67 2 2" 40 125 125 6.5 [165] 4.0 [102] 3.8 [97] 21.0 lbs [9.55 kg]

246
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve
Fail Open or Closed Specifications
Cast Aluminum or
Iron Linkages Model
940E
1/ 2" – 8 " Valve Sizes

The Trerice 940E Series

Linkages
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

Control Valve uses an AC

30, 52

power supply to stroke the

valve via an actuator drive,
Motor Case

electric motor, and valve

Aluminum

linkage unit. The actuator Yoke

drive causes the motor to drive
Linkage 30: Aluminum
the valve stem up or down in
Linkage 52: Cast-iron
relation to an input signal
(factory set at 4-20 mA, field
Power Supply

switchable to 0-10 VDC) from

24 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.5 A or

a controller. Electric motors

120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5 A

are available to accept a

power supply of 24 or 120
Input Signal
4-20 mA or
VAC and can be specified for 0-10 VDC
failure in an open, closed, or
last position upon loss of
Fail Position
power. Linkages are available
Stem-Out (open),

in two sizes (30 and 52), the

Stem-In (closed), or Last Position

larger of which uses leverage

to provide increased shut-off
No-Load Timing

capabilities on smaller valves

Fail Stem-In or Stem-Out: 90 seconds

and is required for use on

Fail Last Position: 120 seconds

larger sized valves. Protection

NEMA 1 (indoor only)
940E shown
For optimal performance, the
Maximum Temperature
service conditions (medium,
flow, temperature, inlet and Ambient: 130°F (54°C)
outlet pressures) of the application Process Flow: 400°F (204°C)
must be considered when selecting
a valve. Please refer to the Valve Humidity
Selection Section of this catalog. Maximum: 95% RH
Consult the Valve Selection tables
for the capabilities of a particular Approximate Shipping Weight
valve/actuator assembly. Improper Actuator:
application may cause failure of Linkage 30: 15 lbs [6.8 kg]
the valve, resulting in possible Linkage 52: 30 lbs [13 kg]
personal injury or property damage.
Valve Body:
For replacement or service parts please see Valve Selection tables
see Accessories and Replacement Parts
in the Regulators and Control Valves
section of the list price sheet.

HOW TO ORDER Sample Order Number: 940E-30-J36-27

Model Linkage Size Valve Body Number Power Supply Fail Position

940E 30 Refer to pages 252-260 1 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5 A 6 Stem-Out (open)
52 2 24 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.5 A 7 Stem-In (closed)
8 Last Position
1. Determine the valve size, style and material required by the application.
2. Consult the Valve Selection table to determine the required Valve Body.
3. Refer to the maximum close-off pressure columns to determine the Linkage Size needed
to provide the close-off pressure required by your application.
4. Specify the Model and Linkage Size.
5. Specify the Valve Body Number.
6. Specify the Power Supply and Fail Position codes.

250
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve) CAST IRON
3-WAY • 2 1/2" – 8 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Mixing MIXING
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

FLOW DIAGRAM

AIR

G
LOWER
PORT
UPPER (B) COMMON AIR
PORT
PORT (A)
(C)

AIR

COMMON PORT (A)

LOWER PORT (B)

E (B)E

Mixing Class 125 Class 250

Size E F G E F G
21/2" 9.0 [229] 7.1 [180] 5.5 [140] 9.6 [244] 7.4 [188] 5.5 [140]
3" 10.0 [254] 8.0 [203] 6.1 [155] 10.8 [274] 8.4 [213] 6.1 [155]
Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam
4" 13.0 [330] 9.9 [251] 7.1 [180] 13.6 [345] 10.3 [262] 7.1 [180] applications.
5" 15.8 [401] 9.3 [236] 6.0 [152] 16.6 [422] 10.4 [264] 6.0 [152]
6" 17.8 [452] 9.9 [251] 6.8 [173] 18.6 [472] 11.0 [279] 6.8 [173]
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at
ports B and C should be as equal as possible.
8" 16.3 [414] 11.9 [302] 8.6 [218] 16.3 [414] 12.4 [315] 8.6 [218]

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (176°C)
Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

Mixing Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Actuator Approximate*
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner 940C 940C w/Positioner Shipping Wt.
P75 Q75 21/2" 65 20 111 44 185 62 lbs [30 kg]
P80 Q80 3" 85 11 75 28 126 80 lbs [36 kg]
P85 Q85 4" 190 4 40 13 68 140 lbs [64 kg]
P90 Q90 5" 240 x 24 7 42 157 lbs [71 kg]
P95 Q95 6" 347 x 6 x 12 203 lbs [92 kg]
P100 Q100 8" 450 x x x 11 324 lbs [148 kg]
* Shipping weights shown are for Class 125 Valves. Consult factory for Class 250 valve weights.

248
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
CAST IRON (for 940 Series Heavy Duty Control Valve)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3-WAY • 2 1/2" – 8 "

Diverting DIVERTING
FLOW DIAGRAM

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
AIR

G
RT LOWER
PORT
(B)
UPPER LOWER
PORT AIR
PORT (B)
(C)

FF

AIR

COMMONPORT
COMMON PORT (A) (A)
E
E

Diverting Class 125 Class 250

Size E F G E F G
21/2" 9.0 [229] 7.1 [180] 5.5 [140] 9.6 [244] 7.4 [188] 5.5 [140]
3" 10.0 [254] 8.0 [203] 6.1 [155] 10.8 [274] 8.4 [213] 6.1 [155]
Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam
4" 13.0 [330] 9.9 [251] 7.1 [180] 13.6 [345] 10.3 [262] 7.1 [180]
applications.
5" 12.0 [305] 10.5 [267] 7.5 [191] 12.9 [328] 11.0 [279] 7.5 [191]
6" 14.1 [358] 11.1 [282] 7.9 [201] 14.5 [368] 11.5 [292] 7.9 [201] To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at
ports B and C should be as equal as possible.
8" 16.3 [414] 11.9 [302] 8.6 [218] 16.3 [414] 12.4 [315] 8.6 [218]

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Bronze Linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)
Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Diverting Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Actuator Approximate*
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 940B 940B w/Positioner 940C 940C w/Positioner Shipping Wt.
K75 L75 21/2" 68 x 125 x x 62 lbs [30 kg]
K80 L80 3" 85 x 125 x x 80 lbs [36 kg]
K85 L85 4" 160 x 125 x x 140 lbs [64 kg]
K90 L90 5" 195 x 125 x x 157 lbs [71 kg]
K95 L95 6" 270 x x x 125 203 lbs [92 kg]
K100 L100 8" 425 x x x 125 329 lbs [150 kg]
* Shipping weights shown are for Class 125 Valves. Consult factory for Class 250 valve weights.

249
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve
Fail Open or Closed Specifications
Cast Aluminum or
Iron Linkages Model
940E
1/ 2" – 8 " Valve Sizes
Linkages
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

The Trerice 940E Series 30, 52

Control Valve uses an AC
power supply to stroke the Motor Case
valve via an actuator drive, Aluminum
electric motor, and valve
Yoke
linkage unit. The actuator
Linkage 30: Aluminum
drive causes the motor to drive
Linkage 52: Cast-iron
the valve stem up or down in
relation to an input signal Power Supply
(factory set at 4-20 mA, field 24 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.5 A or
switchable to 0-10 VDC) from 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5 A
a controller. Electric motors
are available to accept a Input Signal
power supply of 24 or 120 4-20 mA or
VAC and can be specified for 0-10 VDC
failure in an open, closed, or Fail Position
last position upon loss of Stem-Out (open),
power. Linkages are available Stem-In (closed), or Last Position
in two sizes (30 and 52), the
larger of which uses leverage No-Load Timing
to provide increased shut-off Fail Stem-In or Stem-Out: 90 seconds
capabilities on smaller valves Fail Last Position: 120 seconds
and is required for use on
larger sized valves. Protection
NEMA 1 (indoor only)
940E shown
For optimal performance, the
Maximum Temperature
service conditions (medium,
flow, temperature, inlet and outlet Ambient: 130°F (54°C)
pressures) of the application must Process Flow: 400°F (204°C)
be considered when selecting a
valve. Please refer to the Valve Humidity
Selection Section of this catalog. Maximum: 95% RH
Consult the Valve Selection tables
for the capabilities of a particular Approximate Shipping Weight
valve/actuator assembly. A Actuator:
positioner may be required to Linkage 30: 15 lbs [6.8 kg]
maximize the shut-off capability Linkage 52: 30 lbs [13 kg]
of the valve. Improper application
Valve Body:
may cause failure of the valve,
resulting in possible personal see Valve Selection tables
injury or property damage.
For replacement or service parts please
see Accessories and Replacement Parts
in the Regulators and Control Valves
HOW TO ORDER section of the list price sheet. Sample Order Number: 940E-30-J36-27

Model Linkage Size Valve Body Number Power Supply Fail Position

940E 30 Refer to pages 252-260 1 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.5 A 6 Stem-Out (open)
52 2 24 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.5 A 7 Stem-In (closed)
8 Last Position
1. Determine the valve size, style and material required by the application.
2. Consult the Valve Selection table to determine the required Valve Body.
3. Refer to the maximum close-off pressure columns to determine the Linkage Size needed
to provide the close-off pressure required by your application.
4. Specify the Model and Linkage Size.
5. Specify the Valve Body Number.
6. Specify the Power Supply and Fail Position codes.

250
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 940E Series
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
Electric Motor Control Valve

Linkage Size 30

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
4.13 2.25 6.75 1.88
[104.8] [57.2] [171.5] [47.6]

4.25
7.00 [108.0]
[177.8]
MOTOR

13.43
[341.1]

SPRING RETURN
(FAIL OPEN OR FAIL CLOSED
MODELS ONLY)

LINKAGE

5.38
[136.5]

Linkage Size 52

9.00
[228.6]

11.63
[295.3]

MOTOR

LINKAGE

251
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve) BRONZE
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Stem In-To-Close
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

B
B

FLOW

A
A

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Bronze Stainless steel Equal percentage Threaded 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Linkage Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 30 52 A B C Shipping Wt.
J14 1/2 1/2" 4.9 370 x 4.9 [124] 1.9 [48] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J19 3/4 3/4" 7.2 370 x 4.9 [124] 1.9 [48] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J26 1 1" 10.0 215 x 4.9 [124] 1.9 [48] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
J36 11/4 11/4" 22.2 89 223 5.8 [147] 2.4 [61] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
J47 11/2 11/2" 24 89 223 5.8 [147] 2.4 [61] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
J58 2 2" 40 52 135 6.5 [165] 2.8 [71] 3.8 [97] 25 lbs [11.3 kg]

252
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
CAST IRON
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve)
Single Seat • 2 1/2" – 5 "

Stem In-To-Close

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
CC

BB

FLOW

Class 125 Class 250

Size A B C A B C
21/2" 9.0 [229] 4.9 [124] 5.5 [140] 9.6 [244] 4.9 [124] 5.5 [140]
3" 10.0 [254] 5.5 [140] 6.9 [175] 10.8 [274] 5.5 [140] 6.9 [175]
4" 13.0 [330] 6.4 [163] 7.1 [180] 13.6 [345] 6.4 [163] 7.1 [180]
5" 15.8 [401] 5.8 [147] 7.8 [198] 16.6 [422] 5.8 [147] 7.8 [198]

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Equal percentage Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (176°C)
Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Linkage Approximate
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 30 52 Shipping Wt.
K71 L71 21/2" 65 x 95 50 lbs [23 kg]
K76 L76 3" 90 x 64 95 lbs [43 kg]
K81 L81 4" 170 x 33 130 lbs [59 kg]
K86 L86 5" 280 x 9 150 lbs [68 kg]

253
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve) CAST IRON
Double Seat • 1 1/2" – 8 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Stem In-To-Close
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

Note: Drawing depicts flanged

CC connection; 11/2" and 2" valves
have threaded connection.

Class 125 Class 250

Size A B C A B C
11/2" x x x 7.4 [188] 3.8 [97] 4.5 [114]
BB 2" x x x 7.4 [188] 3.8 [97] 4.5 [114]
21/2" 7.8 [198] 4.1 [105] 4.9 [124] 8.4 [213] 4.1 [105] 4.9 [124]
3" 9.0 [229] 4.4 [112] 5.1 [130] 9.8 [249] 4.4 [112] 5.1 [130]

FLOW
4" 11.4 [290] 5.0 [127] 6.6 [168] 12.0 [305] 5.0 [127] 6.6 [168]
5" 12.0 [305] 6.8 [173] 7.6 [193] 12.9 [328] 6.8 [173] 7.6 [193]
A 6" 14.1 [358] 7.5 [191] 8.5 [216] 14.5 [368] 7.5 [191] 8.5 [216]
8" 16.3 [414] 8.8 [224] 9.6 [244] 16.3 [414] 8.8 [224] 9.6 [244]

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Equal percentage 11/2"-2": Threaded 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)
21/2"-8": Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (176°C)
21/2"-8": Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Linkage Approximate
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 30 52 Shipping Wt.
x L50 11/2" 30 400 x 20 lbs [9 kg]
x L61 2" 42 400 x 20 lbs [9 kg]
K73 L73 21/2" 70 400 x 45 lbs [20 kg]
K78 L78 3" 100 400 x 70 lbs [32 kg]
K83 L83 4" 200 x 400 100 lbs [45 kg]
K88 L88 5" 260 x 400 155 lbs [70 kg]
K93 L93 6" 350 x 400 180 lbs [82 kg]
K98 L98 8" 680 x 136 310 lbs [141 kg]

* Shipping weights shown are for Class 125 Valves. Consult factory for Class 250 valve weights.

254
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
STAINLESS STEEL
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve)
Single Seat • 1/2" – 2 "

Stem In-To-Close

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
CC

BB

FLOW

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Stainless steel Stainless steel Equal percentage Threaded 515 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

In-To-Close Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Linkage Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 30 52 A B C Shipping Wt.
M14 1/2 1/2" 4.9 325 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M19 3/4 3/4" 7.2 325 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M26 1 1" 10.0 179 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 10 lbs [4.5 kg]
M47 11/2 11/2" 24 66 199 6.1 [155] 3.5 [89] 3.5 [89] 16 lbs [7.3 kg]
M58 2 2" 40 33 116 6.5 [165] 3.9 [99] 3.8 [97] 25 lbs [11.3 kg]

255
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve) BRONZE
3-WAY • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Mixing
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

MIXING
FLOW DIAGRAM

SIGNAL

G
G
SIGNAL
UPPER
PORT
ORT COMMON
COMMON
(C) PORT
PORT (A)
(A)

FF

SIGNAL

E
E
LOWER
LOWER
PORTPORT
(B)
(B)

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Action Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Mixing Bronze Stainless steel Linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Linkage Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 30 52 E F G Shipping Wt.
N18 1/2 1/2" 6.3 215 x 4.9 [124] 2.8 [71] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
N25 3/4 3/4" 8.2 215 x 4.9 [124] 2.8 [71] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
N34 1 1" 10 215 x 4.9 [124] 2.8 [71] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
N56 11/2 11/2" 20 89 223 5.8 [147] 3.8 [97] 3.5 [89] 15.5 lbs [7.05 kg]
N67 2 2" 40 52 135 6.5 [165] 4.0 [102] 3.8 [97] 20.0 lbs [9.10 kg]

256
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
BRONZE (for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve)
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3-WAY • 1 " – 2 "

Diverting

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
DIVERTING
FLOW DIAGRAM
SIGNAL
SIGNAL

G SIGNAL

UPPER LOWER
PORT PORT
(C) (B)

SIGNAL

E
COMMON
PORT
(A)

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.

Specifications
Action Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Diverting Bronze Bronze Linear Threaded 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Linkage Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 30 52 E F G Shipping Wt.
J34 1 1" 12 125 x 4.9 [124] 3.5 [89] 2.9 [74] 9.0 lbs [4.10 kg]
J56 11/2 11/2" 22 125 x 5.8 [147] 3.8 [97] 3.5 [89] 16.5 lbs [7.5 kg]
J67 2 2" 40 125 x 6.5 [165] 4.0 [102] 3.8 [97] 21.0 lbs [9.55 kg]

257
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve) CAST IRON
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
3-WAY • 2 1/2" – 6 "

Mixing MIXING
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

FLOW DIAGRAM

SIGNAL

G
G
UPPER COMMON
PORT LOWER SIGNAL
PORT
PORT
(C) (A)
(B)

FF

SIGNAL

COMMON PORT (A)

LOWER PORT (B)

E
E

Class 125 Class 250

Size E F G E F G
21/2" 9.0 [229] 7.1 [180] 5.5 [140] 9.6 [244] 7.4 [188] 5.5 [140]
3" 10.0 [254] 8.0 [203] 6.1 [155] 10.8 [274] 8.4 [213] 6.1 [155]
4" 13.0 [330] 9.9 [251] 7.1 [180] 13.6 [345] 10.3 [262] 7.1 [180]
5" 15.8 [401] 9.3 [236] 6.0 [152] 16.6 [422] 10.4 [264] 6.0 [152]
6" 17.8 [452] 9.9 [251] 6.8 [173] 18.6 [472] 11.0 [279] 6.8 [173]

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Stainless steel Linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 350°F (176°C)
Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Linkage Approximate*
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 30 52 Shipping Wt.
P75 Q75 21/2" 65 x 95 62 lbs [30 kg]
P80 Q80 3" 85 x 64 80 lbs [36 kg]
P85 Q85 4" 190 x 17 140 lbs [64 kg]
P90 Q90 5" 240 x 9 157 lbs [71 kg]
P95 Q95 6" 305 x 5 203 lbs [92 kg]
*Shipping weights shown are for class 125 valves. Consult factory for class 250 valve weights.

258
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
CAST IRON
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve)
3-WAY • 2 1/2" – 5 "

Diverting
DIVERTING

C O N T RO L VA LV E S
FLOW DIAGRAM
SIGNAL

G
UPPER
ORT LOWER
LOWER
PORT PORT
PORT
(B)
(C)
(B) SIGNAL

FF

SIGNAL

COMMON PORT
COMMON PORT(A)
(A)
E
E

Class 125 Class 250

Size E F G E F G
21/2" 9.0 [229] 7.1 [180] 5.5 [140] 9.6 [244] 7.4 [188] 5.5 [140]
3" 10.0 [254] 8.0 [203] 6.1 [155] 10.8 [274] 8.4 [213] 6.1 [155]
4" 13.0 [330] 9.9 [251] 7.1 [180] 13.6 [345] 10.3 [262] 7.1 [180]
5" 12.0 [305] 10.5 [267] 7.5 [191] 12.9 [328] 11.0 [279] 7.5 [191]

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.

Specifications
Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Cast-iron Bronze Linear Class 125 flanged 125 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)
Class 250 flanged 250 PSI @ 300°F (149°C)

Valve Body Selection

Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Number Linkage Approximate*
Class 125 Class 250 Size Cv 30 52 Shipping Wt.
K75 L75 21/2" 68 125 x 62 lbs [30 kg]
K80 L80 3" 85 125 x 80 lbs [36 kg]
K85 L85 4" 160 x 125 140 lbs [64 kg]
K90 L90 5" 195 x 125 157 lbs [71 kg]
*Shipping weights shown are for class 125 valves. Consult factory for class 250 valve weights.

259
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Valve Body Selection
(for 940E Series Electric Motor Control Valve) STAINLESS STEEL
3-WAY • 1/2" – 2 " All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Mixing MIXING
FLOW DIAGRAM
C O N T RO L VA LV E S

SIGNAL

SIGNAL
G
G

UPPER PORT COMMON

COMMON
UPPER PORT PORT
(C)
(C) PORT (A)
(A)

FF
SIGNAL

E
E

LOWER PORT
LOWER PORT
(B)
(B)

Trerice 3-Way Valves are not designed for use in steam applications.
To properly control the mixing of two flows, inlet pressures at ports B and C should be as equal as possible.

Specifications
Action Body Material Trim Material Trim Style Connection Pressure & Temperature Rating
Mixing Stainless steel Stainless steel Linear Threaded 515 PSI @ 400°F (204°C)

Valve Body Selection

Mixing Maximum Close-Off Pressure (psid)
Valve Body Size Linkage Dimensions Approximate
Number Connection (NPT) Nominal Port Cv 30 52 E F G Shipping Wt.
M18 1/2 1/2" 6.3 179 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 7.5 lbs [3.41 kg]
M25 3/4 3/4" 8.2 179 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 7.5 lbs [3.41 kg]
M34 1 1" 10 179 x 5.0 [127] 2.9 [74] 2.9 [74] 7.5 lbs [3.18 kg]
M56 11/2 11/2" 20 66 199 6.1 [155] 3.4 [86] 3.5 [89] 15.0 lbs [6.82 kg]
M67 2 2" 40 33 116 6.5 [165] 3.8 [97] 3.8 [97] 18.5 lbs [8.41 kg]

260
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Application Worksheet
All dimensions are nominal. Dimensions in [ ] are in millimeters.

Service Conditions

T E C H N I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N
Medium Through Valve: ______________________________________ Required Cv: ____________

Temperature Maximum: ____________ Minimum: ____________ Normal: ____________

Flow Maximum: ____________ Minimum: ____________ Normal: ____________

Inlet Pressure Maximum: ____________ Minimum: ____________ Normal: ____________

Outlet Pressure Maximum: ____________ Minimum: ____________ Normal: ____________

Differential Pressure Service: ____________ Shutoff: ____________

Pipeline
Upstream Material: ____________ Size: ____________ Schedule: ____________
Downstream Material: ____________ Size: ____________ Schedule: ____________

Valve Requirements
Required Fail Position: ______________________________________________________________________________
Body Material: ____________ Size: ____________ End Connections: ____________
Trim Check one „ Modified Linear „ Equal Percentage
Material: ____________ Shut-off Class: ____________
Additional Requirements: __________________________________________________________________________

Actuator Requirements
Check one „ Pneumatic On/Off „ Pneumatic Throttling „ Electric
Power Supply: ________________________________ Input Signal: ________________________________
Additional Requirements:____________________________________________________________________________

Positioner Requirements
Check one „ Pneumatic „ Electropneumatic
Input: ____________________________________ Output: ____________________________________

Additional Requirements: __________________________________________________________________________

Name: ___________________________________ Company: ____________________________________

Date: ____________________________________ P.O. Number: __________________________________

Project Name: _____________________________ Tag Number: __________________________________

261
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Technical Information
VALVE SELECTION
The proper sizing of a valve is one of the most important factors in the ability of a loop to maintain control. A valve that is
too small is not able to provide the desired capacity during peak load conditions, while a valve that is too large will tend to
overshoot the control point and operate with the valve plug too close to the seat, resulting in undue wear of the plug and seat.
T E C H N I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

Valve Coefficient (Cv)

The valve coefficient (Cv) is mathematically determined through an evaluation of the system service conditions. This factor can
be used to select a valve body of the appropriate port size. In almost all cases, the valve should be of a smaller size than the
pipeline into which it will be installed. To avoid undue wear, a valve body of the smallest possible port size should be selected;
however, the valve should never be less than half the pipeline size, as this will cause extreme mechanical stress to the pipeline.

Service Conditions
The specifier should be knowledgeable of the service conditions of the application in order to properly determine the
actuator and valve requirements.
Medium
The composition of the fluid passing through the valve.
Temperature (T)
The temperature of the medium passing through the valve. This measurement is required to properly specify the materials
used to manufacture the valve.
Flow (q or W)
The volume of fluid passed through the valve as required by the particular application. Flow is usually expressed as either
gallons per minute (q), or pounds per hour (W). Water and other liquids are usually measured in gallons per minute, while
steam and other gases are usually measured in pounds per hour. This measurement is required to correctly determine the
valve coefficient (Cv).
Inlet Pressure (Upstream Pressure or P1)
The pressure (psia) of the medium flowing into the valve body. This measurement is required to correctly determine the valve
coefficient (Cv) and valve close-off capability.
Outlet Pressure (Downstream Pressure or P2)
The pressure (psia) of the medium flowing through a fully opened valve to the process. The outlet pressure from the valve is
determined by the process or equipment that is being fed by the valve, and is not caused by the valve itself. This measurement
is required to correctly determine the valve coefficient (Cv) and valve close-off capability.
Differential Pressure (Pressure Drop or ΔP)
The difference between the inlet and outlet pressures (P1-P2). This measurement is required to correctly determine the valve
coefficient (Cv) and valve close-off capability.
Valve Sizing Differential Pressure:
The differential pressure (psid) for valve sizing is determined with the valve full open. This pressure drop, along with
the required flow rate, is used to determine the required Cv to aid in the selection of the proper control valve.

Close-Off Differential Pressure:

The differential pressure (psid) for valve “close-off” is determined with the valve fully closed. Usually, in most common
applications, with the valve closed the outlet pressure will be zero (0) psig and as such the pressure drop will be equal
to the Inlet Pressure. In some applications there may be residual back pressure in the downstream system (such as
filling a pressurized tank) that will cause the Outlet Pressure to be a value greater than zero, which in turn reduces the
value of the expected differential pressure.

Example:
Valve B73 (on page 17) has a maximum “Close-Off Pressure” allowance of 65 psid. If this valve
is used to control the flow into an open tank, the closed valve outlet pressure will be zero. As
such the maximum inlet pressure that the actuator can close this valve against is 65 psig.
(65 psid rating + zero outlet pressure = 65 psig inlet pressure).

If however this same valve B73 is used to control the flow into a closed pressurized tank (pressurized
to 25 psig) then the maximum inlet pressure that the actuator can close this valve against is 90 psig.
(65 psid rating + 25 psig back pressure = 90 psig inlet pressure).

Since this 90 psig is less than the body rating of 125 psig this valve would be acceptable for this service.

262
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Technical Information
VALVE SELECTION
Other Considerations
• Specific Gravity — The ratio between the weight of the flow medium at the flow temperature and that
of a defined standard substance (water or air). The specific gravity may be required to correctly determine

T E C H N I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N
the valve coefficient (Cv).
Liquids (Gf) water = 1.0 @ 39°F (4°C)
Gases (Gg) air = 1.0 @ 60°F (18°C) and 14.7 psia
• Viscosity — The degree of thickness of a liquid. Extremely thick process media can create high friction as
it passes through the valve. In most instances a sizing correction factor is not required. Please consult the
factory when the flow medium is of a viscosity of 40 centistokes or greater.
• Steam Superheat — The number of degrees Fahrenheit (Tsh) above the saturation temperature of steam at
a given pressure. Superheated steam is created when saturated steam is further heated from another source
after leaving the water from which it is formed. This measurement is required to correctly determine the
valve coefficient (Cv).

Valve Sizing Equations

The following formulas can be used to determine the Cv
requirement for a specific set of service conditions,
Cavitation
where: Water and Other Liquids
Cavitation takes place when the pressure
Cv = valve coefficient through a valve drops to or below the vapor
Gf = liquid specific gravity at flow temperature pressure of a liquid, causing it to vaporize and
(water = 1.0) rapidly expand in gas form. Vapor bubbles flow
downstream where the fluid velocity decreases
Gg = gas specific gravity (air = 1.0) and the surrounding pressure increases.
P1 = inlet pressure (psia) The vapor bubbles then collapse or implode,
P2 = outlet pressure (psia) causing sudden condensation and producing
shock waves that may result in excessive noise,
ΔP = inlet pressure minus outlet pressure (psi) vibration, erosion or mechanical damage to
q = liquid flow in gallons per minute (gpm) valve and/or piping. In most liquid applications,
Tsh = steam superheat (°F) the outlet pressure (psia) should be no less
than one-third the inlet pressure (psia). Where
W = gas flow in pounds per hour (pph) extremely large differential pressures are
required, the use of multiple valves in series
will reduce the possibility of cavitation.

Water
where:
q = liquid flow in gallons per minute (gpm)
ΔP = inlet pressure minus outlet pressure (psi)
q
Cv = ΔP

example:
medium = water
q = 160 U.S. gallons per minute
ΔP = 25 [100 psia inlet – 75 psia outlet]

160 160
Cv = √ 25 or Cv = 5
or Cv = 32

263
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Technical Information
VALVE SELECTION
Saturated Steam
T E C H N I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

where:
W = gas flow in pounds per
hour (pph)
P1 = inlet pressure (psia)
P2 = outlet pressure (psia)
Choked Flow (Critical Drop)
ΔP = inlet pressure minus outlet Steam and Other Gases
pressure (psi)
When P2 is less than 1/2 P1, set P2 equal to 1/2 P1 in the
appropriate sizing equation for steam or gases.
W
Cv = 2.1 √ΔP(P1 + P2)
Steam, as are all gases, is a compressible fluid. The
maximum velocity of the steam or gas through the valve
is limited to the speed of sound. When the outlet pressure
(psia) is equal to one-half (or less) of the inlet pressure
example: (psia), the fluid velocity through the valve reaches the
speed of sound, and flow cannot be further increased by
medium = saturated steam a reduced outlet pressure. This is known as a choked
W = 4000 pph flow condition. The pressure drop under these conditions
is known as critical drop.
P1 = 100 psia
P2 = 75 psia example:

ΔP = 25 [100 psia inlet – 75 psia outlet] medium = saturated steam

W = 4000 pph
P1 = 100 psia
P2 = 35 psia (actual)
4000 ΔP = 65 psia
Cv = 2.1 √25(100 + 75) Since the outlet pressure is less than 1/2 of the inlet
pressure, choked flow will occur. Set P 2 to equal 1/2 of P1.
Use this revised P2 in the normal sizing formulae.
4000
Cv = 138.9
P2 = P1 / 2 P2 = 100 / 2 P2 = 50

ΔP = P1 - P2 ΔP = P1 - P1/2 ΔP = 100 - 50 ΔP = 50
W
Cv =
Cv = 28.8 2.1 ΔP(P1 + P2)
4000
Cv = 2.1 50(100 + 50)

4000
Cv = 181.9

Cv = 22

264
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Technical Information
STEAM PROPERTIES
Steam is perfectly transparent, colorless, dry and invisible. When it comes
in contact with air, it partially condenses and forms a visible mist, or wet
steam. Wet steam has the same temperature as dry steam contained

T E C H N I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N
under the same pressure.
Steam in its most common state is known as saturated steam. Its
temperature is the same as that of the water from which it is formed and
is dependent on the pressure under which it is contained. Superheated
steam is created when saturated steam is further heated from another
source after leaving the water from which it is formed.

Saturated Steam Pressure and Temperature

Vacuum Temperature Vacuum Temperature Latent Heat
in Hg °F kPag °C BTU/lb
29.74 32 -100.7 0 1075.5
25 133 -85 56 1018
20 161 -68 72 1002
15 179 -51 82 991
10 192 -34 89 983
5 203 -17 95 976

Pressure Temperature Pressure Temperature Latent Heat

psig °F kPag °C BTU/lb
0 212 0 100 970
5 227 34 108 961
10 239 69 115 953
15 250 103 121 946
20 259 138 126 939
25 267 172 130 934
30 274 207 134 929
35 281 241 138 924
40 287 276 142 920
45 292 310 145 916
50 298 345 148 912
60 307 414 153 905
70 316 483 158 898
80 324 552 162 892
90 331 621 166 886
100 338 689 170 881
110 344 758 173 875
120 350 827 177 871
130 356 896 180 866
140 361 965 183 861
150 366 1034 185 857
175 377 1207 192 847
200 388 1379 198 837
225 397 1551 203 828
250 406 1724 208 820
Adjusted to Sea Level — 14.696 psia (760 mm Hg)

265
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Technical Information
STEAM PROPERTIES
• One cubic foot of water will become 1646 cubic feet of steam when
evaporated at zero psi gauge pressure and a temperature of 212°F.
T E C H N I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N

• One cubic foot of steam weighs 0.03732 pounds, and one pound of
steam occupies 26.796 cubic feet at zero psi gauge pressure and a
temperature of 212°F.
• One cubic foot of dry air weighs 0.08073 pounds, and one pound of
dry air occupies 12.387 cubic feet at zero psi gauge pressure and a
temperature of 0°F.
• The latent heat created from the vaporization of water to steam is:
1 Gal. (U.S.) = 0.1337 ft3
970 BTU per pound @ 14.7 psia
1 Gal. (U.S.) water = 8.337 lbs
889 BTU per pound @ 100 psia
1 ft3 water = 62.364 lbs
• One British Thermal Unit (BTU) is the amount of heat required to raise
the temperature of one pound of water by one degree Fahrenheit,
usually from 39.2°F to 40.2°F.

Steam Required to Heat Water

According to Temperature Rise and Gallons per Hour
U.S. Gallons of Water Heated per Hour (for fuel oil — multiply pounds per hour listed by 0.5)
25 50 75 100 150 200 300 400 500 750 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 7500 10000
Temperature
Rise (°F) Pounds of Steam per Hour Required
10 — — — — — 17 25 33 42 63 83 120 167 250 330 420 620 830
20 — — — — 25 33 50 67 83 125 167 250 330 500 670 830 1250 1670
30 — — — 25 37 50 75 100 125 190 250 370 500 750 1000 1250 1900 2500
40 — — 25 33 50 66 100 130 170 250 330 500 660 1000 1330 1700 2500 3300
50 — 21 31 42 63 84 125 170 210 310 420 630 840 1250 1680 2100 3100 4200
60 12 25 37 50 75 100 150 200 250 370 500 750 1000 1500 2000 2500 3700 5000
80 16 33 50 67 100 130 200 270 330 500 670 1000 1340 2000 2700 3300 5000 6700
100 21 42 63 83 120 170 250 330 420 630 830 1250 1700 2500 3300 4200 6300 8300
120 25 50 75 100 150 200 300 400 500 750 1000 1500 2000 3000 4000 5000 7500 10000
140 29 58 88 117 175 230 350 470 580 880 1170 1750 2340 3500 4700 5800 8800 11700
160 33 66 100 133 200 270 400 530 660 1000 1330 2000 2700 4000 5300 6600 10000 13300
180 37 75 113 150 225 300 450 600 750 1125 1500 2200 3050 4500 5950 7500 11300 14950
200 42 84 126 165 250 330 500 660 840 1260 1660 2500 3400 5000 6600 8300 12600 16600

266
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
 Using the Table
1. Find the units you wish to convert FROM in the left hand column. 2. Find the units you wish to convert TO in the top row.
3. Insert the multiplier shown at the intersection into the following formula: FROM units x MULTIPLIER = TO units
Example: 100 psi x 6.894757 = 689.475 kPa

TO PSI in H2O mm H2O cm H2O oz/in2 mbar bar mm Hg cm Hg in Hg kg/cm2 kPa MPa ft H2O m H2O atm
FROM
psi 1 27.68068 703.1 70.308927 16 68.95 0.06894757 51.71486 5.171486 2.03602 0.070306958 6.894757 0.0069 2.306723 0.70308927 0.0680460

in H2O 0.03612628 1 25.4 2.54 0.578020 2.488 0.00249 0.0735539 0.187 0.0735539 0.00254219 0.2490819 0.00025 0.08333 0.0254 0.00245825

mm H2O 0.001422 0.0394 1 0.1 0.0227 0.098 0.000098 0.0735 0.00735 0.00289 0.0001 0.0098 0.00001 0.00328084 0.001 0.000097

cm H2O 0.0142229 0.3937 10 1 0.227566 0.98 0.000980634 0.7355372 0.0735 0.0289581 0.00099997 0.980634 0.0001 0.032808 0.01 0.000967814

oz/in2 0.0625 1.73004 43.943 4.394308 1 4.31 0.004309223 3.23218 0.323 0.12725125 0.04394308 0.4309223 0.00043 0.14417 0.04394308 0.004252875

mbar 0.0145 0.4012 10.20 1.020 0.2321 1 0.001 0.75 0.075 0.0295 0.00102 0.1 0.0001 0.03345622 0.00101975 0.000987

bar 14.5038 401.8596 10,197 1019.7466 232.0608 1000 1 750.0626 75 29.53 1.019716 100 0.1 33.4833 10.197466 0.986923

mm Hg 0.0193368 0.535255 13.60 1.359554 0.3093888 1.333 0.001333225 1 0.1 0.039370079 0.00135951 0.1333225 0.000133 0.0446046 0.01359554 0.0013157895

cm Hg 0.1934 5.358 136.0 13.60 3.10 13.33 0.01333 10 1 0.394 0.0136 1.333 0.00133 0.44604625 0.13595509 0.01316

in Hg 0.4911542 13.595484 345.3 34.53253 7.85847 33.86 0.03386389 25.4 2.54 1 0.0345316 3.386389 0.00339 1.132957 0.3453253 0.0334211

kg/cm2 14.223343 393.711806 10,000.3 1000.028 227.57349 980.7 0.98066494 735.5588 73.56 28.95901 1 98.066494 0.0981 32.809312 10.00028 0.967841598

kPa 0.1450377 4.014742 101.97 10.19745 2.320603 10 0.01 7.500610 0.75 0.2952997 0.01019716 1 0.001 0.3345618 0.1019745 0.009869235

MPa 145.04 4019 101,975 10,197 2321 10,000 10 7500 750 295.3 10.2 1000 1 334.56218 101.9748043 9.869

ft H2O 0.433515 12 304.80 30.48 6.93624 29.88981 0.02988981 22.4192 2.24192 0.882646 0.03047912 2.988981 0.002988981 1 0.3048 0.02949896

m H2O 1.42229 39.370079 1000 100 22.7566 980.66494 0.98066494 73.55372 7.35537 2.89581 0.099997 9.8063439 0.0098063439 3.2808399 1 0.0967814

atm 14.696 406.794 10,333 1033.2633 235.136 1013 1.0132535 760 76 29.9213 1.033231 101.32535 0.1013 33.8995 10.332633 1
All units of H2 O at 39.2°F(4°C), all units of Hg at 32°F(0°C)

12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com
Hydraulic Ram Conversion Temperature Conversion
Use the formulas below to convert tons °F = Degrees Fahrenheit °C = Degrees Celsius °R = Degrees Reaumur
on a given diameter ram to PSI. °F = (°C x 1.8) + 32 °C = (°F – 32) x 0.5555 °R = (°F – 32) x 0.4444
(Tons on ram x 2000) / (0.7854 x dia.2) = PSI °F = (°R x 2.25) + 32 °C = (°R x 1.25) °R = (°C x 0.80)
(Dia.2 x 0.7854 x PSI) / 2000 = Tons on ram
At sea level:
Water boils at 212°F, 100°C and 80°R
Water freezes at 32°F, 0°C and 0°R
Technical Information PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE CONVERSION

267
T E C H N I C A L I N F O R M AT I O N
 Miscellaneous Information
Warranty
The H.O. Trerice Co. warrants products of its manufacture to be free from defects in workmanship and
material for a period of one year from the date of shipment to the original purchaser. Trerice will repair or
replace such product (F.O.B. Factory) should our internal examination reveal it to be defective. Product
used in conjunction with non-Trerice product, or in any way modified or altered, may not be covered
under the terms of this warranty. Trerice assumes no other responsibility or liability.

Trademarks
The following trademarks are not owned by Trerice and are the property of their respective owners:
Tri-Clamp®
Teflon®
Viton®

Memberships
The H.O. Trerice Co. is a proud member of the Fluid Controls Institute (FCI) and the Valve Manufacturers
Association of America (VMA), and participates with The Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation
Society (ISA). These nonprofit associations work with manufacturers and other organizations to develop
standards and exchange statistical and technical knowledge.

Caution
All Trerice products should be carefully selected to meet the demands of the particular application.
The information contained in this catalog is offered only as a guide to assist in making the proper
selection. Selection of the proper product, as well as its installation and use, is the sole responsibility
of the user. Improper application or product misuse may cause failure of the product, resulting in
possible personal injury or property damage. For correct use and application of all Trerice products,
please refer to the proper standard set forth by ASME. These documents may be obtained from the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Three Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990.

A word about this catalog

The information contained in this catalog was correct at the time of printing. Due to the Trerice
commitment of continuous development and improvement, these specifications are subject to change
without notice. Any information contained within this catalog should not be interpreted as a contractual
agreement by Trerice. All orders are subject to the approval of the H.O. Trerice Co., Oak Park, Michigan.

268
12950 W. Eight Mile Road • Oak Park, MI 48237-3288 • TEL:248/399-8000 • FAX: 248/399-7246 • www.TRERICE.com